diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'docs')
130 files changed, 25893 insertions, 38 deletions
diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast.po b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..44c9a835 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast.po @@ -0,0 +1,4505 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE +# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Installer Help package. +# +# Translators: +# enolp <enolp@softastur.org>, 2015,2020 +# Ḷḷumex03, 2014 +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-09-08 15:58+0300\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2020-04-02 02:10+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: enolp <enolp@softastur.org>\n" +"Language-Team: Asturian (http://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/mageia/" +"language/ast/)\n" +"Language: ast\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:31 +msgid "License and Release Notes" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:35 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=" +"\"acceptLicense-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" align=\"center\" revision=" +"\"4\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=" +"\"live-license.png\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im2\" revision=\"5\" align=" +"\"center\" condition=\"live\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=" +"\"acceptLicense-im1\" fileref=\"dx2-license.png\" align=\"center\" revision=" +"\"4\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=" +"\"live-license.png\" xml:id=\"acceptLicense-im2\" revision=\"5\" align=" +"\"center\" condition=\"live\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:46 +msgid "License Agreement" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:51 +msgid "" +"Before installing Mageia, please read the license terms and conditions " +"carefully." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:56 +msgid "" +"These terms and conditions apply to the entire Mageia distribution and must " +"be accepted before you can continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:61 +msgid "" +"To proceed, simply select <emphasis>Accept</emphasis> and then click on " +"<emphasis>Next</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:66 +msgid "" +"If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for your " +"interest in Mageia. Clicking <emphasis>Quit</emphasis> will reboot your " +"computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:76 +msgid "Release Notes" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/acceptLicense.xml:83 +msgid "" +"Important information about this particular Mageia release can be viewed by " +"clicking on the <emphasis>Release Notes</emphasis> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:3 +msgid "Supplemental Installation Media" +msgstr "" + +#. papoteur 2013-04-13 - created +#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection +#. marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell +#. 2018/02/10 apb: Text and typgraphy. +#. 2018/02/16 apb: Update dx2-add_supplemental_media.png to Mga6 +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media." +"png\" xml:id=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1\" align=\"center\" revision=" +"\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media." +"png\" xml:id=\"dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1\" align=\"center\" revision=" +"\"1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:23 +msgid "" +"This screen shows you the list of already recognised repositories. You can " +"add other sources for packages, like an optical-disc or a remote source. " +"The source selection determines which packages will be available during the " +"subsequent steps." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:28 +msgid "For a network source, there are two steps to follow:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:32 +msgid "Choosing and activating the network, if not already up." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:36 +msgid "" +"Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a " +"mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by " +"Mageia, like the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis>, the <emphasis>Tainted</" +"emphasis> repositories and the <emphasis>Updates</emphasis>. With the URL, " +"you can designate a specific repository or your own NFS installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/add_supplemental_media.xml:46 +msgid "" +"If you are updating a 64-bit installation which may contain some 32-bit " +"packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by " +"selecting one of the Network protocols here. The 64-bit DVD ISO only " +"contains 64-bit and <emphasis>noarch</emphasis> packages, it will not be " +"able to update the 32-bit packages. However, after adding an online mirror, " +"the installer will find the needed 32-bit packages there." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:9 +msgid "User Management" +msgstr "" + +#. Lebarhon: 20170210 updated for Mageia 6 (umask) +#. 2018/02/12 apb: Text and Typography. +#. 2018/02/19 apb: Update dx2-setRootPassword.png to Mga6. +#. 2018/02/21 apb: Changed title from 'User and Superuser Management' to 'User Management'. Docteam approved (plus, the SC title is User Management). +#. Also changed 'Advanced User Management' to 'User Management (advanced)'. +#. 2018/02/24 apb: Changed list style. +#. 2019/08/10 apb: Added missing 'condition' profile for live-user1.png. +#. 2019/08/11 apb: [1] Reword 1.1 (including Note) [2] Reword 1.2 Password text. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/addUser.xml:28 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"setRootPassword-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata fileref=\"live-user1.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-setRootPassword.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"setRootPassword-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata fileref=\"live-user1.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:40 +msgid "Set Administrator (root) Password:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:44 +msgid "" +"It is advisable for all Mageia installations to set a <literal>superuser</" +"literal> (Administrator) password, usually called the <emphasis>root </" +"emphasis>password in Linux. You need to repeat the same password in the box " +"underneath, to check that the first entry was not mistyped." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:51 +msgid "" +"As you type a password into the top box a shield will change from red-to-" +"yellow-to-green depending on the strength of the password. A green shield " +"shows you are using a strong password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:55 +msgid "" +"All passwords are case-sensitive. It is best to use a mixture of letters " +"(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:63 +msgid "Enter a user" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:66 +msgid "" +"Add a User here. A regular user has fewer privileges than the " +"<literal>superuser</literal> (root), but enough to use the Internet, office " +"applications or play games and anything else the average user might use a " +"computer for." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:73 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Icon</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:75 +msgid "Click on this button if you want to change the user's icon" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:80 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Real Name</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:82 +msgid "Insert the user's real name into this text box" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:86 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login Name</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:88 +msgid "" +"Enter the user login name or let DrakX use a version of the user's real " +"name. <emphasis role=\"bold\">The login name is case-sensitive.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><caution><simpara> +#: en/addUser.xml:93 +msgid "" +"The login entered here should be different to any login currently in use for " +"your <filename>/home</filename> directory. Some user parameters will be " +"written in the user space, and some can overwrite actual data such as " +"Firefox, Thunderbird or Kmail data..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:102 en/setupBootloader.xml:182 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:104 +msgid "Type in the user password (remembering the advice in the Note above)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:107 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password (again):</emphasis> Retype the user " +"password. DrakX will check that you have not mistyped the password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:114 +msgid "" +"Any users added while installing Mageia, will have a home directory that is " +"both read and write protected (umask=0027)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:117 +msgid "" +"You can add any extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - Summary</" +"emphasis> step during the install. Choose <emphasis>User management</" +"emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:121 +msgid "The access permissions can also be changed after the install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/addUser.xml:128 +msgid "User Management (advanced)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:131 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> option allows you to edit further settings " +"for the user you are adding." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:136 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Shell</emphasis>: This drop-down list allows you to change the " +"shell available to any user you added in the previous screen. Options are " +"<literal>Bash</literal>, <literal>Dash</literal> and <literal>Sh</literal>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:143 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>User ID</emphasis>: Here you can set the user ID for any user you " +"added in the previous screen. If you are unsure what the purpose of this is, " +"then leave it blank." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/addUser.xml:149 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Group ID</emphasis>: This lets you set the group ID. Again, if " +"unsure, leave it blank." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:10 +msgid "Choose the mount points" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 28 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back +#. removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 +#. barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE" +#. with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) +#. Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes +#. Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans +#. write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it +#. And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) +#. 2012-04-19 Language proofreading done +#. 2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2019/01/04 apb: Typo & minor reword on custom mount-points. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:38 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-chooseMountpoints.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"live-chooseMountPoints-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-chooseMountpoints.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"chooseMountPoints-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-chooseMountpoints.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"live-chooseMountPoints-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If " +"you don't agree with the DrakX suggestions, you can change the mount points " +"yourself." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:55 +msgid "" +"To the left of the drop-down menus is a list of available partitions. For " +"example: <filename>sda</filename> is a hard drive - and <filename>5</" +"filename> is a <emphasis>partition number</emphasis>, followed by " +"the<emphasis> (capacity, mount point, filesystem type)</emphasis> of the " +"partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:63 +msgid "" +"If you have several partitions, you can choose various different " +"<emphasis>mount points</emphasis> from the drop down menu, such as " +"<filename>/</filename>, <filename>/home</filename> and <filename>/var</" +"filename>. You can even make your own mount points, for instance <filename>/" +"video</filename> for a partition where you want to store your films, or " +"perhaps <filename>/Data</filename> for all your data files." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:73 +msgid "" +"For any partitions that you don't need to make use of, you can leave the " +"mount point field blank." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:79 +msgid "" +"If you make any changes here, ensure you still have a <filename>/</filename> " +"(root) partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:84 +msgid "" +"If you are not sure what to choose, click <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> to " +"go back and then tick <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>, where " +"you can click on a partition to see its type and size." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/ask_mntpoint_s.xml:90 +msgid "" +"If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on <emphasis>Next</" +"emphasis>, and choose whether you only want to format the partition " +"suggested by DrakX, or more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/bestTime.xml:5 +msgid "Clock Settings" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/bestTime.xml:8 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-" +"bestTime.png\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"bestTime-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-" +"bestTime.png\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"bestTime-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/bestTime.xml:12 +msgid "" +"Here, you can select whether your computer internal clock is set to local " +"time or UTC time." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/bestTime.xml:14 +msgid "" +"In the <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> tab, you can enable automatic time " +"synchronization and specify an NTP server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:10 +msgid "Boot Mageia as Live system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:14 +msgid "Booting the medium" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can boot directly from a Live DVD or USB. Usually, you just need to plug " +"the USB device in or place the DVD in the drive and restart the computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:19 +msgid "" +"If the computer does not automatically boot from the USB or DVD you may need " +"to reconfigure your BIOS Boot Disk priority. Alternatively, you might try " +"accessing the boot device menu to select a device from which the computer " +"will boot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><tip><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:24 +msgid "" +"To access the BIOS or boot menu when the computer is starting, you can try " +"pressing either <keycap>F2</keycap>, <keycap>Del</keycap> or <keycap>Esc</" +"keycap> for the BIOS, or <keycap>Esc</keycap>, <keycap>F8</keycap>, " +"<keycap>F10</keycap> or <keycap>F11</keycap> for the boot device menu. These " +"(fairly common) keys are just a selection of possible options though." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:32 +msgid "" +"The actual screen that you will first see when booting from the Live media " +"will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of the Legacy (BIOS) or " +"UEFI type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:39 +msgid "In BIOS/CSM/Legacy mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/bootLive.xml:42 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-bootCSM.png\" align=\"center\"/> " +"</imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-bootCSM.png\" align=\"center\"/> " +"</imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:46 +msgid "First screen while booting in BIOS mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:50 en/bootLive.xml:104 en/installer.xml:108 +#: en/installer.xml:156 +msgid "Menu" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:52 en/bootLive.xml:106 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot Mageia</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:53 +msgid "" +"This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB " +"media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:56 +msgid "Once the boot is done, you can proceed to the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:60 en/bootLive.xml:72 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">+ use non-free video drivers (slower to boot)</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:62 +msgid "Boot the Mageia Live system using non-free video drivers" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:68 en/bootLive.xml:112 en/installer.xml:111 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install Mageia</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:69 en/bootLive.xml:113 +msgid "This option will install Mageia to a hard disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:74 +msgid "Install Mageia using non-free video drivers" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:79 en/installer.xml:127 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Memory Test</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:80 en/installer.xml:129 +msgid "" +"Test the installed RAM by performing multiple read and write operations. " +"Reboot to end the test." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:84 en/bootLive.xml:116 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\"> F2 Language</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:85 en/bootLive.xml:117 +msgid "" +"Press <keycap>F2</keycap> to have the installer use a specific language " +"during the installation. Use the arrow keys to select the language then " +"press <keycap>Enter</keycap>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/bootLive.xml:93 +msgid "In UEFI mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/bootLive.xml:96 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../live-bootUEFI.png\" " +"align=\"center\" xml:id=\"bootUEFI-im1\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"../live-bootUEFI.png\" " +"align=\"center\" xml:id=\"bootUEFI-im1\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:100 +msgid "First screen while booting in UEFI mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:107 +msgid "" +"This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB " +"media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS). Once the " +"boot is done, you can proceed to the installation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/bootLive.xml:123 +msgid "" +"If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above menu options " +"duplicated, and in this case, you should choose from the menu pair that will " +"be suffixed with \"USB\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:16 +msgid "Desktop Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:23 +msgid "Some choices made here will open other screens with related options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:26 +msgid "" +"After the selection step(s), you will see a slideshow during the " +"installation of required packages. The slideshow can be disabled by pressing " +"the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:31 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-chooseDesktop.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Choose whether you prefer to use the KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop " +"environment. Both come with a full set of useful applications and tools." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/chooseDesktop.xml:44 +msgid "" +"Select <emphasis>Custom</emphasis> if you do not wish to use either (or, " +"actually use both) of these, or if you want to modify the default software " +"choices for these desktop environments. The LXDE desktop, for instance, is " +"lighter than the previous two, sporting less eye candy and having fewer " +"packages installed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:3 +msgid "Package Group Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. Lebarhon 20170209 Updated SC +#. 2018/02/25 apb: add xreflabel to this section. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:11 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png" +"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-choosePackageGroups.png" +"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:16 +msgid "" +"Packages are arranged into common groups, to make choosing what you need on " +"your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however " +"more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which " +"become visible as the mouse is hovered over them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:23 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Workstation</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:27 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Server</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:31 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphical Environment</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:35 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Individual Package Selection</emphasis>: you can use " +"this option to manually add or remove packages" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackageGroups.xml:40 +msgid "" +"See <xref linkend=\"minimal-install\"/> for instructions on how to do a " +"minimal install (without or with X & IceWM)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:3 +msgid "Choose Individual Packages" +msgstr "" + +#. 2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page +#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: add xreflabel to this section. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" +"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" +"\" align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:18 +msgid "" +"Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customize your installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/choosePackagesTree.xml:21 +msgid "" +"After having made your choice, you can click on the <emphasis>floppy</" +"emphasis> icon at the bottom of the page to save your choice of packages " +"(saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this file to install the " +"same packages on another system, by pressing the same button during install " +"and choosing to load it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureServices.xml:3 +msgid "Configure your Services" +msgstr "" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. 2018/02/16 apb: Minor text adjustment. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: a) add xreflabel for this section. b) Added some bullets to the text. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureServices.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png" +"\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-configureServices.png" +"\" xml:id=\"configureServices-im1\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose which services should start when you boot your system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Click on a triangle to expand a group to all the relevant services. The " +"settings DrakX chose are usually good." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:31 +msgid "" +"If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info " +"box below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureServices.xml:37 +msgid "Only change things when you know very well what you are doing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:3 +msgid "Configure your Timezone" +msgstr "" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. 2018/02/13 apb: Minor text adjustment. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: Added xreflabel to this section. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:15 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=" +"\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"configureTimezoneUTC.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata format=\"png\" fileref=\"live-timeZone.png\" " +"align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=" +"\"configureTimezoneUTC-im1\" align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-" +"configureTimezoneUTC.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata format=\"png\" fileref=\"live-timeZone.png\" " +"align=\"center\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:26 +msgid "" +"Choose your timezone by choosing your country, or a city close to you in the " +"same timezone." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:32 +msgid "" +"In the next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time " +"or to GMT, also known as UTC." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/configureTimezoneUTC.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they " +"are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:27 +msgid "Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_card_list-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_card_list." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_card_list-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:38 +msgid "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually " +"correctly identify your video device." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:41 +msgid "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know " +"which one you have, you can select it from the tree by:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:44 en/configureX_monitor.xml:78 +msgid "Vendor" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:48 +msgid "then the make of your card" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:52 +msgid "and the model of card" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:56 +msgid "" +"If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in " +"the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the " +"<emphasis>Xorg</emphasis> category, which provides more than 40 generic and " +"open source video card drivers. If you still can't find a specific driver " +"for your card there is the option of using the VESA driver which provides " +"basic capabilities." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><caution><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access " +"to the <emphasis>Command Line Interface</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_card_list.xml:68 +msgid "" +"Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which " +"may only be available in the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository and in " +"some cases only from the card manufacturers' websites. The " +"<emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository needs to be explicitly enabled to " +"access them. If you didn't enable it previously, you should do this after " +"your first reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:23 +msgid "Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:28 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_chooser." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_chooser-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:34 +msgid "" +"No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) " +"you chose for this install of Mageia, they are all based on a graphical user " +"interface system called <literal>X Window System</literal>, or simply " +"<quote>X</quote>. So in order for KDE Plasma, GNOME, LXDE or any other " +"graphical environment to work well, the following <quote>X</quote> settings " +"need to be correct." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Choose the appropriate settings manually if you think the details are " +"incorrect, or if none are shown." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:46 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphics Card</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If you need to, you can select a specific card from this expandable list. " +"See <xref linkend=\"configureX_card_list\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:54 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Monitor</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:57 +msgid "" +"You can choose Plug 'n Play, if applicable, or choose your monitor from the " +"<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis> or <emphasis>Generic</emphasis> lists. Choose " +"<emphasis>Custom</emphasis> if you prefer to manually set the horizontal and " +"vertical refresh rates of your monitor. See <xref linkend=" +"\"configureX_monitor\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:65 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Resolution</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:68 +msgid "The resolution and color depth of your monitor can be set here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:73 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Test</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:76 +msgid "" +"The test button does not always appear during install. If the option is " +"there, and you test your settings, you should be asked to confirm that your " +"settings are correct. If you answer <emphasis>Yes</emphasis>, the settings " +"will be kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration " +"screen and be able to reconfigure everything until the test result is " +"satisfactory. If the test option is not available, then make sure your " +"settings are on the safe side." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:87 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Options</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:90 +msgid "Here you can choose to enable or disable various options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/configureX_chooser.xml:95 +msgid "" +"There is a risk of damaging a monitor if you choose refresh rates that are " +"outside the frequency range of that monitor. This applies to older CRT " +"displays: modern monitors will reject an unsupported frequency and normally " +"enter standby mode." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:26 +msgid "Choosing your Monitor" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:29 +msgid "" +"DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually " +"correctly identify yours." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:34 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Selecting a monitor with different characteristics " +"could damage your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something " +"without knowing what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should " +"consult your monitor documentation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:42 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-configureX_monitor." +"png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"configureX_monitor-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:50 +msgid "Custom" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:53 +msgid "" +"This option allows you to set two critical parameters: the vertical refresh " +"rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the " +"screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are " +"displayed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:59 +msgid "" +"It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor " +"type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you " +"may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and " +"consult your monitor documentation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:68 +msgid "Plug'n Play" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:71 +msgid "" +"This is the default option and automatically tries to determine the monitor " +"type from the monitor database." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:81 +msgid "" +"If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which " +"one you have, you can choose it from the options by selecting:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:90 +msgid "Manufacturer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:94 +msgid "Monitor model" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:100 +msgid "Generic" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/configureX_monitor.xml:103 +msgid "" +"Selecting this group will list approximately 30 display configurations such " +"as 1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat-panel displays as used in laptops. " +"This is often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the VESA " +"card driver when your video hardware cannot be determined automatically. " +"Once again, it may be wise to be conservative in your selections." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:24 +msgid "Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:29 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:40 +msgid "" +"Modify the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, " +"change the filesystem or size of a partition and even view their details " +"before you start." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:47 +msgid "" +"There is a tab at the top for every detected hard disk (or other storage " +"device, like a USB key), for example: <filename>sda</filename>, " +"<filename>sdb</filename>, <filename>sdc</filename> etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:54 +msgid "" +"For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, " +"or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe it. " +"<emphasis>Expert mode</emphasis> provides more options such as to label " +"(name) a partition, or to choose a partition type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Continue until you have adjusted everything to your satisfaction, then click " +"<emphasis>Done</emphasis> when you're ready." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:71 +msgid "" +"Take care with the <emphasis>Clear all</emphasis> option, use it only if you " +"are sure you want to wipe all partitions on the selected storage device." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:77 +msgid "" +"If you wish to use encryption on your <filename>/</filename> partition you " +"must ensure that you have a separate <filename>/boot</filename> partition. " +"The encryption option for the <filename>/boot</filename> partition must NOT " +"be set, otherwise your system will be unbootable." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:89 +msgid "" +"If you are installing Mageia on a UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI System " +"Partition) is present and correctly mounted on <filename>/boot/EFI</" +"filename>. See Figure 1 below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:95 +msgid "" +"If you are installing Mageia on a Legacy/GPT system, check that a BIOS boot " +"partition is present and of the correct type. See Figure 2 below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><title> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:103 +msgid "EFI System Partition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:106 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-diskdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-diskdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-diskdrake2.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:105 en/diskdrake.xml:119 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><figure><title> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:117 +msgid "BIOS boot partition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/diskdrake.xml:120 en/doPartitionDisks.xml:206 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks3.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section> +#: en/diskPartitioning.xml:1 +msgid "en" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/diskPartitioning.xml:4 +msgid "Partitioning" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:31 +msgid "Suggested Partitioning" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:34 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) along with the " +"DrakX partitioning proposals for where to install Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:38 +msgid "" +"The actual options available from those shown below will vary according to " +"the layout and content of your particular hard drive(s)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:43 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><title> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:53 +msgid "Main Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:56 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Use Existing Partitions</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:59 +msgid "" +"If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have " +"been found and may be used for the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:65 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Use Free Space</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:68 +msgid "" +"If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for " +"your new Mageia installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:74 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Use Free Space on a Windows Partition</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:77 +msgid "" +"If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may " +"offer to use it. This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia " +"installation but see the warning below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:87 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:82 +msgid "" +"With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in " +"light blue and the proposed Mageia partition in dark blue with their " +"intended sizes just underneath. You have the option to modify these sizes by " +"clicking and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the following " +"screenshot:<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:97 +msgid "" +"This involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition, and therefore is " +"a risky operation, so you should make sure you have backed up all important " +"files before proceeding." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><important><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:103 +msgid "" +"The partition must be \"clean\", meaning that Windows must have closed down " +"correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, " +"although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been " +"moved out of the area that is about to be used for Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:112 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Erase and use Entire Disk</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:115 +msgid "This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:119 +msgid "" +"This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care! If you " +"intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already have data " +"on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use this option." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:127 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Custom Disk Partitioning</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:130 +msgid "" +"This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your " +"hard drive(s)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:136 +msgid "" +"If you are not using the <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis> " +"option, then the installer will allocate the available space according to " +"the following rules:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:142 +msgid "" +"If the total available space is less than 50 GB, then only one partition is " +"created. This will be the <filename>/</filename> (root) partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:148 +msgid "" +"If the total available space is greater than 50 GB, then three partitions " +"are created" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:153 +msgid "" +"6/19 of the total available place is allocated to <filename>/</filename> " +"with a maximum of 50 GB" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:158 +msgid "1/19 is allocated to <filename>swap</filename> with a maximum of 4 GB" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:163 +msgid "the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to <filename>/home</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:170 +msgid "" +"This means that from 160 GB or greater available space, the installer will " +"create three partitions:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:175 +msgid "50 GB for <filename>/</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:179 +msgid "4 GB for <filename>swap</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:183 +msgid "and the remainder for <filename>/home</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:188 +msgid "" +"If you are using a UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be " +"automatically detected - or created if it does not exist yet - and mounted " +"on <filename>/boot/EFI</filename>. The <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</" +"emphasis> option is the only one that allows to check it has been correctly " +"done." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:194 +msgid "" +"If you are using a Legacy (also known as BIOS) system with a GPT partitioned " +"disk, you need to create a BIOS boot partition if it doesn't already exist. " +"It should be about 1 MiB with no mount point. It can be created with the " +"Installer, under <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>, like any " +"other partition. Be sure to select <quote>BIOS boot partition</quote> for " +"filesystem type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:201 +msgid "See <xref linkend=\"diskdrake\"/> for information on how to proceed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:216 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks4.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks4.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-doPartitionDisks4.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-doPartitionDisks4.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:226 +msgid "" +"Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the " +"previous standard of 512. Due to lack of available hardware, the " +"partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested with such a " +"drive." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:231 +msgid "" +"Some SSD devices now use an erase block size over 1 MB. If you have such a " +"device we suggest that you partition the drive in advance, using an " +"alternative partitioning tool like gparted, and to use the following " +"settings:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:238 +msgid "<emphasis>Align to</emphasis> = MiB" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:242 +msgid "<emphasis>Free space preceding (MiB)</emphasis> = 2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/doPartitionDisks.xml:246 +msgid "" +"Also make sure all partitions are created using an even number of megabytes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:15 en/DrakLive-cover.xml:54 en/DrakLive.xml:16 +msgid "Installation from LIVE medium" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:17 en/DrakX-cover.xml:15 +msgid "<publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><date> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:23 +msgid "March 2016" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><revremark> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:25 +msgid "Mageia 5" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:30 en/DrakX-cover.xml:28 +msgid "The Official Documentation for Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:33 en/DrakX-cover.xml:31 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../mageia-2013.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../mageia-2013.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:38 en/DrakLive.xml:25 en/DrakX-cover.xml:36 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:12 en/DrakX.xml:45 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:42 en/DrakLive.xml:29 en/DrakX-cover.xml:40 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:15 en/DrakX.xml:49 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:46 en/DrakX-cover.xml:44 en/DrakX-inline.xml:17 +#: en/DrakX.xml:53 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><note> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:56 en/DrakLive.xml:19 en/DrakX-cover.xml:66 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:6 en/DrakX.xml:39 en/selectKeyboard.xml:49 +msgid "<note>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para><note><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:57 en/DrakLive.xml:20 en/DrakX-cover.xml:67 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:7 en/DrakX.xml:40 +msgid "" +"No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which " +"screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make " +"while installing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/DrakLive-cover.xml:60 en/DrakLive.xml:23 en/DrakX-cover.xml:70 +#: en/DrakX-inline.xml:10 en/DrakX.xml:43 en/selectKeyboard.xml:56 +msgid "</note>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/DrakLive.xml:33 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact the <link " +"ns6:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation " +"Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:13 en/DrakX-cover.xml:64 en/DrakX-inline.xml:3 +#: en/DrakX.xml:36 +msgid "Installation with DrakX" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><date> +#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:21 +msgid "February 2014" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><revhistory><revision><revremark> +#: en/DrakX-cover.xml:23 +msgid "Mageia 4" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:3 +msgid "Congratulations" +msgstr "Norabona" + +#. Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC +#. 2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: Added clickable link to mageia.org +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" " +"align=\"center\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" fileref=\"dx2-exitInstall.png\" " +"align=\"center\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"exitInstall-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:18 +msgid "" +"You have finished installing and configuring Mageia and it is now safe to " +"remove the installation medium and reboot your computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:22 +msgid "" +"After rebooting, you can use the bootloader screen to choose which operating " +"system to start (if there are more than one on your computer)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:26 +msgid "" +"If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install " +"will be automatically selected and started." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:30 +msgid "Enjoy!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/exitInstall.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Visit <link ns4:href=\"http://www.mageia.org/en/\">www.mageia.org/en/</link> " +"if you have any questions or want to contribute to Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/firewall.xml:16 +msgid "Firewall" +msgstr "Tornafuéu" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:19 +msgid "" +"This section allows you to configure some simple firewall rules: they " +"determine which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the " +"target system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the " +"system to be accessible from the Internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/firewall.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-firewall.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-firewall.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:31 +msgid "" +"In the default setting (no button is checked), no service of the system is " +"accessible from the network. The <emphasis>Everything (no firewall)</" +"emphasis> option enables access to all services of the machine - an option " +"that does not make much sense in the context of the installer since it would " +"create a totally unprotected system. Its veritable use is in the context of " +"the Mageia Control Center (which uses the same GUI layout) for temporarily " +"disabling the entire set of firewall rules for testing and debugging " +"purposes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:40 +msgid "" +"All other options are more or less self-explanatory. As an example, you will " +"enable the CUPS server if you want printers on your machine to be accessible " +"from the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:44 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Advanced</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:46 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> option opens a window where you can enable " +"a series of services by typing a list of <quote>couples</quote> (blank " +"separated)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:50 +msgid "<emphasis><port-number>/<protocol></emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><simplelist><member> +#: en/firewall.xml:53 +msgid "" +"- <emphasis><port-number></emphasis> is the value of the port assigned " +"to the service you want to enable (e.g. 873 for the RSYNC service) as " +"defined in <emphasis>RFC-433</emphasis>;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><simplelist><member> +#: en/firewall.xml:57 +msgid "" +"- <emphasis><protocol></emphasis> is one of <emphasis>TCP</emphasis> " +"or <emphasis>UDP</emphasis> - the internet protocol that is used by the " +"service." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:62 +msgid "" +"For instance, the entry for enabling access to the RSYNC service therefore " +"is <emphasis>873/tcp</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/firewall.xml:65 +msgid "" +"In case a service is implemented to use both protocols, you specify 2 " +"couples for the same port." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:10 +msgid "Formatting" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 03 29 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 +#. 2018/02/10 apb: Text and typography. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:24 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-formatPartitions.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"live-formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-formatPartitions.png\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=" +"\"formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-formatPartitions.png\" format=" +"\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"live-formatPartitions-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on " +"partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be preserved." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Usually, at least the partitions that DrakX selected need to be formatted." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:42 +msgid "" +"Click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to choose the partitions you want to " +"check for so-called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on " +"<emphasis>Previous</emphasis>, again on <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> and " +"then on <emphasis>Custom</emphasis> to get back to the main screen, where " +"you can choose to view details of your partitions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/formatPartitions.xml:54 +msgid "" +"When you are confident about the selections, click on <emphasis>Next</" +"emphasis> to continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/graphicalConfiguration.xml:13 +msgid "Graphical Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/installer.xml:34 +msgid "DrakX, the Mageia Installer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:37 +msgid "" +"Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia " +"Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as " +"possible." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:42 +msgid "The installation steps" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:46 +msgid "" +"The install process is divided into a number of steps - the status of which " +"is indicated in a panel to the left of the screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:52 +msgid "" +"Each step has one or more screens, which may also have <emphasis>Advanced</" +"emphasis> sections with extra, less commonly required options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:58 +msgid "" +"Most screens have <emphasis>Help</emphasis> buttons for further details " +"about the particular step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><caution><para> +#: en/installer.xml:64 +msgid "" +"If at some point during the install you decide to abort the installation, it " +"is possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a " +"partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your " +"computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well " +"leave you with an unusable system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><caution><para> +#: en/installer.xml:70 +msgid "" +"If, in spite of this, you are very sure rebooting is what you want, go to a " +"text terminal by pressing the keys <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> " +"<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap> </keycombo> together. After that, " +"press <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Delete</" +"keycap> </keycombo> together to reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:88 +msgid "Installation Welcome Screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:90 +msgid "" +"The particular screen that you will first see when booting from the " +"Installation media will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of " +"the Legacy (BIOS) or UEFI type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:94 +msgid "" +"The welcome menu screen has various options, however the default option will " +"start the installer, and is normally all that you will need." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:99 +msgid "Legacy (BIOS) Systems" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:102 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:113 +msgid "" +"Install Mageia to a hard disk. This is the default option, and will " +"automatically start after a short while unless another option is selected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:119 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Rescue System</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:121 +msgid "" +"This option allows you to either re-install the bootloader for an existing " +"Mageia installation or you can use it to restore a Windows bootloader." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:134 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">F2: Language</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:136 +msgid "Press F2 for alternative languages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:142 +msgid "UEFI Systems" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:144 +msgid "" +"From this screen, you can access options by pressing <keycap>e</keycap> to " +"enter the edit mode. To come back to this screen, press <keycap>Esc</keycap> " +"to quit without saving or press <keycap>F10</keycap> to save and quit." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/installer.xml:150 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx-welcome2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:159 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install:</emphasis> Start the Install process" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:164 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Rescue:</emphasis> This option allows you to either " +"re-install the bootloader for an existing Mageia installation or you can use " +"it to restore a Windows bootloader." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:171 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">F2: Language:</emphasis> Press <keycap>F2</keycap> " +"for alternative languages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:176 +msgid "" +"If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above options duplicated, " +"and in this case, you should use the set that will be suffixed with \"USB\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:183 +msgid "Installation Problems and Possible Solutions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:186 +msgid "No Graphical Interface" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:190 +msgid "" +"After the initial screen you did not progress to the <emphasis>Language " +"Selection</emphasis> screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and " +"older systems. Try using low resolution by typing <command>vgalo</command> " +"at the prompt." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installer.xml:197 +msgid "" +"If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be possible. " +"In this case it is worth trying a text-mode installation. To use this press " +"<keycap>Esc</keycap> at the <emphasis>Welcome</emphasis> screen and confirm " +"with <keycap>ENTER</keycap>. You will be presented with a black screen with " +"a <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. Type <command>text</command> and press " +"<keycap>ENTER</keycap> to continue with the installation in text mode." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:210 +msgid "The Install Freezes" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:212 +msgid "" +"If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a " +"problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic hardware " +"detection may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type " +"<command>noauto</command> at the prompt. This option may also be combined " +"with other parameters as necessary." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:220 +msgid "RAM problem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:222 +msgid "" +"This will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the " +"available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the " +"<literal>mem=<replaceable>xxx</replaceable>M</literal> parameter, where " +"<replaceable>xxx</replaceable> is the correct amount of RAM. e.g. " +"<literal>mem=256M</literal> would specify 256MB of RAM." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/installer.xml:230 +msgid "Dynamic partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/installer.xml:232 +msgid "" +"If you converted your hard disk from <literal>Basic</literal> format to " +"<literal>Dynamic</literal> format in Microsoft Windows, then it is not " +"possible to install Mageia on this disc. To revert to a <literal>Basic</" +"literal> disk, see the Microsoft documentation: <link ns2:href=\"http://msdn." +"microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx\">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/" +"library/cc776315.aspx</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:16 +msgid "Updates" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"png\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" " +"align=\"center\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"png\" fileref=\"dx2-installUpdates.png\" " +"align=\"center\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"installUpdates-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Since this version of Mageia was released, some packages will have been " +"updated or improved." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:30 +msgid "" +"Select <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> if you wish to download and install them" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Select <emphasis>No</emphasis> if you don't want to do this now, or if you " +"aren't connected to the Internet" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/installUpdates.xml:40 +msgid "Press <emphasis>Next</emphasis> to continue" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/locale.xml:9 +msgid "Locale" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/login.xml:4 +msgid "Login Screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/login.xml:7 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"login-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"login.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"login-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"login.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/login.xml:11 +msgid "SDDM login screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/login.xml:14 +msgid "Finally, you will come to the desktop login screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/login.xml:15 +msgid "" +"Enter your user name and user password, and in a few seconds you will find " +"yourself with a loaded KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop, depending on which live " +"medium you used. You can now start using and enjoying your Mageia " +"installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/login.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can find further documentation in <link xmlns:ns0=\"http://www.w3." +"org/1999/xlink\" ns0:href=\"../../installer/\">the Mageia wiki</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/media_selection.xml:10 +msgid "Available Media" +msgstr "" + +#. papoteur 2013-04-11 - created +#. marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media) +#. marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell +#. marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong) +#. 2019.01.05 apb: Changed Ati to AMD in Nonfree para. +#. 2019.01.16 apb: Changed title to Available Media. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/media_selection.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-media_selection.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"media_selection-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are " +"available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories " +"selection determines which packages will be available for selection during " +"the next steps." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains " +"the base of the distribution." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:44 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository includes packages that are free-" +"of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain closed-source " +"software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this repository includes " +"nVidia and AMD graphics card proprietary drivers, firmware for various WiFi " +"cards, etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/media_selection.xml:52 +msgid "" +"The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under " +"a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is " +"that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, e.g. " +"multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages needed " +"to play commercial video DVD's, etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:3 +msgid "Minimal Install" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for " +"Mageia, such as a server or a specialised workstation. You will probably use " +"this option combined with the <emphasis>Individual package selection</" +"emphasis> option to fine-tune your installation. See <xref linkend=" +"\"choosePackagesTree\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can choose a <emphasis>Minimal Installation</emphasis> by de-selecting " +"everything in the <emphasis>Package Group Selection</emphasis> screen, see " +"<xref linkend=\"choosePackageGroups\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:28 +msgid "" +"If desired, you can additionally tick the <emphasis>Individual package " +"selection</emphasis> option in the same screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:33 +msgid "" +"If you choose this installation method, then the relevant screen (see " +"screenshot below) will offer you a few useful extras to install, such as " +"documentation and <quote>X</quote>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:37 +msgid "" +"If the <emphasis>With X</emphasis> option is selected, then IceWM (a " +"lightweight desktop environment) will also be included." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:42 +msgid "" +"The basic documentation is provided in the form of <quote>man</quote> and " +"<quote>info</quote> pages. It contains the man pages from the <link xlink:" +"href=\"http://www.tldp.org/manpages/man.html\">Linux Documentation Project</" +"link> and the <link xlink:href=\"http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/" +"manual/\">GNU coreutils</link> info pages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/minimal-install.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"minimal-install-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-minimal-install.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:3 +msgid "Configuration Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6. 20170209 updated SC +#. 2018/02/09 apb: Changed title to Configuration Summary (as agreed). Also, text and typography. +#. 2018/02/22 apb: Changed list styles. +#. 2018/02/23 apb: Updated dx2-summaryBottom.png +#. 2018/02/24 apb: Changed list style +#. 2018/02/24 apb: Centre-align dx2-summaryTop.png +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/misc-params.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summaryTop.png\" align=\"center\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"dx2-summaryTop.png\" align=\"center\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:24 +msgid "" +"DrakX presents a proposal for the configuration of your system depending on " +"the choices you made and on the hardware detected. You can check the " +"settings here and change them if you want by pressing <emphasis>Configure</" +"emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:30 +msgid "" +"As a general rule, it is recommended that you accept the default settings " +"unless:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:33 +msgid "there are known issues with a default setting" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:37 +msgid "the default setting has already been tried and it fails" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:41 +msgid "some other factor mentioned in the detailed sections below is an issue" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:49 +msgid "System parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:54 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Timezone</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:56 +msgid "" +"DrakX selects a timezone for you, depending on your preferred language. You " +"can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend=\"configureTimezoneUTC\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:62 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Country / Region</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:64 +msgid "" +"If the selected country is wrong, it is very important that you correct the " +"setting. See <xref linkend=\"selectCountry\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:70 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Bootloader</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:72 +msgid "DrakX proposal for the bootloader setting" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:75 +msgid "" +"Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure GRUB2. For more " +"information, see <xref linkend=\"setupBootloader\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:83 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">User management</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:85 +msgid "" +"You can add extra users here. They will each be allocated their own " +"<filename>/home</filename> directories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:91 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Services</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:93 +msgid "" +"System services refer to those small programs which run in the background " +"(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain processes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:97 +msgid "" +"You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may " +"prevent your computer from operating correctly. For more information, see " +"<xref linkend=\"configureServices\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:106 +msgid "Hardware parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:111 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Keyboard</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:113 +msgid "" +"Configure your keyboard layout according to your location, language and type " +"of keyboard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:118 +msgid "" +"If you notice a wrong keyboard layout and want to change it, keep in mind " +"that your passwords are going to change too." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:124 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Mouse</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:126 +msgid "" +"Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs " +"etc." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:131 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Sound card</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:133 +msgid "The installer will use the default driver if one is available." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:136 en/soundConfig.xml:46 +msgid "" +"If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may be other " +"possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is the case, " +"but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate choice, you " +"can click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to manually specify a driver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:144 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphical interface</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:146 +msgid "" +"This section allows you to configure your graphics card(s) and displays. For " +"more information, see <xref linkend=\"configureX_chooser\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/misc-params.xml:155 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"summaryBottom-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-summaryBottom.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:163 +msgid "Network and Internet parameters" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:169 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Network</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:171 +msgid "" +"You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free " +"drivers it is better to do that after reboot, using the Mageia Control " +"Center, if you have not yet enabled the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> media " +"repositories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:178 +msgid "" +"When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to monitor " +"that interface as well." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:185 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Proxies</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:187 +msgid "" +"A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider " +"Internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a " +"proxy service." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:192 +msgid "" +"You may need to consult your systems administrator to obtain the parameters " +"you need to enter here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/misc-params.xml:201 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "Seguranza" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:206 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Security Level</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:208 +msgid "" +"The Security level for your computer, in most cases the default setting " +"(Standard) is adequate for general use. Select the option which best suits " +"your usage." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:215 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Firewall</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:217 +msgid "" +"The firewall allows you to manage which network connections are allowed on " +"your computer. The safe and secure default is to allow ZERO inbound " +"connections. This does not stop you connecting outbound and using your " +"computer normally." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:223 +msgid "" +"Please be aware that the Internet is a high risk network where there are " +"continuous attempts to probe and attack systems. Even seemingly <quote>safe</" +"quote> connections such as ICMP (for ping) have been used as covert data " +"channels for exfiltrating data by malicious persons." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:229 +msgid "For more information, see <xref linkend=\"firewall\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/misc-params.xml:232 +msgid "" +"Bear in mind that allowing <emphasis>everything</emphasis> (no firewall) may " +"be very risky." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/reboot.xml:3 +msgid "Reboot" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/reboot.xml:7 +msgid "" +"Once the bootloader has been installed, you will be prompted to halt your " +"computer, remove the live DVD/USB stick and restart the computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><simpara> +#: en/reboot.xml:9 +msgid "" +"Ensure that you follow these shut-down and restart instruction steps in the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">same</emphasis> order." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/reboot.xml:12 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-reboot2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-reboot2.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><simpara> +#: en/reboot.xml:16 +msgid "When you are ready, press <emphasis>Finish</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><simpara> +#: en/reboot.xml:17 +msgid "" +"When you restart, you will see a succession of download progress bars. These " +"indicate that the software media lists are being downloaded (see " +"<emphasis>Software Management</emphasis>)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/reboot.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"reboot-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"reboot.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"reboot-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"reboot.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:16 +msgid "" +"Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> " +"partition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/resizeFATChoose.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You have more than one <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></" +"application> partition. Choose which one should be made smaller to make " +"space for installing <application>Mageia</application>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:10 +msgid "Security Level" +msgstr "" + +#. 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" +#. 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot +#. 2018/02/12 apb: Minor wording. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-securityLevel.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"securityLevel-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Please choose the desired security level</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:29 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Standard</emphasis> is the default, and recommended setting for " +"the average user." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Secure</emphasis> will create a highly protected system - for " +"instance if the system is to be used as a public server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:36 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Security Administrator</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:38 +msgid "" +"This item allows you to configure an email address to which the system will " +"send <emphasis>security alert messages</emphasis> when it detects situations " +"which require notification to a system administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:43 +msgid "" +"A good, and easy-to-implement, choice is to enter <user>@localhost - " +"where <user> is the login name of the user to receive these messages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:48 +msgid "" +"The system sends such messages as <emphasis role=\"bold\">Unix Mailspool " +"messages</emphasis>, not as \"ordinary\" SMTP mail: this user must therefore " +"be configured for receiving such mail!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/securityLevel.xml:53 +msgid "" +"It will always be possible to adjust your security settings post-install in " +"the <emphasis>Security</emphasis> section of the Mageia Control Center." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:15 +msgid "Select and use ISOs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:18 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:19 +msgid "" +"Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose " +"which image best suits your needs." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:21 +msgid "There are three types of installation media:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:24 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Classical installer:</emphasis> Booting with this " +"media provides you with the maximum flexibility when choosing what to " +"install, and for configuring your system. In particular, you have a choice " +"of which Desktop environment to install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:31 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">LIVE media:</emphasis> This option allows you to try " +"out Mageia without having to actually install it, or make any changes to " +"your computer. However, the Live media also includes an Installer, which can " +"be started when booting the media, or after booting into the Live operating " +"system itself." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:37 +msgid "" +"The Live Installer is simpler compared to the Classical Installer - but you " +"have fewer configuration options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><important><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Live ISOs can only be used to create <quote>clean</quote> installations, " +"they cannot be used to upgrade previously installed Mageia releases." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:47 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Net Install</emphasis>: These are minimal ISO's " +"containing no more than that which is needed to start the DrakX installer " +"and find <literal>DrakX-installer-stage2</literal> and other packages that " +"are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be on " +"the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the Internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:53 +msgid "" +"These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient if " +"bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, or if you have a PC without a " +"DVD drive or is unable to boot from a USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:58 +msgid "More details are given in the next sections." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:61 +msgid "Media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:63 +msgid "Definition" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to " +"install and/or update Mageia and, by extension, any physical medium (DVD, " +"USB stick, ...) the ISO file is copied to." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:67 +msgid "" +"You can find Mageia ISO's <link ns4:href=\"http://www.mageia.org/en/" +"downloads/\">here</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:70 +msgid "Classical installation media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:72 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:104 +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:171 +msgid "Common features" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:75 +msgid "These ISOs use the Classical installer called DrakX" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:78 +msgid "" +"They are used for performing clean installs or to upgrade a previously " +"installed version of Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:82 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:118 +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:174 +msgid "Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:85 +msgid "" +"Some tools are available in the Installer <quote>Welcome</quote> screen: " +"<emphasis>Rescue System, Memory Test, </emphasis>and <emphasis>Hardware " +"Detection Tool</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:91 +msgid "Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:95 +msgid "" +"You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non-free software" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:102 +msgid "Live media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:107 +msgid "" +"Can be used to preview the Mageia operating system without having to install " +"it" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:111 +msgid "The Live media also includes an Installer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:114 +msgid "Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (Plasma, GNOME or Xfce)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:121 +msgid "They contain non-free software" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:126 +msgid "Live DVD Plasma" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:129 +msgid "Plasma desktop environment only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:132 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:146 +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:160 +msgid "All available languages are present" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:135 en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:149 +msgid "64-bit architecture only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:140 +msgid "Live DVD GNOME" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:143 +msgid "GNOME desktop environment only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:154 +msgid "Live DVD Xfce" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:157 +msgid "Xfce desktop environment only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:163 +msgid "32 or 64-bit architectures" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:169 +msgid "Net install media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:177 +msgid "First steps are English language only" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:182 +msgid "netinstall.iso" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:185 +msgid "" +"Contains only free software, for those who prefer to not use non-free " +"software" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:191 +msgid "netinstall-nonfree.iso" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:194 +msgid "" +"Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for those who need it" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:202 +msgid "Downloading and Checking Media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:204 +msgid "Downloading" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:205 +msgid "" +"Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or " +"BitTorrent. In both cases, you are provided with some information, such as " +"the mirror in use and an option to switch to an alternative if the bandwidth " +"is too low." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:209 +msgid "" +"If http is chosen you will also see some information regarding checksums." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:212 +msgid "" +"<literal>md5sum</literal>, <literal>sha1sum</literal> and " +"<literal>sha512sum</literal> (the most secure) are tools to check the ISO " +"integrity. Copy one of the checksums (string of alphanumeric characters) for " +"use in the next section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:217 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Checking.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Checking.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:222 +msgid "In the meantime, a window to download the actual ISO will open:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:225 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Download.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Download.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:229 +msgid "" +"Click on <emphasis>Save File</emphasis>, then click <emphasis>OK</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:233 +msgid "Checking the integrity of the downloaded media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:235 +msgid "" +"The checksums referred to earlier, are digital fingerprints generated by an " +"algorithm from the file to be downloaded. You may compare the checksum of " +"your downloaded ISO against that of the original source ISO. If the " +"checksums do not match, it means that the actual data on the ISO's do not " +"match, and if that is the case, then you should retry the download or " +"attempt a repair using BitTorrent." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:241 +msgid "" +"To generate the checksum for your downloaded ISO, open a console, (no need " +"to be root), and:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:245 +msgid "" +"To use the md5sum, type: <command>md5sum path/to/the/image/file.iso</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:249 +msgid "" +"To use the sha1sum, type: <command>sha1sum path/to/the/image/file.iso</" +"command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:254 +msgid "" +"To use the sha512sum, type: <command>sha512sum path/to/the/image/file.iso</" +"command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:258 +msgid "Example:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:260 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Md5sum.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Md5sum.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:265 +msgid "" +"then compare the result (you may have to wait for a while) with the ISO " +"checksum provided by Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:270 +msgid "Burn or dump the ISO" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:271 +msgid "" +"The verified ISO can now be burned to a CD/DVD or <quote>dumped</quote> to a " +"USB stick. This is not a standard copy operation, as a bootable medium will " +"actually be created." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:275 +msgid "Burning the ISO to a CD/DVD" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:276 +msgid "" +"Whichever software you use, ensure that the option to burn an<emphasis> " +"image</emphasis> is used. Burn <emphasis>data</emphasis> or <emphasis>files</" +"emphasis> is NOT correct. See the <link ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images\">the Mageia wiki</link> for more information." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:282 +msgid "Dump the ISO to a USB stick" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:283 +msgid "" +"All Mageia ISOs are hybrids, which means you can dump them to a USB stick " +"and then use that to boot and install the system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><warning><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:286 +msgid "" +"Dumping an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system on " +"the device and all existing data will be lost." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:290 +msgid "" +"Also, the only partition on the flash device will then just be the Mageia " +"ISO partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:292 +msgid "" +"So, if an ISO of about 4GB is written to an 8GB USB stick, the stick will " +"then only show up as 4GB. This is because the remaining 4GB is no longer " +"formatted - hence not currently available for use. To recover the original " +"capacity, you must reformat and repartition the USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:299 +msgid "Using a graphical tool within Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:300 +msgid "" +"You can use a graphical tool like <link ns4:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks\">IsoDumper</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:303 +msgid "Using a graphical tool within Windows" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:304 +msgid "You could try:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:307 +msgid "" +"<link ns4:href=\"http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US\">Rufus</link> using the " +"\"ISO image\" option" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:311 +msgid "" +"<link ns4:href=\"http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager\">Win32 " +"Disk Imager</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><title> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:317 +msgid "Using the Command line within a GNU/Linux system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><warning><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:319 +msgid "" +"It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk overwriting " +"potentially valuable existing data if you specify the wrong target device." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:325 +msgid "Open a console" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:328 +msgid "" +"Become a <emphasis>root</emphasis> (Administrator) user with the command " +"<command>su -</command> (don't forget the <command>-</command> )" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:332 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Root.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Root.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:338 +msgid "" +"Plug in your USB stick - but do not mount it (this also means do not open " +"any application or file manager that could access or read it)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:343 +msgid "Enter the command <command>fdisk -l</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:345 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Fdisk.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"Fdisk.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:351 +msgid "" +"Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example " +"<filename>/dev/sdb</filename> in the screenshot above, is an 8GB USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:354 +msgid "" +"Alternatively, you can find the device name with the command <command>dmesg</" +"command>. Towards the end of the following example, you can see the device " +"name starting with <filename>sd</filename>, and in this case, <filename>sdd</" +"filename> is the actual device. You can also see that its size is 2GB:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para><screen> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:360 +#, no-wrap +msgid "" +"[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd\n" +"[72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000\n" +"[72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3\n" +"[72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device\n" +"[72594.770537] usb 1-1: Manufacturer: JetFlash\n" +"[72594.770539] usb 1-1: SerialNumber: 18MJTWLMPUCC3SSB\n" +"[72594.770713] usb 1-1: ep 0x81 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes\n" +"[72594.770719] usb 1-1: ep 0x2 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes\n" +"[72594.771122] usb-storage 1-1:1.0: USB Mass Storage device detected\n" +"[72594.772447] scsi host8: usb-storage 1-1:1.0\n" +"[72595.963238] scsi 8:0:0:0: Direct-Access JetFlash Transcend 2GB 1100 PQ: 0 ANSI: 4\n" +"[72595.963626] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] 4194304 512-byte logical blocks: (2.14 GB/2.00 GiB)\n" +"[72595.964104] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Write Protect is off\n" +"[72595.964108] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Mode Sense: 43 00 00 00\n" +"[72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found\n" +"[72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through\n" +"[72595.967251] <emphasis>sdd</emphasis>: sdd1\n" +"[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:360 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"screen\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:380 +msgid "" +"Enter the command: <command>dd if=path/to/the/ISO/file of=/dev/" +"sd<replaceable>X</replaceable> bs=1M</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:382 +msgid "" +"Where <replaceable>X</replaceable>=your device name eg: <filename>/dev/sdd</" +"filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:384 +msgid "" +"Example:<literal> dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso of=/dev/" +"sdd bs=1M</literal>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><tip><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:388 +msgid "" +"It might be helpful to know that <emphasis role=\"bold\">if</emphasis> " +"stands for <emphasis role=\"bold\">i</emphasis>nput <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">f</emphasis>ile and <emphasis role=\"bold\">of</emphasis> stands for " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">o</emphasis>utput <emphasis role=\"bold\">f</" +"emphasis>ile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:392 +msgid "Enter the command: <command>sync</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml:395 +msgid "This is the end of the process, and you may now unplug your USB stick." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:3 +msgid "Select your Country / Region" +msgstr "" + +#. Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6 +#. 2018/02/13 apb: Minor wording + typography. +#. 2018/02/25 apb: a) add xreflabel to this section. b) make some text bulleted. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:13 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"selectCountry-im1\" align=" +"\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectCountry.png\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, " +"like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country " +"can lead to being unable to use a Wireless network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:27 +msgid "" +"If your country isn't in the list, click the <emphasis>Other Countries</" +"emphasis> option and choose your country / region there." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:34 +msgid "" +"If your country is only in the <emphasis>Other Countries</emphasis> list, " +"after clicking <emphasis>OK</emphasis> it may seem that a country from the " +"main list was chosen. Despite this, DrakX will actually apply your choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:42 +msgid "Input method" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:45 +msgid "" +"In the <emphasis>Other Countries</emphasis> screen you can also select an " +"input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input " +"multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the " +"default input method, so users should not need to configure it manually. " +"Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar functions " +"and can be installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package selection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/selectCountry.xml:54 +msgid "" +"If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it " +"post-install via <menuchoice> <guimenu>Configure your Computer</guimenu> " +"<guimenuitem>System</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>, or by running " +"<command>localedrake</command> as <emphasis>root</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:29 +msgid "Install or Upgrade" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:33 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass." +"png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectInstallClass." +"png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:41 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:43 +msgid "" +"Use this option to perform a fresh installation of Mageia. This will format " +"the <literal>root</literal> partition (<filename>/</filename>), but can " +"preserve a pre-existing <filename>/home</filename> partition (a dedicated /" +"home partition, rather than being incorporated within the root (/) partition " +"itself)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:50 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Upgrade</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:52 +msgid "Use this option to upgrade an existing installation of Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:58 +msgid "" +"Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still " +"supported</emphasis> when this Installer's version was released, has been " +"thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that has reached " +"its <quote>End Of Life</quote> then it is better to do a <quote>clean</" +"quote> install instead, while preserving your <filename>/home</filename> " +"partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/selectInstallClass.xml:67 +msgid "" +"If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you " +"can return from the <emphasis>Install or Upgrade</emphasis> screen to the " +"language choice screen by pressing <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> " +"<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Home</keycap> </keycombo>. Do<emphasis role=" +"\"bold\"> NOT</emphasis> do this later in the install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:14 +msgid "Select Keyboard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:18 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-selectKeyboard.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"selectKeyboardLive-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-selectKeyboard.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"selectKeyboardLive-im1\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:24 +msgid "Here you can set the keyboard layout you wish to use with Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectKeyboardLive.xml:27 +msgid "" +"A suggested keyboard layout (highlighted), has been chosen for you based " +"upon your previously selected language and timezone choices." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:20 +msgid "Keyboard" +msgstr "Tecláu" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:23 +msgid "" +"DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable " +"keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:28 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\"/" +"> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectKeyboard.png\"/" +"> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard layout. " +"If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the specifications " +"that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There may even be a " +"label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also look here: " +"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout\">en." +"wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:45 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <emphasis>More</emphasis> " +"to get a fuller list, and select your keyboard there." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><note><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:50 +msgid "" +"After choosing a keyboard from the <emphasis>More</emphasis> dialogue, " +"you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialogue and it will seem as " +"though a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this " +"and continue the installation: the keyboard chosen from the full list will " +"be applied." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectKeyboard.xml:60 +msgid "" +"If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an " +"extra dialogue screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the " +"Latin and non-Latin keyboard layouts" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:34 +msgid "Please choose a language to use" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your " +"continent. Mageia will use this selection during the installation and for " +"your installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Select your preferred language. Mageia will use this selection during the " +"installation and for your installed system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:50 +msgid "" +"If it is likely that you (or others) will require several languages to be " +"installed on your system, then you should use the <emphasis>Multiple " +"languages</emphasis> option to add them now. It will be difficult to add " +"extra language support after installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:58 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-language.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-selectLanguage.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-language.png" +"\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><important><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:68 +msgid "" +"Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one as your " +"preferred language from the main list of languages. It will also be marked " +"as chosen in the <emphasis>Multiple languages</emphasis> screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:76 +msgid "" +"If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then " +"it is advisable to install the required language for your keyboard as well" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:82 +msgid "" +"Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the " +"<emphasis>Multiple languages</emphasis> screen if you know that it is " +"inappropriate for your language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed " +"languages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/selectLanguage.xml:89 +msgid "" +"You can change the language for your system post-installation in the " +"<menuchoice> <guimenu>Mageia Control Center</guimenu> <guimenuitem>System</" +"guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>localization for your system</guimenuitem> </" +"menuchoice>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:10 +msgid "Select mouse" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 11 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place +#. marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot +#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:24 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-selectMouse.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:29 +msgid "" +"If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a " +"different one here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:32 +msgid "" +"Usually, <menuchoice> <guimenu>Universal</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Any PS/2 and " +"USB mice</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> is a good choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/selectMouse.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Universal</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Force evdev</" +"guimenuitem> </menuchoice> to configure the buttons that do not work on a " +"mouse with six or more buttons." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:7 +msgid "Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:11 +msgid "" +"To do this you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the " +"software <emphasis role=\"bold\">grub-customizer</emphasis> tool instead " +"(available in the Mageia repositories)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml:16 +msgid "" +"For more information, see: <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-" +"efi_and_Mageia\">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:32 +msgid "Bootloader" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:36 +msgid "Available Bootloaders" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:39 +msgid "Grub2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:42 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Grub2 on Legacy MBR/GPT systems</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:46 +msgid "" +"GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) will be used exclusively as the " +"bootloader for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:52 +msgid "" +"By default, a new bootloader will be written into either the MBR (Master " +"Boot Record) of your first hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:59 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Grub2-efi on UEFI systems</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:63 +msgid "GRUB2-efi or rEFInd may be used as the bootloader for a UEFI system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:68 +msgid "" +"By default, a new bootloader (Grub2-efi) will be written into the ESP (EFI " +"System Partition)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:71 +msgid "" +"If there are already UEFI-based operating systems installed on your computer " +"(Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer will detect the existing ESP " +"created by Windows and add grub2-efi to it. If no ESP exists, then one will " +"be created. Although it is possible to have several ESPs, only one is " +"required, whatever the number of operating systems you have." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:82 +msgid "rEFInd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:85 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">rEFInd on UEFI systems</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:88 +msgid "" +"rEFInd has a nice graphical set of options, and can auto-detect installed " +"EFI bootloaders. See: http://www.rodsbooks.com/refind/" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:95 +msgid "" +"Please note that in order to be able to use the <literal>rEFInd</literal> " +"option, an installed EFI System Partition must match your system " +"architecture: if you have a 32bit EFI System Partition installed on a 64bit " +"machine for instance, then the rEFInd option will not be displayed/available " +"to you." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:106 +msgid "Bootloader Setup" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:110 +msgid "Bootloader main options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:113 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-setupBootloader.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-" +"im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-setupBootloader.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata fileref=\"live-setupBootloader.png\" xml:id=\"setupBootloader-" +"im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:125 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Bootloader to use</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:129 +msgid "" +"<guimenuitem>GRUB2</guimenuitem> (with either a graphical or a text menu), " +"can be chosen for both <literal>Legacy MBR/BIOS</literal> systems and " +"<literal>UEFI</literal> systems." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:136 +msgid "" +"<guimenuitem>rEFInd</guimenuitem> (with a graphical menu) is an alternative " +"option solely for use with <literal>UEFI</literal> systems." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:144 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot device</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:147 +msgid "Don't change this unless you really know what you are doing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><note><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:152 +msgid "" +"There is no option to write GRUB to the boot sector of a partition (e.g: " +"<filename>sda1</filename>), as this method is considered unreliable." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:157 +msgid "" +"When using UEFI mode, then the <guilabel>Boot device</guilabel> will be " +"listed as <guimenuitem>EFI System Partition</guimenuitem>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:163 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Delay before booting the default image</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:166 +msgid "" +"This text box lets you set a delay, in seconds, before the default operating " +"system is started up." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:171 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Security</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:173 +msgid "" +"This allows you to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username " +"and password will be required when booting in order to select a booting " +"entry or change settings. This is optional, and most people are not likely " +"to have a need for it. The username is <literal>root</literal> and the " +"password is the one chosen hereafter." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:184 +msgid "Choose a password for the bootloader (optional)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:188 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password (again)</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:190 +msgid "" +"Retype the password and DrakX will check that it matches with the one set " +"above" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:195 en/setupBootloader.xml:308 +msgid "<emphasis>Advanced</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:199 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable ACPI</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:201 +msgid "" +"ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for power " +"management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices. Deselecting it " +"could be useful if, for example, your computer does not support ACPI or if " +"you think the ACPI implementation might cause some problems (for instance " +"random reboots or system lockups)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:210 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable SMP</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:212 +msgid "" +"This option enables/disables symmetric multiprocessing for multi-core " +"processors" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:217 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable APIC</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:219 +msgid "" +"Enabling this gives the operating system access to the Advanced Programmable " +"Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more complex priority models, and " +"Advanced IRQ (Interrupt Request) management." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:226 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable Local APIC</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:228 +msgid "" +"Here you can set Local APIC, which manages all external interrupts for a " +"specific processor in an SMP system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:235 +msgid "Bootloader Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:237 +msgid "" +"If, in the previous section you selected <literal>rEFInd</literal> as the " +"bootloader to use, you would then be presented with the options shown in the " +"screenshot directly below. Otherwise, please instead move on to the " +"subsequent screenshot for your options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:243 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"rEFIndLoaderConfig.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-rEFIndLoaderConfig.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"rEFIndLoaderConfig.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live\"> " +"<imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-rEFIndLoaderConfig.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:253 +msgid "Your rEFInd configuration options:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:256 +msgid "" +"<guimenuitem>Install or update rEFInd in the EFI system partition.</" +"guimenuitem>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:261 +msgid "" +"<guimenuitem>Install in EFI/Boot partition (workaround for some BIOS's).</" +"guimenuitem>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:264 +msgid "" +"With some BIOS's, the newly written bootloader for Mageia at end of the " +"installation will not be recognized. In that case, you can use this option " +"as a workaround for the issue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:270 +msgid "" +"If you did not select rEFInd as the bootloader to use in the previous " +"section, then your bootloader configurations are shown below:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:275 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-setupBootloader3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-setupBootloader3.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-setupBootloader3.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-setupBootloader3.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:286 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Default</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:288 +msgid "The operating system to be started up by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:292 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Append</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:294 +msgid "" +"This option lets you pass information to the kernel or tell the kernel to " +"give you more information as it boots." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:299 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Probe foreign OS</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:301 +msgid "" +"If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to " +"add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, " +"then untick the <guimenuitem>Probe Foreign OS</guimenuitem> option." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:311 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-setupBootloader4.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-setupBootloader4.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-setupBootloader4.png\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition=\"live" +"\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-setupBootloader4.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:322 +msgid "<emphasis>Video mode</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:324 +msgid "" +"This sets the screen size and colour depth to be used by the boot menu. If " +"you click the down-triangle you will be offered other size and colour depth " +"options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:330 +msgid "<emphasis>Do not touch ESP or MBR</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:332 +msgid "" +"Select this option if you don't want a bootable Mageia, but would rather " +"chain-load it from another OS. You will get a warning that the bootloader is " +"missing. Click <guimenuitem>Ok </guimenuitem>only if you are sure you " +"understand the implications, and wish to proceed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:338 +msgid "" +"Chain-loading via legacy bootloaders (GRUB Legacy and LiLo) is no longer " +"supported by Mageia as it is likely to fail when attempting to boot this " +"resulting installation of Mageia. If you use anything other than GRUB2 or " +"rEFInd for this purpose, then you do so at your own risk!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:348 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-setupBootloader5.png" +"\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-setupBootloader5.png" +"\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:356 +msgid "Other Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:359 +msgid "Using an existing bootloader" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:361 +msgid "" +"The exact procedure for adding Mageia to an existing bootloader is beyond " +"the scope of this documentation. However in most cases it will involve " +"running the relevant bootloader installation program, which should detect " +"Mageia and automatically add an entry for it in the bootloader menu. See the " +"documentation for the relevant operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:370 +msgid "Installing Without a Bootloader" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/setupBootloader.xml:372 +msgid "" +"While you can opt to install Mageia without a bootloader (see section 2.1 " +"Advanced), this is not recommended unless you absolutely know what you are " +"doing, as without some form of bootloader your operating system will be " +"unable to start." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:10 +msgid "Setup SCSI" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 02 +#. NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! +#. JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 +#. SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) +#. barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. +#. marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot +#. marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the +#. Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file +#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2018/0217 apb: Merge 2nd/3rd paras and reword. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:33 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-setupSCSI.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"setupSCSI-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:39 +msgid "" +"DrakX will normally detect hard disks correctly. However, with some older " +"SCSI controllers it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use " +"and subsequently fail to recognise the drive." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/setupSCSI.xml:44 +msgid "" +"If your device is not recognised, you will need to manually tell DrakX which " +"SCSI drive(s) you have. DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) " +"correctly." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><title> +#: en/software.xml:4 +msgid "Software" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/software.xml:7 +msgid "Media Selection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:10 +msgid "Sound Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC +#. 2018/02/13 apb: Text and typography. +#. 2018/02/17 apb: Centre-align PNG +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-soundConfig.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"soundConfig-im1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"dx2-soundConfig.png\" " +"format=\"PNG\" revision=\"1\" xml:id=\"soundConfig-im1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:26 +msgid "" +"This screen shows the details of the sound card driver chosen for you by the " +"installer, and this driver should work without problems." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:29 +msgid "" +"However, if you encounter any issues post-install, then run " +"<command>draksound</command> or start this tool via <menuchoice> " +"<guimenu>Mageia Control Center</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Hardware</guimenuitem> " +"<guimenuitem>Sound Configuration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. Then, in the " +"<literal>draksound</literal> or <emphasis>Sound Configuration</emphasis> " +"screen, click on <emphasis>Troubleshooting</emphasis> to find useful advice " +"about how to solve the problem." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/soundConfig.xml:43 +msgid "Advanced" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:10 +msgid "Confirm hard disk to be formatted" +msgstr "" + +#. Made by marja on 2012 04 03 +#. test comment - johnr +#. 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct +#. hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I +#. saw this help screen when I had only one HD +#. 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot +#. 2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography +#. 2018/02/20 apb: Change the 2 paras to itemized listitems. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:29 +msgid "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-" +"takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject condition=\"classical\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=" +"\"dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject> <imageobject " +"condition=\"live\"> <imagedata align=\"center\" fileref=\"live-" +"takeOverHdConfirm.png\" format=\"PNG\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:42 +msgid "" +"Click on <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> if you are at all unsure about your " +"choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/takeOverHdConfirm.xml:48 +msgid "" +"Click on <emphasis>Next</emphasis> to proceed if you are sure that it is OK " +"to erase <emphasis role=\"bold\">every</emphasis> partition, <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">every</emphasis> operating system and <emphasis role=\"bold\">all " +"data</emphasis> that might be on that hard disk." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:11 +msgid "Testing Mageia as Live system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:16 +msgid "Live mode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:19 +msgid "" +"This is the screen you will see if you selected the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Boot Mageia </emphasis>option from the Live media menu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/testing.xml:23 +msgid "<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode.png\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode.png\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:30 +msgid "Testing hardware" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:33 +msgid "" +"One of the aims of using the Live mode is to test that your hardware is " +"correctly managed by Mageia. You can check if all devices have a driver in " +"the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:40 +msgid "network interface: configure it with net_applet" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:44 +msgid "graphics card: if you see the previous screen, it's already OK." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:49 +msgid "sound: a jingle has already been played" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:53 +msgid "printer: configure your printer/s and print a test page" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/testing.xml:57 +msgid "scanner: scan a document from ..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:61 +msgid "" +"If everything is satisfactory, you can proceed with the installation. If " +"not, you can use the <emphasis>Quit</emphasis> button to exit." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/testing.xml:66 +msgid "" +"The configuration settings you apply here are carried over if you decide to " +"proceed with the installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><info><title> +#: en/testing.xml:73 +msgid "Launch installation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/testing.xml:76 +msgid "" +"To launch the installation of the Live DVD to a hard disk or SSD drive, " +"simply click the <emphasis>Install on Hard Disk</emphasis> icon on the Live " +"desktop. You will then see this screen, followed by the <link linkend=" +"\"doPartitionDisks\">Partitioning</link> step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject> +#: en/testing.xml:82 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode-install.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"live-liveMode-install.png\"/> </" +"imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:10 +msgid "Uninstalling Mageia" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:18 +msgid "" +"If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly - in short " +"you want get rid of it - that is your right and Mageia also gives you the " +"possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:23 +msgid "" +"After backing up your data, reboot your Mageia installation DVD and select " +"<emphasis>Rescue system</emphasis>, then <emphasis>Restore Windows boot " +"loader</emphasis>. At the next boot, you will only have Windows, with no " +"option to choose your Mageia operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:28 +msgid "" +"In Windows, to recover the space used by Mageia partitions: click on " +"<menuchoice> <guimenu>Start</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Control Panel</" +"guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Administrative Tools</guimenuitem> " +"<guimenuitem>Computer Management</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Storage</" +"guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Disk Management</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. You " +"will recognise a Mageia partition because they are labeled <literal>Unknown</" +"literal>, and also by their size and place on the disk. Right-click on each " +"of these partitions and select <emphasis>Delete</emphasis> to free up the " +"space." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:46 +msgid "" +"If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it " +"(FAT32 or NTFS). It will then get a partition letter." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/uninstall-Mageia.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the " +"existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other " +"partitioning tools that can be used, such as <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">gparted</emphasis>, available for both Windows and Linux. As always, when " +"changing partitions, be very careful to back up anything important to you." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/unused.xml:3 +msgid "Keep or delete unused material" +msgstr "" + +#. 2018/03/03 apb: Adjusted text and updated SC's to Mga6. +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/unused.xml:9 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"unused-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"unused.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata format=\"PNG\" xml:id=\"unused-im1\" fileref=\"live-" +"unused.png\" align=\"center\" revision=\"1\"/> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/unused.xml:14 +msgid "" +"In this step, the installer looks for unused locales packages and unused " +"hardware packages and you are then given an opportunity to delete them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/unused.xml:18 +msgid "" +"If you do not foresee a case where your installation may need to run on " +"different hardware, or that you might need additional localization files " +"then you might wish to accept this proposal." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/unused.xml:22 +msgid "" +"Clicking <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> will list the unused hardware and " +"localization files that will be removed if you proceed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><mediaobject> +#: en/unused.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-unused-InstallationProgress.png\"/" +"> </imageobject>" +msgstr "" +"<imageobject> <imagedata fileref=\"../live-unused-InstallationProgress.png\"/" +"> </imageobject>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/unused.xml:31 +msgid "" +"The next step is the copying of files to hard disk. This process should just " +"take a little while to complete. When it is finishing you will briefly get a " +"blank screen - this is normal." +msgstr "" diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakLive-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakLive-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e4d0747a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakLive-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<book version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="DrakLive-installer" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + <info> + <!--2018/02/19 apb: Disabled setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml because I have included it at the end of setupBootloader.xml--> +<!--2018/03/24 apb: Disabled doPartitionDisks.xml, ask_mntpoint_s.xml, takeOverHdConfirm.xml, diskdrake.xml and formatPartitions.xml because I have grouped them together under diskPartitioning.xml (as per DrakX)--> +<title>Installation from LIVE medium</title> + + <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher> + + <revhistory> + <revision> + <date>March 2016</date> + + <revremark>Mageia 5</revremark> + </revision> + </revhistory> + + <cover> + <para role="tagline">The Official Documentation for Mageia</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../mageia-2013.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + <article> + <title>Installation from LIVE medium</title> + + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bootLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bestTime.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboardLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="testing.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskPartitioning.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="unused.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + --> +<xi:include href="reboot.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="login.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> + </article> +</book> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ba43133c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<article version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="Quick-Startup" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + <info> + <!--2018/02/16 apb: Comment-out setupBootloaderAddEntry because I have incorporated it at the end of setupBootloader--> +<!--2018/03/23 apb: a) Using diskPartitioning.xml to group doPartitionDisks.xml ask_mntpoint_s.xml takeOverHdConfirm.xml diskdrake.xml and formatPartitions.xml +b) Disabled doPartitionDisks.xml ask_mntpoint_s.xml takeOverHdConfirm.xml diskdrake.xml and formatPartitions.xml This is to reflect same arrangement in DrakX--> +<title>Installation from LIVE medium</title> + + <cover> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact the <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bootLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="bestTime.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboardLive.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="testing.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskPartitioning.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="unused.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + --> +<xi:include href="reboot.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="login.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> +</article> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f9cb49e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<book version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="Quick-Startup" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns62="http://docbook.org/ns/transclusion" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title>Installation with DrakX</title> + + <publisher> <publishername>Mageia.org</publishername> </publisher> + + <revhistory> + <revision> + <date>February 2014</date> + + <revremark>Mageia 4</revremark> + </revision> + </revhistory> + + <cover> + <para role="tagline">The Official Documentation for Mageia</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../mageia-2013.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + <article> + + + + + + + + + + + + + <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before--> +<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed --> +<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva --> +<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml --> +<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml --> +<!--2019-01-12 apb: add graphicalConfiguration.xml to group the 3 configureX xml's. --> +<title>Installation with DrakX</title> + + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="installer.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/> + + + + + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/> + --> +<!-- <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>--> +<!-- <xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="diskPartitioning.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="software.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="graphicalConfiguration.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + --> +<!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml"> +</xi:include> + + <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="locale.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="firewall.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> + </article> +</book> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX-inline.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX-inline.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a5f94904 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX-inline.xml @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="Quick-Startup"> + <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before--> +<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed --> +<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva --> +<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml --> +<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml --> +<!--2014-05-07 add selectAndUseISOs2.xml Papoteur--> +<!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<info> + <title>Installation with DrakX</title> + + <cover> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="installer.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml"> +</xi:include> + + <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureServices.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml"> +</xi:inclu de> --> +<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> +</article>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2092483c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/DrakX.xml @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="Quick-Startup" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns62="http://docbook.org/ns/transclusion" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="drakx-intro.xml"/> + --> +<info> + <!-- 2013-01-03 removed link to choosePackages.xml, because there is no link to it in installer. link to setupX has been removed for the same reason, before--> +<!--2013-03-31 removed link to setupBootloaderBeginner.xml, because that page is no longer needed --> +<!--2013-05-10 hid includes for resizeFATchoose.xml and takeOverHdChoose.xml, because since over a year ago, no one in docteam managed to make a screenshot of those installer screens. They seem to already have been obsoleted in Mandriva --> +<!--2013-05-10 put ask_mntpoint_s.xml before takeOverHdConfirm.xml, to better reflect the order in which the links to them appear in doPartitionDisks.xml --> +<!--2013-12-08 add soundConfig.xml --> +<!--2014-05-07 add selectAndUseISOs2.xml Papoteur--> +<!--2018/02/16 apb: 1st run towards improving Mga7 DrakX manual - Text and typography done for all required xml's. + Also, removed the inclusion for setupBootladerAddEntry (was section 24) as I have appended it to the end of section 23 (Bootloader).--> +<!--2018/02/23 apb: Disabled Include for configureX_card_list.xml & configureX_monitor.xml because there is no point to them being Siblings to configureX_chooser.xml (Graphic Card and Monitor Configuration). They are really Children.--> +<!--2018/02/27 apb: a) Created this section to merge doPartitionDisks.xml ask_mntpoint_s.xml takeOverHdConfirm.xml diskdrake.xml and formatPartitions.xml + b) renamed doPartitionDisks.xml as suggestedPartitioning.xml c) These XML's now exist as xi:includes within the newly created partitionig.xml --> +<!--2018/02/27 apb: Merged configureTimezoneUTC.xml and selectCountry.xml within newly created Locale.xml. b) Disabled configureTimezoneUTC.xml and selectCountry.xml Includes and inserted Locale include.--> +<!--2019/01/12 apb: add graphicalConfiguration.xml to hold the configureX xml's.--> +<title>Installation with DrakX</title> + + <cover> + <para><note> + <para>No one will see all the installer screens that you see in this manual. Which +screens you will see, depends on your hardware and the choices you make +while installing.</para> + </note></para> + + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>.</para> + + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>.</para> + + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + + + <xi:include href="SelectAndUseISOs2.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="installer.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="acceptLicense.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="setupSCSI.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectInstallClass.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectKeyboard.xml"/> + + + + + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="resizeFATChoose.xml"/> + --> +<!-- <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdChoose.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/>--> +<!-- <xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="diskPartitioning.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="software.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setRootPassword.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="addUser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="graphicalConfiguration.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="setupBootloader.xml"/> + + + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + --> +<!-- <xi:include href="setupYabootGeneral.xml"> +</xi:include> + + <xi:include href="setupYabootAddEntry.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="summary.xml"></xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="misc-params.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="locale.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + + <xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"/> --> +<xi:include href="configureServices.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectMouse.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="soundConfig.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="securityLevel.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="firewall.xml"/> + + + + <!-- <xi:include href="configureNetwork.xml"> +</xi:include> --> +<xi:include href="installUpdates.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="exitInstall.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="uninstall-Mageia.xml"/> +</article> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7796bbb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/SelectAndUseISOs2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,384 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs"> + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by Lebarhon 2014 03 26 + +Lebarhon updated for Mageia 6 2016 12 16 (still waiting for clarification about 1.3.2--> +<!--2018/02/07 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/17 apb: Typo--> +<!--2018/02/19 apb: Update Download.png to Mga6.--> +<!--2018/02/20 apb: Adjusted sections 1.1 and 1.2. + a) The main intro previously stated that there were 2 families of media, but listed at 1.2.4 is NetInstall. Therefore, I included a NetInstall entry in 1.1. + b) Logically followed to move the NetInstall description up frome 1.2.4 to the main intro. + c) Moved the 'Important' text from Live 1.2.3.1 Common features to the main intro because it is not really part of 'Common features', and I think its more natural location is in the main intro.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Centre-align all PNG's.--> +<!--2019/01/03 apb: Update checking.png (which also includes sha512 option). Some rewording to 1.2.4.2, 1.3.1, 1.4.2.3.5. Update text to include sha512 option in 1.3.1 & 1.3.2--> +<title xml:id="Select-and-use-ISOs-ti1">Select and use ISOs</title> + </info> + <section> + <title>Introduction</title> + <para>Mageia is distributed via ISO images. This page will help you to choose +which image best suits your needs.</para> + <para>There are three types of installation media:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Classical installer:</emphasis> Booting with this +media provides you with the maximum flexibility when choosing what to +install, and for configuring your system. In particular, you have a choice +of which Desktop environment to install.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">LIVE media:</emphasis> This option allows you to try +out Mageia without having to actually install it, or make any changes to +your computer. However, the Live media also includes an Installer, which can +be started when booting the media, or after booting into the Live operating +system itself.</para> + <note> + <para>The Live Installer is simpler compared to the Classical Installer - but you +have fewer configuration options.</para> + </note> + <important> + <para>Live ISOs can only be used to create <quote>clean</quote> installations, +they cannot be used to upgrade previously installed Mageia releases.</para> + </important> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Net Install</emphasis>: These are minimal ISO's +containing no more than that which is needed to start the DrakX installer +and find <literal>DrakX-installer-stage2</literal> and other packages that +are needed to continue and complete the install. These packages may be on +the PC hard disk, on a local drive, on a local network or on the Internet.</para> + <para>These media are very light (less than 100 MB) and are convenient if +bandwidth is too low to download a full DVD, or if you have a PC without a +DVD drive or is unable to boot from a USB stick.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para>More details are given in the next sections.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Media</title> + <section> + <title>Definition</title> + <para>Here, a medium (plural: media) is an ISO image file that allows you to +install and/or update Mageia and, by extension, any physical medium (DVD, +USB stick, ...) the ISO file is copied to.</para> + <para>You can find Mageia ISO's <link +ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/downloads/">here</link>.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Classical installation media</title> + <section> + <title>Common features</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>These ISOs use the Classical installer called DrakX</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>They are used for performing clean installs or to upgrade a previously +installed version of Mageia</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Some tools are available in the Installer <quote>Welcome</quote> screen: +<emphasis>Rescue System, Memory Test, </emphasis>and <emphasis>Hardware +Detection Tool</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Each DVD contains many available desktop environments and languages</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>You'll be given the choice during the installation to add non-free software</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <title>Live media</title> + <section> + <title>Common features</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Can be used to preview the Mageia operating system without having to install +it</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>The Live media also includes an Installer.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Each ISO contains only one desktop environment (Plasma, GNOME or Xfce)</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>They contain non-free software</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>Live DVD Plasma</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Plasma desktop environment only</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>All available languages are present</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>64-bit architecture only</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>Live DVD GNOME</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>GNOME desktop environment only</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>All available languages are present</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>64-bit architecture only</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>Live DVD Xfce</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Xfce desktop environment only</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>All available languages are present</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>32 or 64-bit architectures</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <title>Net install media</title> + <section> + <title>Common features</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Different media for 32 and 64-bit architectures</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>First steps are English language only</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>netinstall.iso</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Contains only free software, for those who prefer to not use non-free +software</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>netinstall-nonfree.iso</title> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Contains non-free software (mostly drivers, codecs...) for those who need it</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <title>Downloading and Checking Media</title> + <section> + <title>Downloading</title> + <para>Once you have chosen your ISO file, you can download it using either http or +BitTorrent. In both cases, you are provided with some information, such as +the mirror in use and an option to switch to an alternative if the bandwidth +is too low.</para> + <para>If http is chosen you will also see some information regarding checksums.</para> + + <para><literal>md5sum</literal>, <literal>sha1sum</literal> and +<literal>sha512sum</literal> (the most secure) are tools to check the ISO +integrity. Copy one of the checksums (string of alphanumeric characters) for +use in the next section.</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Checking.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In the meantime, a window to download the actual ISO will open:</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Download.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>Click on <emphasis>Save File</emphasis>, then click <emphasis>OK</emphasis>.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title xml:id="integrity">Checking the integrity of the downloaded media</title> + <para>The checksums referred to earlier, are digital fingerprints generated by an +algorithm from the file to be downloaded. You may compare the checksum of +your downloaded ISO against that of the original source ISO. If the +checksums do not match, it means that the actual data on the ISO's do not +match, and if that is the case, then you should retry the download or +attempt a repair using BitTorrent.</para> + <para>To generate the checksum for your downloaded ISO, open a console, (no need +to be root), and:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>To use the md5sum, type: <command>md5sum +path/to/the/image/file.iso</command></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>To use the sha1sum, type: <command>sha1sum +path/to/the/image/file.iso</command></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>To use the sha512sum, type: <command>sha512sum +path/to/the/image/file.iso</command></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <para>Example:</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Md5sum.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>then compare the result (you may have to wait for a while) with the ISO +checksum provided by Mageia.</para> + </section> + </section> + <section> + <title>Burn or dump the ISO</title> + <para>The verified ISO can now be burned to a CD/DVD or <quote>dumped</quote> to a +USB stick. This is not a standard copy operation, as a bootable medium will +actually be created.</para> + <section> + <title>Burning the ISO to a CD/DVD</title> + <para>Whichever software you use, ensure that the option to burn an<emphasis> +image</emphasis> is used. Burn <emphasis>data</emphasis> or +<emphasis>files</emphasis> is NOT correct. See the <link +ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Writing_CD_and_DVD_images">the Mageia +wiki</link> for more information.</para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Dump the ISO to a USB stick</title> + <para>All Mageia ISOs are hybrids, which means you can dump them to a USB stick +and then use that to boot and install the system.</para> + <warning> + <para>Dumping an image onto a flash device destroys any previous file-system on +the device and all existing data will be lost.</para> + </warning> + <note> + <para>Also, the only partition on the flash device will then just be the Mageia +ISO partition.</para> + <para>So, if an ISO of about 4GB is written to an 8GB USB stick, the stick will +then only show up as 4GB. This is because the remaining 4GB is no longer +formatted - hence not currently available for use. To recover the original +capacity, you must reformat and repartition the USB stick.</para> + </note> + <section> + <title>Using a graphical tool within Mageia</title> + <para>You can use a graphical tool like <link +ns4:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/IsoDumper_Writing_ISO_images_on_USB_sticks">IsoDumper</link></para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Using a graphical tool within Windows</title> + <para>You could try:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><link ns4:href="http://rufus.akeo.ie/?locale=en_US">Rufus</link> using the +"ISO image" option</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><link ns4:href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/win32diskimager">Win32 Disk +Imager</link></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section> + <title>Using the Command line within a GNU/Linux system</title> + <warning> + <para>It is potentially *dangerous* to do this by hand. You risk overwriting +potentially valuable existing data if you specify the wrong target device.</para> + </warning> + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Open a console</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Become a <emphasis>root</emphasis> (Administrator) user with the command +<command>su -</command> (don't forget the <command>-</command> )</para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Root.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Plug in your USB stick - but do not mount it (this also means do not open +any application or file manager that could access or read it)</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Enter the command <command>fdisk -l</command></para> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="Fdisk.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Find the device name for your USB stick (by its size), for example +<filename>/dev/sdb</filename> in the screenshot above, is an 8GB USB stick.</para> + <para>Alternatively, you can find the device name with the command +<command>dmesg</command>. Towards the end of the following example, you can +see the device name starting with <filename>sd</filename>, and in this case, +<filename>sdd</filename> is the actual device. You can also see that its +size is 2GB:</para> + <para><screen>[72594.604531] usb 1-1: new high-speed USB device number 27 using xhci_hcd +[72594.770528] usb 1-1: New USB device found, idVendor=8564, idProduct=1000 +[72594.770533] usb 1-1: New USB device strings: Mfr=1, Product=2, SerialNumber=3 +[72594.770536] usb 1-1: Product: Mass Storage Device +[72594.770537] usb 1-1: Manufacturer: JetFlash +[72594.770539] usb 1-1: SerialNumber: 18MJTWLMPUCC3SSB +[72594.770713] usb 1-1: ep 0x81 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes +[72594.770719] usb 1-1: ep 0x2 - rounding interval to 128 microframes, ep desc says 255 microframes +[72594.771122] usb-storage 1-1:1.0: USB Mass Storage device detected +[72594.772447] scsi host8: usb-storage 1-1:1.0 +[72595.963238] scsi 8:0:0:0: Direct-Access JetFlash Transcend 2GB 1100 PQ: 0 ANSI: 4 +[72595.963626] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] 4194304 512-byte logical blocks: (2.14 GB/2.00 GiB) +[72595.964104] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Write Protect is off +[72595.964108] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Mode Sense: 43 00 00 00 +[72595.965025] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] No Caching mode page found +[72595.965031] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Assuming drive cache: write through +[72595.967251] <emphasis>sdd</emphasis>: sdd1 +[72595.969446] sd 8:0:0:0: [sdd] Attached SCSI removable disk</screen></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Enter the command: <command>dd if=path/to/the/ISO/file +of=/dev/sd<replaceable>X</replaceable> bs=1M</command></para> + <para>Where <replaceable>X</replaceable>=your device name eg: +<filename>/dev/sdd</filename></para> + <para>Example:<literal> dd if=/home/user/Downloads/Mageia-6-x86_64-DVD.iso +of=/dev/sdd bs=1M</literal></para> + <tip> + <para>It might be helpful to know that <emphasis role="bold">if</emphasis> stands +for <emphasis role="bold">i</emphasis>nput <emphasis +role="bold">f</emphasis>ile and <emphasis role="bold">of</emphasis> stands +for <emphasis role="bold">o</emphasis>utput <emphasis +role="bold">f</emphasis>ile</para> + </tip> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>Enter the command: <command>sync</command></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para>This is the end of the process, and you may now unplug your USB stick.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/acceptLicense.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/acceptLicense.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a57a2b8c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/acceptLicense.xml @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="acceptLicense" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 27 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- JohnR: minor mods 2012-3-30 --> +<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back --> +<!-- JohnR: 2012-04-05 - Inserted text from barjac with some modifications: + http://mtf.no-ip.co.uk/doc/help/license.html --> +<!-- marja:2012-04-05 - having a look because this isn't a DocBook5.0 type anymore, + but text/xml. First changing centimetres in screenshot to pixels ( + ), after that nested the two existing sections into a third one--> +<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, marja, 20120409 --> +<!-- barjac:2012-04-10 - edited header to correct formatting after my saves - not + sure what is causing the corruption --> +<!-- JohnR 2012-04-19 language proofreading --> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/19 apb: Updated dx2-license.png to Mga6.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Slight reword to '..thanks for looking' sentence.--> +<title xml:id="acceptLicense-ti1">License and Release Notes</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG" +xml:id="acceptLicense-im1" fileref="dx2-license.png" align="center" +revision="4"/> </imageobject> <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" +fileref="live-license.png" xml:id="acceptLicense-im2" revision="5" +align="center" condition="live"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section xml:id="license"> + <info> + <title xml:id="license-ti1">License Agreement</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Before installing Mageia, please read the license terms and conditions +carefully.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>These terms and conditions apply to the entire Mageia distribution and must +be accepted before you can continue.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>To proceed, simply select <emphasis>Accept</emphasis> and then click on +<emphasis>Next</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>If you decide not to accept these conditions, then we thank you for your +interest in Mageia. Clicking <emphasis>Quit</emphasis> will reboot your +computer.</para> + + + <!-- if you want two sections in a file, both need to be nested in a third section - + marja, 20120405 --> +</section> + + <section xml:id="releaseNotes"> + <!-- + <para> +Release Notes</para> +--> +<info> + <title xml:id="releaseNotes-ti1">Release Notes</title> + </info> + + + + <para>Important information about this particular Mageia release can be viewed by +clicking on the <emphasis>Release Notes</emphasis> button.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/addUser.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/addUser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ffa2e228 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/addUser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="addUser" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="addUser-ti1">User Management</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon: 20170210 updated for Mageia 6 (umask)--> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and Typography.--> +<!--2018/02/19 apb: Update dx2-setRootPassword.png to Mga6.--> +<!--2018/02/21 apb: Changed title from 'User and Superuser Management' to 'User Management'. Docteam approved (plus, the SC title is User Management). + Also changed 'Advanced User Management' to 'User Management (advanced)'.--> +<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed list style.--> +<!--2019/08/10 apb: Added missing 'condition' profile for live-user1.png.--> +<!--2019/08/11 apb: [1] Reword 1.1 (including Note) [2] Reword 1.2 Password text.--> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-setRootPassword.png" format="PNG" revision="1" +xml:id="setRootPassword-im1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live"> +<imagedata fileref="live-user1.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section xml:id="root-password"> + <info> + <title xml:id="root-password-ti2">Set Administrator (root) Password:</title> + </info> + + <para>It is advisable for all Mageia installations to set a +<literal>superuser</literal> (Administrator) password, usually called the +<emphasis>root </emphasis>password in Linux. You need to repeat the same +password in the box underneath, to check that the first entry was not +mistyped.</para> + + <note xml:id="givePassword"> + <para>As you type a password into the top box a shield will change from +red-to-yellow-to-green depending on the strength of the password. A green +shield shows you are using a strong password.</para> + + <para>All passwords are case-sensitive. It is best to use a mixture of letters +(upper and lower case), numbers and other characters in a password.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section xml:id="enterUser"> + <info> + <title xml:id="enterUser-ti3">Enter a user</title> + </info> + + <para>Add a User here. A regular user has fewer privileges than the +<literal>superuser</literal> (root), but enough to use the Internet, office +applications or play games and anything else the average user might use a +computer for.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Icon</emphasis></para> + + <para>Click on this button if you want to change the user's icon</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Real Name</emphasis></para> + + <para>Insert the user's real name into this text box</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Login Name</emphasis></para> + + <para>Enter the user login name or let DrakX use a version of the user's real +name. <emphasis role="bold">The login name is case-sensitive.</emphasis></para> + + <caution condition="live"> + <simpara>The login entered here should be different to any login currently in use for +your <filename>/home</filename> directory. Some user parameters will be +written in the user space, and some can overwrite actual data such as +Firefox, Thunderbird or Kmail data...</simpara> + </caution> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Password</emphasis></para> + + <para>Type in the user password (remembering the advice in the Note above).</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Password (again):</emphasis> Retype the user +password. DrakX will check that you have not mistyped the password.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <note> + <para>Any users added while installing Mageia, will have a home directory that is +both read and write protected (umask=0027)</para> + + <para>You can add any extra needed users in the <emphasis>Configuration - +Summary</emphasis> step during the install. Choose <emphasis>User +management</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>The access permissions can also be changed after the install.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section condition="classical" xml:id="addUserAdvanced"> + <info> + <title xml:id="addUserAdvanced-ti3">User Management (advanced)</title> + </info> + + <para>The <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> option allows you to edit further settings +for the user you are adding.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Shell</emphasis>: This drop-down list allows you to change the +shell available to any user you added in the previous screen. Options are +<literal>Bash</literal>, <literal>Dash</literal> and <literal>Sh</literal></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>User ID</emphasis>: Here you can set the user ID for any user you +added in the previous screen. If you are unsure what the purpose of this is, +then leave it blank.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Group ID</emphasis>: This lets you set the group ID. Again, if +unsure, leave it blank.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/add_supplemental_media.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/add_supplemental_media.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b7fa7960 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/add_supplemental_media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="add_supplemental_media" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="add_supplemental_media-ti1">Supplemental Installation Media</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- papoteur 2013-04-13 - created --> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot and expanded title (because is was the same as for media_selection --> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/a optical/an optcal/ s/support/disc/ s/or or/or/ s/at/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell --> +<!--2018/02/10 apb: Text and typgraphy.--> +<!--2018/02/16 apb: Update dx2-add_supplemental_media.png to Mga6--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" +fileref="dx2-add_supplemental_media.png" +xml:id="dx2-add_supplemental_media-im1" align="center" revision="1"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This screen shows you the list of already recognised repositories. You can +add other sources for packages, like an optical-disc or a remote source. +The source selection determines which packages will be available during the +subsequent steps.</para> + + <para>For a network source, there are two steps to follow:</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Choosing and activating the network, if not already up.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Selecting a mirror or specifying a URL (very first entry). By selecting a +mirror, you have access to the selection of all repositories managed by +Mageia, like the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis>, the +<emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repositories and the +<emphasis>Updates</emphasis>. With the URL, you can designate a specific +repository or your own NFS installation.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <note> + <para>If you are updating a 64-bit installation which may contain some 32-bit +packages, it is advised to use this screen to add an online mirror by +selecting one of the Network protocols here. The 64-bit DVD ISO only +contains 64-bit and <emphasis>noarch</emphasis> packages, it will not be +able to update the 32-bit packages. However, after adding an online mirror, +the installer will find the needed 32-bit packages there.</para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/ask_mntpoint_s.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/ask_mntpoint_s.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4709de7f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/ask_mntpoint_s.xml @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="ask_mntpoint_s-ti1">Choose the mount points</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 28 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has taken a look but needs to come back --> +<!-- removed para xml:id's, marja, 20120409 --> +<!-- barjac 14/04/2012 Minor edit to improve grammar and replaced "at least ONE" + with "a", as I can't imagine having more than one root partition ;) --> +<!-- Lebarhon : I put [] where it seems having mistakes --> +<!-- Marja: you're right, in English English it is "its type", however, the Americans + write "it's type". And you're right about the redundant part, too, I removed it--> +<!-- And JohnR says the Americans are WRONG! :-)) --> +<!-- 2012-04-19 Language proofreading done --> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2019/01/04 apb: Typo & minor reword on custom mount-points.--> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-chooseMountpoints.png" format="PNG" revision="1" +xml:id="chooseMountPoints-im1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-chooseMountpoints.png" format="PNG" revision="1" +xml:id="live-chooseMountPoints-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you see the Linux partitions that have been found on your computer. If +you don't agree with the DrakX suggestions, you can change the mount points +yourself.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>To the left of the drop-down menus is a list of available partitions. For +example: <filename>sda</filename> is a hard drive - and +<filename>5</filename> is a <emphasis>partition number</emphasis>, followed +by the<emphasis> (capacity, mount point, filesystem type)</emphasis> of the +partition.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If you have several partitions, you can choose various different +<emphasis>mount points</emphasis> from the drop down menu, such as +<filename>/</filename>, <filename>/home</filename> and +<filename>/var</filename>. You can even make your own mount points, for +instance <filename>/video</filename> for a partition where you want to store +your films, or perhaps <filename>/Data</filename> for all your data files.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>For any partitions that you don't need to make use of, you can leave the +mount point field blank.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <warning> + <para>If you make any changes here, ensure you still have a <filename>/</filename> +(root) partition.</para> + </warning> + + <tip> + <para>If you are not sure what to choose, click <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> to +go back and then tick <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>, where +you can click on a partition to see its type and size.</para> + </tip> + + <para>If you are sure the mount points are correct, click on +<emphasis>Next</emphasis>, and choose whether you only want to format the +partition suggested by DrakX, or more.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/bestTime.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/bestTime.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..614c09ad --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/bestTime.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="bestTime"> + + + <info> + <!--2018/03/01 apb: Slight adjustment to text--> +<!--2018/03/03/ apb: Redo definition for the Advanced option,--> +<title xml:id="bestTime-ti1">Clock Settings</title> + </info> + <mediaobject condition="live"> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" align="center" +fileref="live-bestTime.png" revision="1" xml:id="bestTime-im1"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + <para>Here, you can select whether your computer internal clock is set to local +time or UTC time.</para> + <para>In the <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> tab, you can enable automatic time +synchronization and specify an NTP server.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/bootLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/bootLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8f089673 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/bootLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + + + + + + + + <info> + <!--2018/03/01 apb: a) center-align live-bootCSM.png b) Redo/expand text.--> +<!--2018/02/02 apb: a) update live-bootCSM.png and redo corresponding text.--> +<!--2018/02/03 apb: a) A couple of typos and slight adjustment to some text. b) Added definition for F6 Default boot option.--> +<!--2019/01/06 apb: 1.2 - F6 last sentence typo.--> +<!--2019/01/06 apb: 1.2 - Update SC (live-bootCSM.png) and text to reflect changes to Mga7 options.--> +<!--2019/01/08 apb: 1.2 - Add text for Memtest option. 1.3 - Update live-bootUEFI.png and add text for F2 Language option.--> +<!--2019/01/11 apb: 1.3 - Boot Mageia: change Dvd -> + DVD.--> +<title xml:id="bootLive-ti1">Boot Mageia as Live system</title> + </info> + <section xml:id="bootLive-1"> + <info> + <title xml:id="bootLive1-ti1">Booting the medium</title> + </info> + <para>You can boot directly from a Live DVD or USB. Usually, you just need to plug +the USB device in or place the DVD in the drive and restart the computer.</para> + <para>If the computer does not automatically boot from the USB or DVD you may need +to reconfigure your BIOS Boot Disk priority. Alternatively, you might try +accessing the boot device menu to select a device from which the computer +will boot.</para> + <tip> + <para>To access the BIOS or boot menu when the computer is starting, you can try +pressing either <keycap>F2</keycap>, <keycap>Del</keycap> or +<keycap>Esc</keycap> for the BIOS, or <keycap>Esc</keycap>, +<keycap>F8</keycap>, <keycap>F10</keycap> or <keycap>F11</keycap> for the +boot device menu. These (fairly common) keys are just a selection of +possible options though.</para> + </tip> + <note> + <para>The actual screen that you will first see when booting from the Live media +will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of the Legacy (BIOS) or +UEFI type.</para> + </note> + </section> + <section xml:id="biosmode"> + <info> + <title xml:id="biosmode-ti1">In BIOS/CSM/Legacy mode</title> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../live-bootCSM.png" align="center"/> +</imageobject> + <caption> + <para>First screen while booting in BIOS mode</para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + <itemizedlist> + <title>Menu</title> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Boot Mageia</emphasis></para> + <para>This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB +media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS).</para> + <para>Once the boot is done, you can proceed to the installation.</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">+ use non-free video drivers (slower to +boot)</emphasis></para> + <para>Boot the Mageia Live system using non-free video drivers</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Install Mageia</emphasis></para> + <para>This option will install Mageia to a hard disk.</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">+ use non-free video drivers (slower to +boot)</emphasis></para> + <para>Install Mageia using non-free video drivers</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Memory Test</emphasis></para> + <para>Test the installed RAM by performing multiple read and write +operations. Reboot to end the test.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold"> F2 Language</emphasis></para> + <para>Press <keycap>F2</keycap> to have the installer use a specific language +during the installation. Use the arrow keys to select the language then +press <keycap>Enter</keycap>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + <section xml:id="uefimode"> + <info> + <title xml:id="uefimode-ti1">In UEFI mode</title> + </info> + <mediaobject condition="live"> + <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="../live-bootUEFI.png" +align="center" xml:id="bootUEFI-im1" revision="1"/> </imageobject> + <caption> + <para>First screen while booting in UEFI mode</para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + <itemizedlist> + <title>Menu</title> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Boot Mageia</emphasis></para> + <para>This option will boot the Mageia Live system from the connected DVD/USB +media (expect a very slow system compared to an installed OS). Once the +boot is done, you can proceed to the installation</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Install Mageia</emphasis></para> + <para>This option will install Mageia to a hard disk.</para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold"> F2 Language</emphasis></para> + <para>Press <keycap>F2</keycap> to have the installer use a specific language +during the installation. Use the arrow keys to select the language then +press <keycap>Enter</keycap>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <note> + <para>If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above menu options +duplicated, and in this case, you should choose from the menu pair that will +be suffixed with "USB".</para> + </note> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/chooseDesktop.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/chooseDesktop.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aab1332f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/chooseDesktop.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="chooseDesktop" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + <!--Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC--> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.--> +<info> + <!--2018/02/12 apb: Some wording and typograpy.--> +<!--2018/02/22 apb: Change last 2 paras to bulleted--> +<!--2019/01/05 apb: Slight reword to para's 1,2 & 4.--> +<title xml:id="chooseDesktop-ti1">Desktop Selection</title> + </info> + + + + + + <para>Some choices made here will open other screens with related options.</para> + + <para>After the selection step(s), you will see a slideshow during the +installation of required packages. The slideshow can be disabled by pressing +the <emphasis>Details</emphasis> button.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-chooseDesktop.png" +format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Choose whether you prefer to use the KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop +environment. Both come with a full set of useful applications and tools.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select <emphasis>Custom</emphasis> if you do not wish to use either (or, +actually use both) of these, or if you want to modify the default software +choices for these desktop environments. The LXDE desktop, for instance, is +lighter than the previous two, sporting less eye candy and having fewer +packages installed by default.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/choosePackageGroups.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/choosePackageGroups.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e8144505 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/choosePackageGroups.xml @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="choosePackageGroups" xreflabel="Choose Package Groups"> + <info> + <title xml:id="choosePackageGroups-ti1">Package Group Selection</title> + </info> + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!--Lebarhon 20170209 Updated SC--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: add xreflabel to this section.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-choosePackageGroups.png" +align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Packages are arranged into common groups, to make choosing what you need on +your system a lot easier. The groups are fairly self explanatory, however +more information about the content of each is available in tool-tips which +become visible as the mouse is hovered over them.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Workstation</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Server</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Graphical Environment</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Individual Package Selection</emphasis>: you can use +this option to manually add or remove packages</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>See <xref linkend="minimal-install"/> for instructions on how to do a +minimal install (without or with X & IceWM).</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/choosePackagesTree.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/choosePackagesTree.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0346465e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/choosePackagesTree.xml @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="choosePackagesTree" xreflabel="Choose Packages Tree" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="choosePackagesTree-ti1">Choose Individual Packages</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to start a new page--> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: add xreflabel to this section.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-choosePackagesTree.png" +align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you can add or remove any extra packages to customize your +installation.</para> + + <para>After having made your choice, you can click on the +<emphasis>floppy</emphasis> icon at the bottom of the page to save your +choice of packages (saving to a USB key works, too). You can then use this +file to install the same packages on another system, by pressing the same +button during install and choosing to load it.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureServices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureServices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..863021a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureServices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xreflabel="Configure Services" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="configureServices"> + <info> + <title xml:id="configureServices-ti1">Configure your Services</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this section out of misc-params.xml --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot --> +<!-- 2018/02/16 apb: Minor text adjustment.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: a) add xreflabel for this section. b) Added some bullets to the text.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-configureServices.png" +xml:id="configureServices-im1" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="configureServices-pa1" revision="1">Here you can choose which services should start when you boot your system.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="configureServices-pa2" revision="1">Click on a triangle to expand a group to all the relevant services. The +settings DrakX chose are usually good.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="configureServices-pa4" revision="1">If you highlight a service, some information about it is shown in the info +box below.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para xml:id="configureServices-pa5" revision="1">Only change things when you know very well what you are doing.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureTimezoneUTC.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureTimezoneUTC.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5bac9dff --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureTimezoneUTC.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xreflabel="Configure Timezone" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-ti6">Configure your Timezone</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot --> +<!--2018/02/13 apb: Minor text adjustment.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added xreflabel to this section.--> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata format="PNG" +xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-im1" align="center" +fileref="dx2-configureTimezoneUTC.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata format="png" +fileref="live-timeZone.png" align="center"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa1" revision="1">Choose your timezone by choosing your country, or a city close to you in the +same timezone.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa2" revision="1">In the next screen you can choose to set your hardware clock to local time +or to GMT, also known as UTC.</para> + + <note> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureTimezoneUTC-pa3">If you have more than one operating system on your computer, make sure they +are all set to local time, or all to UTC/GMT.</para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_card_list.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_card_list.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bc76c51a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_card_list.xml @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" + xreflabel="Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)" + xml:id="configureX_card_list" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Initiated by Marja 2012-08-08 --> +<!-- Further text JohnR 2012-08-29 --> +<!-- tproof --> +<!-- lproof --> +<!-- Done corrections accordind to tmb remarks. Papoteur --> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/21 apb: Merge last 2 paras + slight reword.--> +<!--2019/08/10 apb: Added xreflabel--> +<title xml:id="configureX_card_list-ti1">Choose an X Server (Configure your Graphic Card)</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-configureX_card_list.png" format="PNG" revision="1" +xml:id="configureX_card_list-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>DrakX has a very comprehensive database of video cards and will usually +correctly identify your video device.</para> + + <para>If the installer has not correctly detected your graphic card and you know +which one you have, you can select it from the tree by: <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Vendor</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>then the make of your card</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>and the model of card</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para>If you cannot find your card in the vendor lists (because it's not yet in +the database or it's an older card) you may find a suitable driver in the +<emphasis>Xorg</emphasis> category, which provides more than 40 generic and +open source video card drivers. If you still can't find a specific driver +for your card there is the option of using the VESA driver which provides +basic capabilities.</para> + + <caution> + <para>Be aware that if you select an incompatible driver you may only have access +to the <emphasis>Command Line Interface</emphasis></para> + </caution> + + <para>Some video card manufacturers provide proprietary drivers for Linux which +may only be available in the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository and in +some cases only from the card manufacturers' websites. The +<emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository needs to be explicitly enabled to +access them. If you didn't enable it previously, you should do this after +your first reboot.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_chooser.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_chooser.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0f8c0799 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_chooser.xml @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xreflabel="Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration" + xml:id="configureX_chooser" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Marja 2012-08-10, copied setupX.xml to this file and replaced all "setupX" in the code by "configureX_chooser", because this is the correct filename for this page--> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Some text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/21 apb: a) Changed main options list style. b) Slight reword of 'wrong refresh rates' warning.--> +<!--2018/02/23 apb: Typo.--> +<!--2019/01/06 apb: Slight reword, split 1st para in two.--> +<!--2019/08/10 apb: [1] Added xreflabel. [2] Changed all instances of 'Graphic Card' to Graphics Card--> +<title xml:id="configureX_chooser-ti1">Graphics Card and Monitor Configuration</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_chooser.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa1">No matter which graphical environment (also known as desktop environment) +you chose for this install of Mageia, they are all based on a graphical user +interface system called <literal>X Window System</literal>, or simply +<quote>X</quote>. So in order for KDE Plasma, GNOME, LXDE or any other +graphical environment to work well, the following <quote>X</quote> settings +need to be correct.</para> + + <para>Choose the appropriate settings manually if you think the details are +incorrect, or if none are shown.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa2"><emphasis role="bold">Graphics Card</emphasis></para> + + <para>If you need to, you can select a specific card from this expandable +list. See <xref linkend="configureX_card_list"/>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3"><emphasis role="bold">Monitor</emphasis></para> + + <para>You can choose Plug 'n Play, if applicable, or choose your monitor from the +<emphasis>Vendor</emphasis> or <emphasis>Generic</emphasis> lists. Choose +<emphasis>Custom</emphasis> if you prefer to manually set the horizontal and +vertical refresh rates of your monitor. See <xref +linkend="configureX_monitor"/>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa4"><emphasis role="bold">Resolution</emphasis></para> + + <para>The resolution and color depth of your monitor can be set here.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa5"><emphasis role="bold">Test</emphasis></para> + + <para>The test button does not always appear during install. If the option is +there, and you test your settings, you should be asked to confirm that your +settings are correct. If you answer <emphasis>Yes</emphasis>, the settings +will be kept. If you don't see anything, you'll return to the configuration +screen and be able to reconfigure everything until the test result is +satisfactory. If the test option is not available, then make sure your +settings are on the safe side.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa6"><emphasis role="bold">Options</emphasis></para> + + <para>Here you can choose to enable or disable various options.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <warning> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_chooser-pa3a">There is a risk of damaging a monitor if you choose refresh rates that are +outside the frequency range of that monitor. This applies to older CRT +displays: modern monitors will reject an unsupported frequency and normally +enter standby mode.</para> + </warning> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_monitor.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_monitor.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..36d76a10 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/configureX_monitor.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xreflabel="Choosing your Monitor" + xml:id="configureX_monitor" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Initiated by Marga 2012-8-09 --> +<!-- Further text JohnR 2012-08-30 --> +<!-- tproof --> +<!----> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography--> +<!--2018/02/22 apb: Change list style.--> +<!--2019/01/06 apb: Slight rewording.--> +<!--2019/08/10 apb: Added xreflabel.--> +<title xml:id="configureX_monitor-ti1">Choosing your Monitor</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1">DrakX has a very comprehensive database of monitors and will usually +correctly identify yours.</para> + + <warning> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa1w"><emphasis role="bold">Selecting a monitor with different characteristics +could damage your monitor or video hardware. Please don't try something +without knowing what you are doing.</emphasis> If in doubt you should +consult your monitor documentation.</para> + </warning> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-configureX_monitor.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <variablelist spacing="compact"> + <varlistentry> + <term revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa2">Custom</term> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa3">This option allows you to set two critical parameters: the vertical refresh +rate and the horizontal sync rate. Vertical refresh determines how often the +screen is refreshed and horizontal sync is the rate at which scan lines are +displayed.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa4">It is <emphasis>VERY IMPORTANT</emphasis> that you do not specify a monitor +type with a sync range that is beyond the capabilities of your monitor: you +may damage your monitor. If in doubt, choose a conservative setting and +consult your monitor documentation.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa5">Plug'n Play</term> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa6">This is the default option and automatically tries to determine the monitor +type from the monitor database.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa7">Vendor</term> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa8">If the installer has not correctly detected your monitor and you know which +one you have, you can choose it from the options by selecting:</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Manufacturer</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Monitor model</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <variablelist spacing="compact"> + <varlistentry> + <term revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa9">Generic</term> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="configureX_monitor-pa10">Selecting this group will list approximately 30 display configurations such +as 1024x768 @ 60Hz and includes flat-panel displays as used in laptops. +This is often a good monitor selection group if you need to use the VESA +card driver when your video hardware cannot be determined +automatically. Once again, it may be wise to be conservative in your +selections.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/diskPartitioning.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/diskPartitioning.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0e8e014d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/diskPartitioning.xml @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xreflabel="Partitioning" xml:id="diskPartitioning" xml:lang="en" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + + + <!--2018/02/27 apb: Created this XML to group the Partitioning-related elements.--> +<title>Partitioning</title> + + <xi:include href="doPartitionDisks.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="ask_mntpoint_s.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="takeOverHdConfirm.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="formatPartitions.xml"/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/diskdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/diskdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..927b3c09 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/diskdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xreflabel="DiskDrake" xml:id="diskdrake" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6 + +Lebarhon 20170902 added SC--> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/17 apb: Fix a couple of tags that were out of place + added 'xreflabel="DiskDrake" at start of doc.--> +<!--2018/02/27 apb: Reformat the text and add titles for the boot partition SC's.--> +<!--2019/01/05 apb: Slight reword to 1st bullet-point.--> +<!--2019/08/06 apb: Slight reword to 2nd bullet-point (was mentioning sda & sdb tabs in previous SC version).--> +<title xml:id="diskdrake-ti1">Custom Disk Partitioning with DiskDrake</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-diskdrake.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live"> +<imagedata align="center" fileref="live-diskdrake.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake-pa3">Modify the layout of your disk(s) here. You can remove or create partitions, +change the filesystem or size of a partition and even view their details +before you start.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa4">There is a tab at the top for every detected hard disk (or other storage +device, like a USB key), for example: <filename>sda</filename>, +<filename>sdb</filename>, <filename>sdc</filename> etc.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6">For all other actions: click on the desired partition first. Then view it, +or choose a filesystem and a mount point, resize it or wipe +it. <emphasis>Expert mode</emphasis> provides more options such as to label +(name) a partition, or to choose a partition type.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa6a">Continue until you have adjusted everything to your satisfaction, then click +<emphasis>Done</emphasis> when you're ready.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <warning> + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake-pa5">Take care with the <emphasis>Clear all</emphasis> option, use it only if you +are sure you want to wipe all partitions on the selected storage device.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="3" xml:id="diskdrake-pa1">If you wish to use encryption on your <filename>/</filename> partition you +must ensure that you have a separate <filename>/boot</filename> +partition. The encryption option for the <filename>/boot</filename> +partition must NOT be set, otherwise your system will be unbootable.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </warning> + + <important> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If you are installing Mageia on a UEFI system, check that an ESP (EFI System +Partition) is present and correctly mounted on +<filename>/boot/EFI</filename>. See Figure 1 below.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If you are installing Mageia on a Legacy/GPT system, check that a BIOS boot +partition is present and of the correct type. See Figure 2 below.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </important> + + <figure> + <title>EFI System Partition</title> + +<mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-diskdrake2.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject condition="live"> +<imagedata align="center" fileref="live-diskdrake2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure> + + <figure> + <title>BIOS boot partition</title> + +<mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></figure> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/doPartitionDisks.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/doPartitionDisks.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0f084a3f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/doPartitionDisks.xml @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="doPartitionDisks" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!--lebarhon 20161216 updated for Mageia 6 + +lebarhon 20170209 added SC--> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography. Added link to diskdrake in 2nd Note--> +<!--2018/02/17 apb: Centre-align last two PNG's. Also, fix some wonky XML formatting.--> +<!--2018/02/17 apb: Moved 'Erase ...' & 'Custom ...' list items up with the other list items. I can see the reason for splitting the list with the example SC, + but I think this way is clearer (flow) overall. I don't believe that combining the list will interfere with the example SC and the relevant list item.--> +<!--2018/02/21 apb: Changed list styles.--> +<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed list styles.--> +<!--2019/01/11 apb: Auto allocation of drive space rules: small edits for style consistency.--> +<!--2019/07/06 apb: Added live-doPartitionDisksk.png, as it was previously sharing the DrakX screenshot.--> +<!--2019/08/23 apb: Moved 'Important' note from 'Erase and Use Entire Disk' to 'Use Free Space on a Windows Partition'. Slight text tweak to to first para, 'Warning' and 'Important' --> +<title xml:id="doPartitionDisks-ti1">Suggested Partitioning</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa1">In this screen you can see the content of your hard drive(s) along with the +DrakX partitioning proposals for where to install Mageia.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa2">The actual options available from those shown below will vary according to +the layout and content of your particular hard drive(s).</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-doPartitionDisks.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <title>Main Options</title> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa4"><emphasis role="bold">Use Existing Partitions</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa5">If this option is available, then existing Linux compatible partitions have +been found and may be used for the installation.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa6"><emphasis role="bold">Use Free Space</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa7">If you have unused space on your hard drive then this option will use it for +your new Mageia installation.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa8"><emphasis role="bold">Use Free Space on a Windows Partition</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="suggestedPartitioning-pa9">If you have unused space on an existing Windows partition, the installer may +offer to use it. This can be a useful way of making room for your new Mageia +installation but see the warning below.</para> + + <para>With this option, the installer displays the remaining Windows partition in +light blue and the proposed Mageia partition in dark blue with their +intended sizes just underneath. You have the option to modify these sizes by +clicking and dragging the gap between both partitions. See the following +screenshot:<mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks2.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-doPartitionDisks2.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject></para> + + <warning> + <para>This involves shrinking the size of the Windows partition, and therefore is +a risky operation, so you should make sure you have backed up all important +files before proceeding.</para> + </warning> + + <important> + <para revision="3" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa11">The partition must be "clean", meaning that Windows must have closed down +correctly the last time it was used. It must also have been defragmented, +although this is not a guarantee that all files in the partition have been +moved out of the area that is about to be used for Mageia.</para> + </important> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa12"><emphasis role="bold">Erase and use Entire Disk</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa13">This option will allocate the entire drive for Mageia</para> + + <warning> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa14">This will erase ALL data on the selected hard drive. Take care! If you +intend to use part of the disk for something else, or you already have data +on the drive that you are not prepared to lose, then do not use this option.</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa16"><emphasis role="bold">Custom Disk Partitioning</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="doPartitionDisks-pa17">This gives you complete control over the placing of the installation on your +hard drive(s).</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>If you are not using the <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis> +option, then the installer will allocate the available space according to +the following rules:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the total available space is less than 50 GB, then only one partition is +created. This will be the <filename>/</filename> (root) partition.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If the total available space is greater than 50 GB, then three partitions +are created</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>6/19 of the total available place is allocated to <filename>/</filename> +with a maximum of 50 GB</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>1/19 is allocated to <filename>swap</filename> with a maximum of 4 GB</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the rest (at least 12/19) is allocated to <filename>/home</filename></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>This means that from 160 GB or greater available space, the installer will +create three partitions:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>50 GB for <filename>/</filename></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>4 GB for <filename>swap</filename></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>and the remainder for <filename>/home</filename></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <note> + <para>If you are using a UEFI system, the ESP (EFI System Partition) will be +automatically detected - or created if it does not exist yet - and mounted +on <filename>/boot/EFI</filename>. The <emphasis>Custom disk +partitioning</emphasis> option is the only one that allows to check it has +been correctly done.</para> + + <para>If you are using a Legacy (also known as BIOS) system with a GPT partitioned +disk, you need to create a BIOS boot partition if it doesn't already +exist. It should be about 1 MiB with no mount point. It can be created with +the Installer, under <emphasis>Custom disk partitioning</emphasis>, like any +other partition. Be sure to select <quote>BIOS boot partition</quote> for +filesystem type.</para> + + <para>See <xref linkend="diskdrake"/> for information on how to proceed.</para> + </note> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-doPartitionDisks3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-doPartitionDisks4.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-doPartitionDisks4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <important> + <para>Some newer drives are now using 4096 byte logical sectors, instead of the +previous standard of 512. Due to lack of available hardware, the +partitioning tool used in the installer has not been tested with such a +drive.</para> + + <para>Some SSD devices now use an erase block size over 1 MB. If you have such a +device we suggest that you partition the drive in advance, using an +alternative partitioning tool like gparted, and to use the following +settings:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Align to</emphasis> = MiB</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Free space preceding (MiB)</emphasis> = 2</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Also make sure all partitions are created using an even number of megabytes.</para> + </important> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/exitInstall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/exitInstall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..33510636 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/exitInstall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="exitInstall" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="exitInstall-ti1">Norabona</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC--> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added clickable link to mageia.org--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="dx2-exitInstall.png" +align="center" revision="1" xml:id="exitInstall-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa1" revision="2">You have finished installing and configuring Mageia and it is now safe to +remove the installation medium and reboot your computer.</para> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa2" revision="2">After rebooting, you can use the bootloader screen to choose which operating +system to start (if there are more than one on your computer).</para> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa3" revision="1">If you didn't adjust the settings for the bootloader, your Mageia install +will be automatically selected and started.</para> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa4" revision="1">Enjoy!</para> + + <para xml:id="exitInstall-pa5" revision="1">Visit <link ns4:href="http://www.mageia.org/en/">www.mageia.org/en/</link> +if you have any questions or want to contribute to Mageia</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/firewall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/firewall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9f059928 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/firewall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xreflabel="Firewall" xml:id="firewall" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + <info> + <!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added xreflabel for this section.--> +<!--2019/07/23 apb: Added dx2-firewall.png for this section.--> +<title xml:id="firewall-ti1">Tornafuéu</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="firewall-pa1">This section allows you to configure some simple firewall rules: they +determine which type of message from the Internet will be accepted by the +target system. This, in turn, allows the corresponding services on the +system to be accessible from the Internet.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-firewall.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In the default setting (no button is checked), no service of the system is +accessible from the network. The <emphasis>Everything (no +firewall)</emphasis> option enables access to all services of the machine - +an option that does not make much sense in the context of the installer +since it would create a totally unprotected system. Its veritable use is in +the context of the Mageia Control Center (which uses the same GUI layout) +for temporarily disabling the entire set of firewall rules for testing and +debugging purposes.</para> + + <para>All other options are more or less self-explanatory. As an example, you will +enable the CUPS server if you want printers on your machine to be accessible +from the network.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Advanced</emphasis></para> + + <para>The <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> option opens a window where you can enable +a series of services by typing a list of <quote>couples</quote> (blank +separated)</para> + + <para><emphasis><port-number>/<protocol></emphasis></para> + + <simplelist> + <member>- <emphasis><port-number></emphasis> is the value of the port assigned +to the service you want to enable (e.g. 873 for the RSYNC service) as +defined in <emphasis>RFC-433</emphasis>;</member> + + <member>- <emphasis><protocol></emphasis> is one of <emphasis>TCP</emphasis> +or <emphasis>UDP</emphasis> - the internet protocol that is used by the +service.</member> + </simplelist> + + <para>For instance, the entry for enabling access to the RSYNC service therefore +is <emphasis>873/tcp</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>In case a service is implemented to use both protocols, you specify 2 +couples for the same port.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/formatPartitions.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/formatPartitions.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d3b94eb --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/formatPartitions.xml @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="formatPartitions" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="formatPartitions-ti1">Formatting</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 29 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added emphasis tags in formatPartitions-pa1 --> +<!--2018/02/10 apb: Text and typography.--> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" revision="1" +xml:id="formatPartitions-im1"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-formatPartitions.png" format="PNG" revision="1" +xml:id="live-formatPartitions-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa1">Here you can choose which partition(s) you wish to format. Any data on +partitions <emphasis>not</emphasis> marked for formatting will be preserved.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa2">Usually, at least the partitions that DrakX selected need to be formatted.</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa3">Click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to choose the partitions you want to +check for so-called <emphasis>bad blocks</emphasis></para> + + <tip> + <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa4">If you're not sure you have made the right choice, you can click on +<emphasis>Previous</emphasis>, again on <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> and +then on <emphasis>Custom</emphasis> to get back to the main screen, where +you can choose to view details of your partitions.</para> + </tip> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="formatPartitions-pa5">When you are confident about the selections, click on +<emphasis>Next</emphasis> to continue.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/graphicalConfiguration.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/graphicalConfiguration.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ced6d7c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/graphicalConfiguration.xml @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="graphicalConfiguration" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + <info> + <!--2019/01/12 apb: Created this xml as parent for the 'configureX' xml's.--> +<title xml:id="graphicalConfiguration-ti1">Graphical Configuration</title> + </info> + + <xi:include href="configureX_chooser.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_card_list.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="configureX_monitor.xml"/> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/installUpdates.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/installUpdates.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc77bfff --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/installUpdates.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns52="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="installUpdates" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 30 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- marja 20120418 removed xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg"" from section tag, trying to restore correct html filename--> +<!-- marja, 2012-04-24 added screenshot --> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added bullets to some text.--> +<title xml:id="installUpdates-ti1">Updates</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="png" fileref="dx2-installUpdates.png" +align="center" revision="1" xml:id="installUpdates-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa1" revision="1">Since this version of Mageia was released, some packages will have been +updated or improved.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa2" revision="1">Select <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> if you wish to download and install them</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select <emphasis>No</emphasis> if you don't want to do this now, or if you +aren't connected to the Internet</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="installUpdates-pa3" revision="1">Press <emphasis>Next</emphasis> to continue</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/installer.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/installer.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dd1dfaee --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/installer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="installer" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!--2018/02/11 apb: Text and typography. F6 Default option needs to be better defined.--> +<!--2018/02/17 apb: Removed instances of surplus para tags from before and after some itemizedlist tags. These were present in the import from Mga6 WS. + Some listitem end-tags were directly after mediaobject end-tags, while the main listitem element was above the mediaobject. + So I moved the listitem end-tags above the mediaobjects, to their natural positions. This also was in the imported XML.--> +<!--2018/02/19 apb: Updated welcome.png to Mga6.--> +<!--2018/02/21 apb: a) Updated rest of BIOS PNG's, b) Refined text and reworked this XML.--> +<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed main list type--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Split 1,1 Caution into 2 paras.--> +<!--2018/02/27 apb: Fixed UEFI section nest level.--> +<!--2018/03/16 apb: Fixed incorrect value for title installer-ti1 (leading to output error since last year in Documentation Workspace - and inherited here, when imported).--> +<!--2019/01/02 apb: 1.2 Typo. 1.2.1: Update dx-welcome.png (BIOS Welcome screen) to Mga7 and strip text for the options which have been removed from the Mga7 Welcome screen.--> +<!--2019/01/08 apb: 1.2.2: Update dx-welcome2.png (UEFI Welcome screen) to Mga7 and add text for F2 Languages option.--> +<!--2019/07/17 apb: Force dx-welcome.png and dx-welcome2.png to be 800px wide.--> +<title xml:id="installer-ti1">DrakX, the Mageia Installer</title> + </info> + + <para>Whether you are new to GNU-Linux or an experienced user, the Mageia +Installer is designed to help make your installation or upgrade as easy as +possible.</para> + + <section> + <title>The installation steps</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The install process is divided into a number of steps - the status of which +is indicated in a panel to the left of the screen.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Each step has one or more screens, which may also have +<emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> sections with extra, less commonly required +options.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Most screens have <emphasis>Help</emphasis> buttons for further details +about the particular step.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <caution> + <para>If at some point during the install you decide to abort the installation, it +is possible to reboot, but please think twice before you do this. Once a +partition has been formatted or updates have started to be installed, your +computer is no longer in the same state and rebooting it could very well +leave you with an unusable system.</para> + + <para>If, in spite of this, you are very sure rebooting is what you want, go to a +text terminal by pressing the keys <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> +<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>F2</keycap> </keycombo> together. After that, +press <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>Alt</keycap> +<keycap>Delete</keycap> </keycombo> together to reboot.</para> + </caution> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Installation Welcome Screen</title> + + <para>The particular screen that you will first see when booting from the +Installation media will depend on whether your computer motherboard is of +the Legacy (BIOS) or UEFI type.</para> + + <para>The welcome menu screen has various options, however the default option will +start the installer, and is normally all that you will need.</para> + + <section> + <title>Legacy (BIOS) Systems</title> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-welcome.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <title>Menu</title> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Install Mageia</emphasis></para> + + <para>Install Mageia to a hard disk. This is the default option, and will +automatically start after a short while unless another option is selected.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Rescue System</emphasis></para> + + <para>This option allows you to either re-install the bootloader for an existing +Mageia installation or you can use it to restore a Windows bootloader.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Memory Test</emphasis></para> + + <para>Test the installed RAM by performing multiple read and write +operations. Reboot to end the test.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">F2: Language</emphasis></para> + + <para>Press F2 for alternative languages.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>UEFI Systems</title> + + <para>From this screen, you can access options by pressing <keycap>e</keycap> to +enter the edit mode. To come back to this screen, press <keycap>Esc</keycap> +to quit without saving or press <keycap>F10</keycap> to save and quit.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx-welcome2.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <title>Menu</title> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Install:</emphasis> Start the Install process</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Rescue:</emphasis> This option allows you to either +re-install the bootloader for an existing Mageia installation or you can use +it to restore a Windows bootloader.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">F2: Language:</emphasis> Press <keycap>F2</keycap> for +alternative languages.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>If you booted from a USB stick, you will see the above options duplicated, +and in this case, you should use the set that will be suffixed with "USB".</para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Installation Problems and Possible Solutions</title> + + <section> + <title>No Graphical Interface</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>After the initial screen you did not progress to the <emphasis>Language +Selection</emphasis> screen. This can happen with some graphic cards and +older systems. Try using low resolution by typing <command>vgalo</command> +at the prompt.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If the hardware is very old, a graphical installation may not be +possible. In this case it is worth trying a text-mode installation. To use +this press <keycap>Esc</keycap> at the <emphasis>Welcome</emphasis> screen +and confirm with <keycap>ENTER</keycap>. You will be presented with a black +screen with a <prompt>boot:</prompt> prompt. Type <command>text</command> +and press <keycap>ENTER</keycap> to continue with the installation in text +mode.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The Install Freezes</title> + + <para>If the system appeared to freeze during the installation, this may be a +problem with hardware detection. In this case the automatic hardware +detection may be bypassed and dealt with later. To try this, type +<command>noauto</command> at the prompt. This option may also be combined +with other parameters as necessary.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>RAM problem</title> + + <para>This will rarely be needed, but in some cases the hardware may report the +available RAM incorrectly. To specify this manually, you can use the +<literal>mem=<replaceable>xxx</replaceable>M</literal> parameter, where +<replaceable>xxx</replaceable> is the correct amount of +RAM. e.g. <literal>mem=256M</literal> would specify 256MB of RAM.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Dynamic partitions</title> + + <para>If you converted your hard disk from <literal>Basic</literal> format to +<literal>Dynamic</literal> format in Microsoft Windows, then it is not +possible to install Mageia on this disc. To revert to a +<literal>Basic</literal> disk, see the Microsoft documentation: <link +ns2:href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx">http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc776315.aspx</link>.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/locale.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/locale.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2ef5053d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/locale.xml @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="locale" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <title>Locale</title> + + <xi:include href="configureTimezoneUTC.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="selectCountry.xml"/> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/login.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/login.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7a0e5c62 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/login.xml @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="login" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + + <info> + <!--2018/03/03 apb: a) Slight adjustment to text and change image caption from KDM to SDDM also change KDE to KDE Plasma. b) update SC to Mga6.--> +<title xml:id="label-to-adapt-ti1">Login Screen</title> + </info> + <mediaobject condition="live"> + <imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="login-im1" +fileref="live-login.png" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject> + <caption> + <para>SDDM login screen</para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + <para>Finally, you will come to the desktop login screen.</para> + <para>Enter your user name and user password, and in a few seconds you will find +yourself with a loaded KDE Plasma or GNOME desktop, depending on which live +medium you used. You can now start using and enjoying your Mageia +installation.</para> + <para>You can find further documentation in <link +xmlns:ns0="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" ns0:href="../../installer/">the +Mageia wiki</link>.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/media_selection.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/media_selection.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ae22cd0c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/media_selection.xml @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="media_selection" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="media_selection-ti1">Available Media</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- papoteur 2013-04-11 - created --> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 added screenshot + made title longer (because it was the same as for add_supplemental_media)--> +<!-- marja 2013-04-16 s/in/during/ as suggested by Tristan Campbell --> +<!--marja 2013-04-17 s/xml:id="media-selection"/xml:id="media_selection"/ (html filename was wrong)--> +<!--2019.01.05 apb: Changed Ati to AMD in Nonfree para.--> +<!--2019.01.16 apb: Changed title to Available Media.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-media_selection.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="media_selection-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you have the list of available repositories. Not all repositories are +available, according to which media you use for installing. The repositories +selection determines which packages will be available for selection during +the next steps.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The <emphasis>Core</emphasis> repository cannot be disabled as it contains +the base of the distribution.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> repository includes packages that are +free-of-charge, i.e. Mageia may redistribute them, but they contain +closed-source software (hence the name - Nonfree). For example this +repository includes nVidia and AMD graphics card proprietary drivers, +firmware for various WiFi cards, etc.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The <emphasis>Tainted</emphasis> repository includes packages released under +a free license. The main criteria for placing packages in this repository is +that they may infringe patents and copyright laws in some countries, +e.g. multimedia codecs needed to play various audio/video files; packages +needed to play commercial video DVD's, etc.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/minimal-install.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/minimal-install.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..56ae0f64 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/minimal-install.xml @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="minimal-install" xreflabel="Minimal Install" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <!--2012-12-26 marja - exported this section from choosePackages.xml to + start a new page--> +<!--2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot and s/next/related/ --> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/22 apb: Moved 'Minimal Instalation ...' para to top and rework the following paras.--> +<!--2018/02/22 apb: Added xreflabel to this section.--> +<info> + <title xml:id="minimal-install-ti1">Minimal Install</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + <para>Minimal Installation is intended for those with specific uses in mind for +Mageia, such as a server or a specialised workstation. You will probably use +this option combined with the <emphasis>Individual package +selection</emphasis> option to fine-tune your installation. See <xref +linkend="choosePackagesTree"/>.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>You can choose a <emphasis>Minimal Installation</emphasis> by de-selecting +everything in the <emphasis>Package Group Selection</emphasis> screen, see +<xref linkend="choosePackageGroups"/>.</para> + + <para>If desired, you can additionally tick the <emphasis>Individual package +selection</emphasis> option in the same screen.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If you choose this installation method, then the relevant screen (see +screenshot below) will offer you a few useful extras to install, such as +documentation and <quote>X</quote>.</para> + + <para>If the <emphasis>With X</emphasis> option is selected, then IceWM (a +lightweight desktop environment) will also be included.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The basic documentation is provided in the form of <quote>man</quote> and +<quote>info</quote> pages. It contains the man pages from the <link +xlink:href="http://www.tldp.org/manpages/man.html">Linux Documentation +Project</link> and the <link +xlink:href="http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/">GNU +coreutils</link> info pages.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="minimal-install-im1" +align="center" fileref="dx2-minimal-install.png" revision="1"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/misc-params.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/misc-params.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..24febe44 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/misc-params.xml @@ -0,0 +1,223 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="misc-params"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-ti1">Configuration Summary</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6. 20170209 updated SC--> +<!--2018/02/09 apb: Changed title to Configuration Summary (as agreed). Also, text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/22 apb: Changed list styles.--> +<!--2018/02/23 apb: Updated dx2-summaryBottom.png--> +<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed list style--> +<!--2018/02/24 apb: Centre-align dx2-summaryTop.png--> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="dx2-summaryTop.png" align="center"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-pa1" revision="1">DrakX presents a proposal for the configuration of your system depending on +the choices you made and on the hardware detected. You can check the +settings here and change them if you want by pressing +<emphasis>Configure</emphasis>.</para> + + <note> + <para>As a general rule, it is recommended that you accept the default settings +unless:<itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>there are known issues with a default setting</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the default setting has already been tried and it fails</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>some other factor mentioned in the detailed sections below is an issue</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </note> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-system"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-system-ti2">System parameters</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Timezone</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa2a" revision="1">DrakX selects a timezone for you, depending on your preferred language. You +can change it if needed. See also <xref linkend="configureTimezoneUTC"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3"><emphasis role="bold">Country / Region</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa3a" revision="1">If the selected country is wrong, it is very important that you correct the +setting. See <xref linkend="selectCountry"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4"><emphasis role="bold">Bootloader</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4a" revision="2">DrakX proposal for the bootloader setting</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4b" revision="2">Do not change anything, unless you know how to configure GRUB2. For more +information, see <xref linkend="setupBootloader"/></para> + + + <!-- revision="2" xml:id="misc-params-system-pa4c"--> +</listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">User management</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa5a" revision="2">You can add extra users here. They will each be allocated their own +<filename>/home</filename> directories.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Services</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6a" revision="1">System services refer to those small programs which run in the background +(daemons). This tool allows you to enable or disable certain processes.</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-system-pa6b" revision="1">You should check carefully before changing anything here - a mistake may +prevent your computer from operating correctly. For more information, see +<xref linkend="configureServices"/></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-hardware"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-hardware-ti3">Hardware parameters</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Keyboard</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa1a" revision="1">Configure your keyboard layout according to your location, language and type +of keyboard.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you notice a wrong keyboard layout and want to change it, keep in mind +that your passwords are going to change too.</para> + </note> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Mouse</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa2a" revision="1">Here you can add or configure other pointing devices, tablets, trackballs +etc.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Sound card</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa3a" revision="1">The installer will use the default driver if one is available.</para> + + <para>If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may be other +possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is the case, +but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate choice, you +can click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to manually specify a driver.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Graphical interface</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4a" revision="1">This section allows you to configure your graphics card(s) and displays. For +more information, see <xref linkend="configureX_chooser"/></para> + + + <!--revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-hardware-pa4b"--> +</listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="summaryBottom-im1" +align="center" fileref="dx2-summaryBottom.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </section> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-network"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-network-ti4">Network and Internet parameters</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa1" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Network</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa2" revision="1">You can configure your network here, but for network cards with non-free +drivers it is better to do that after reboot, using the Mageia Control +Center, if you have not yet enabled the <emphasis>Nonfree</emphasis> media +repositories.</para> + + <warning> + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa3" revision="1">When you add a network card, do not forget to set your firewall to monitor +that interface as well.</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Proxies</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4a" revision="1">A Proxy Server acts as an intermediary between your computer and the wider +Internet. This section allows you to configure your computer to utilize a +proxy service.</para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-network-pa4b" revision="1">You may need to consult your systems administrator to obtain the parameters +you need to enter here.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="misc-params-security"> + <info> + <title xml:id="misc-params-security-ti5">Seguranza</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1"><emphasis role="bold">Security Level</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa1a" revision="1">The Security level for your computer, in most cases the default setting +(Standard) is adequate for general use. Select the option which best suits +your usage.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2" revision="1"><emphasis role="bold">Firewall</emphasis></para> + + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2b" revision="1">The firewall allows you to manage which network connections are allowed on +your computer. The safe and secure default is to allow ZERO inbound +connections. This does not stop you connecting outbound and using your +computer normally.</para> + + <para revision="1">Please be aware that the Internet is a high risk network where there are +continuous attempts to probe and attack systems. Even seemingly +<quote>safe</quote> connections such as ICMP (for ping) have been used as +covert data channels for exfiltrating data by malicious persons.</para> + + <para revision="1">For more information, see <xref linkend="firewall"/>.</para> + + <warning> + <para xml:id="misc-params-security-pa2c" revision="1">Bear in mind that allowing <emphasis>everything</emphasis> (no firewall) may +be very risky.</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/reboot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/reboot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b2ed272e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/reboot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="reboot"> + <!--Lebarhon 20170210 updated for Mageia6--> +<!--2018/03/03 apb: Slight text adjustment and update PNG's to Mga6.--> +<info> + <title xml:id="reboot-ti1">Reboot</title> + </info> + + + <para>Once the bootloader has been installed, you will be prompted to halt your +computer, remove the live DVD/USB stick and restart the computer.</para> + <important> + <simpara>Ensure that you follow these shut-down and restart instruction steps in the +<emphasis role="bold">same</emphasis> order.</simpara> + </important> + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-reboot2.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + <simpara>When you are ready, press <emphasis>Finish</emphasis>.</simpara> + <simpara>When you restart, you will see a succession of download progress bars. These +indicate that the software media lists are being downloaded (see +<emphasis>Software Management</emphasis>).</simpara> + <mediaobject condition="live"> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="reboot-im1" +fileref="live-reboot.png" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/resizeFATChoose.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/resizeFATChoose.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..007c7bae --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/resizeFATChoose.xml @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="resizeFATChoose"> + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 31 --> +<!--2013-12-01 re-adding this file to software/i18n/tools/docs/installer/en + in git, in case the related screen gets restored in drakx-installer-stage2--> +<title xml:id="resizeFATChoose-ti1">Resize <application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> +partition</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa1">You have more than one +<application>Windows<superscript>®</superscript></application> partition. +Choose which one should be made smaller to make space for installing +<application>Mageia</application>.</para> + + + +<!--<para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa2"> +.......</para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="resizeFATChoose-pa3">........</para>--> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/securityLevel.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/securityLevel.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9282f57f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/securityLevel.xml @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="securityLevel" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="securityLevel-ti1">Security Level</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- 2012-12-25 marja - moved this part out of misc-params.xml" --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja - added screenshot --> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Minor wording.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-securityLevel.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Please choose the desired security level</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa1"><emphasis>Standard</emphasis> is the default, and recommended setting for +the average user.</para> + + <para revision="1"><emphasis>Secure</emphasis> will create a highly protected system - for +instance if the system is to be used as a public server.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Security Administrator</emphasis></para> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="securityLevel-pa2">This item allows you to configure an email address to which the system will +send <emphasis>security alert messages</emphasis> when it detects situations +which require notification to a system administrator.</para> + + <para>A good, and easy-to-implement, choice is to enter <user>@localhost - +where <user> is the login name of the user to receive these messages.</para> + + <note> + <para>The system sends such messages as <emphasis role="bold">Unix Mailspool +messages</emphasis>, not as "ordinary" SMTP mail: this user must therefore +be configured for receiving such mail!</para> + </note> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="securityLevel-pa3">It will always be possible to adjust your security settings post-install in +the <emphasis>Security</emphasis> section of the Mageia Control Center.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectCountry.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectCountry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9302e7a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectCountry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://docbook.org/ns/transclusion" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="selectCountry" xreflabel="Select Country" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="selectCountry-ti1">Select your Country / Region</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6--> +<!--2018/02/13 apb: Minor wording + typography.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: a) add xreflabel to this section. b) make some text bulleted.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="selectCountry-im1" +align="center" fileref="dx2-selectCountry.png" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectCountry-pa1">Select your country or region. This is important for all kinds of settings, +like the currency and wireless regulatory domain. Setting the wrong country +can lead to being unable to use a Wireless network.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa2">If your country isn't in the list, click the <emphasis>Other +Countries</emphasis> option and choose your country / region there.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <note> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectCountry-pa3">If your country is only in the <emphasis>Other Countries</emphasis> list, +after clicking <emphasis>OK</emphasis> it may seem that a country from the +main list was chosen. Despite this, DrakX will actually apply your choice.</para> + </note> + + <section xml:id="inputMethod"> + <info> + <title xml:id="inputMethod-ti7">Input method</title> + </info> + + <para xml:id="selectCountry-pa4" revision="1">In the <emphasis>Other Countries</emphasis> screen you can also select an +input method (at the bottom of the list). Input methods allow users to input +multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, Korean, etc). IBus is the +default input method, so users should not need to configure it +manually. Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc) also provide similar +functions and can be installed if you added HTTP/FTP media before package +selection.</para> + + <note> + <para xml:id="selectCountry-pa5" revision="1">If you missed the input method setup during installation, you can access it +post-install via <menuchoice> <guimenu>Configure your Computer</guimenu> +<guimenuitem>System</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>, or by running +<command>localedrake</command> as <emphasis>root</emphasis>.</para> + </note> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectInstallClass.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectInstallClass.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..20f1704e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectInstallClass.xml @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="selectInstallClass" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 03 18 --> +<!-- 20120405 updated JohnR --> +<!-- enhanced xml code for screenshot, removed para xml:id's, changed "you'll" to + "you will" and "don't" to "do not" and a passive to an active tense, marja, 20120409--> +<!-- barjac 2012-04-10 In the spirit of KISS reverted to my initial basic version --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja, corrected typo in screenshot name, removed --> +<!--2018/02/12 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/20 apb: a) Changed list style - was bulleted. b) Removed warning about aborting the installation, as this is now at the intro of section 2 (DrakX, the Mageia Installer).--> +<!--2018/02/24 apb: a) Changed list style.--> +<!--2019/01/03 apb: a) Install: reword text about retaining an existing /home partition.--> +<title xml:id="selectInstallClass-ti1">Install or Upgrade</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-selectInstallClass.png" +format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist spacing="compact"> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Install</emphasis></para> + + <para>Use this option to perform a fresh installation of Mageia. This will format +the <literal>root</literal> partition (<filename>/</filename>), but can +preserve a pre-existing <filename>/home</filename> partition (a dedicated +/home partition, rather than being incorporated within the root (/) +partition itself).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Upgrade</emphasis></para> + + <para>Use this option to upgrade an existing installation of Mageia.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <important> + <para>Only upgrading from a previous Mageia version that was <emphasis>still +supported</emphasis> when this Installer's version was released, has been +thoroughly tested. If you want to upgrade a Mageia version that has reached +its <quote>End Of Life</quote> then it is better to do a +<quote>clean</quote> install instead, while preserving your +<filename>/home</filename> partition.</para> + </important> + + <tip> + <para>If you have discovered that you forgot to select an additional language, you +can return from the <emphasis>Install or Upgrade</emphasis> screen to the +language choice screen by pressing <keycombo> <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> +<keycap>Alt</keycap> <keycap>Home</keycap> </keycombo>. Do<emphasis +role="bold"> NOT</emphasis> do this later in the install.</para> + </tip> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectKeyboard.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectKeyboard.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..223735a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectKeyboard.xml @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="selectKeyboard" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Started by marja on 2012 03 31 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/19 apb: Updated dx2-selectKeyboard.png to Mga6.--> +<!--2019/01/03 apb: Minor edit to Note (insert colon).--> +<title xml:id="selectKeyboard-ti1">Tecláu</title> + </info> + + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa1">DrakX selects an appropriate keyboard for your language. If no suitable +keyboard is found it will default to a US keyboard layout.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-selectKeyboard.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa2">Make sure that the selection is correct or choose another keyboard +layout. If you don't know which layout your keyboard has, look in the +specifications that came with your system, or ask the computer vendor. There +may even be a label on the keyboard that identifies the layout. You can also +look here: <link +xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout">en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Keyboard_layout</link></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa3">If your keyboard isn't in the list shown, click on <emphasis>More</emphasis> +to get a fuller list, and select your keyboard there.</para> + + <para revision="1"><note> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa5">After choosing a keyboard from the <emphasis>More</emphasis> dialogue, +you'll return to the first keyboard choice dialogue and it will seem as +though a keyboard from that screen was chosen. You can safely ignore this +and continue the installation: the keyboard chosen from the full list will +be applied.</para> + </note></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboard-pa4">If you choose a keyboard based on non-Latin characters, you will see an +extra dialogue screen asking how you would prefer to switch between the +Latin and non-Latin keyboard layouts</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectKeyboardLive.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectKeyboardLive.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..426a7be0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectKeyboardLive.xml @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="selectKeyboardLive" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + <info> + <!--2018/03/01 apb: Slight adjustment to text--> +<!--2018/03/20 apb: Adjustment to text--> +<title xml:id="selectKeyboardLive-ti1">Select Keyboard</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-selectKeyboard.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="selectKeyboardLive-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>Here you can set the keyboard layout you wish to use with Mageia.</para> + + <para>A suggested keyboard layout (highlighted), has been chosen for you based +upon your previously selected language and timezone choices.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectLanguage.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectLanguage.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9b817052 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectLanguage.xml @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="selectLanguage" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 01, using barjac's text --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- SimonNZG 2012-04-03 has had a look --> +<!-- removed para id's, corrected duplicate id's for segments, corrected wrong + code in figure, marja, 20120409 --> +<!-- barjac 2012-04-11 - removed image figure tag - and once again had to clean + up mess made of this header by xxe --> +<!--2018/09/02 apb: Text and typography. Classical/Live Conditions not respected in HTML or PDF output.--> +<!--2018/02/17 apb: Changed 'preferred language' Warning tag to Important--> +<!--2018/02/19 apb: Updated dx2-selectLanguage.png to Mga6.--> +<!--2018/02/20 apb: Slight reword of 'Choosing more than one language'--> +<!--2018/02/27 apb: Changed first 3 paras to Itemizedlist--> +<!--2018/03/11 apb: Test to see if placing condition within listitem - rather than within para - will fix seeing both conditions together in output.--> +<title xml:id="selectLanguage-ti1">Please choose a language to use</title> + </info> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem condition="classical"> + <para>Select your preferred language, by first expanding the list for your +continent. Mageia will use this selection during the installation and for +your installed system.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem condition="live"> + <para>Select your preferred language. Mageia will use this selection during the +installation and for your installed system.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem condition="classical"> + <para>If it is likely that you (or others) will require several languages to be +installed on your system, then you should use the <emphasis>Multiple +languages</emphasis> option to add them now. It will be difficult to add +extra language support after installation.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-selectLanguage.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="live-language.png" +format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <important condition="classical"> + <para>Even if you choose more than one language, you must first choose one as your +preferred language from the main list of languages. It will also be marked +as chosen in the <emphasis>Multiple languages</emphasis> screen.</para> + </important> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem condition="classical"> + <para>If your keyboard language is not the same as your preferred language, then +it is advisable to install the required language for your keyboard as well</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Mageia uses UTF-8 (Unicode) support by default. This may be disabled in the +<emphasis>Multiple languages</emphasis> screen if you know that it is +inappropriate for your language. Disabling UTF-8 applies to all installed +languages.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>You can change the language for your system post-installation in the +<menuchoice> <guimenu>Mageia Control Center</guimenu> +<guimenuitem>System</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>localization for your +system</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectMouse.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectMouse.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..54877413 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/selectMouse.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="selectMouse" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="selectMouse-ti1">Select mouse</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 11 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- adding some "real" text now that we know the page shows up in the right place--> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 adding screenshot --> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-selectMouse.png" +format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa1">If you are not happy with how your mouse responds, you can select a +different one here.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa2">Usually, <menuchoice> <guimenu>Universal</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Any PS/2 and +USB mice</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> is a good choice.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="selectMouse-pa3">Select <menuchoice> <guimenu>Universal</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Force +evdev</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> to configure the buttons that do not work +on a mouse with six or more buttons.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupBootloader.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupBootloader.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7307e843 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupBootloader.xml @@ -0,0 +1,351 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xreflabel="Bootloader" xml:id="setupBootloader" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page +Lebarhon 2016 12 16 updated for Mageia 6. 20170209 updated SC--> +<!--2018/02/06 apb: Modified the layout for a (hopefully) easier flow. Also commented-out setupBootloaderAddEntry (was section 24) and incorporated it here, at the end of this file.--> +<!--2018/02/22 apb: Changed list styles.--> +<!--2018/02/22 apb: Changed 'Advanced' list style.--> +<!--2018/02/24 apb: Changed main list style.--> +<!--2018/02/25 apb: Added xreflabel to this section.--> +<!--2019/01/06 apb: Typo.--> +<!--2019/01/06 apb: Use 'xi:include' for setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml, as that is how it is called by the inline-help drakx/perl routine.--> +<!--2019/07/18 apb: Rewrite 1.1, to accomodate inclusion of rEFInd option, and modify 1.2.1, 1.2.2 accordingly.--> +<!--2019/08/01 apb: 1.1.1 reworded to: GRUB2-efi or rEFInd may be used as the bootloader for a UEFI system. Added warning text for 1.2.2 Do not Touch MBR/ESP part.--> +<title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti1">Bootloader</title> + </info> + + <section> + <title>Available Bootloaders</title> + + <section> + <title>Grub2</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Grub2 on Legacy MBR/GPT systems</emphasis></para> + + <listitem> + <para>GRUB2 (with or without graphical menu) will be used exclusively as the +bootloader for a Legacy/MBR or Legacy/GPT system.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>By default, a new bootloader will be written into either the MBR (Master +Boot Record) of your first hard drive or in the BIOS boot partition.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Grub2-efi on UEFI systems</emphasis></para> + + <listitem> + <para>GRUB2-efi or rEFInd may be used as the bootloader for a UEFI system.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>By default, a new bootloader (Grub2-efi) will be written into the ESP (EFI +System Partition).</para> + + <para>If there are already UEFI-based operating systems installed on your computer +(Windows 8 for example), the Mageia installer will detect the existing ESP +created by Windows and add grub2-efi to it. If no ESP exists, then one will +be created. Although it is possible to have several ESPs, only one is +required, whatever the number of operating systems you have.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>rEFInd</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <para><emphasis role="bold">rEFInd on UEFI systems</emphasis></para> + + <listitem> + <para>rEFInd has a nice graphical set of options, and can auto-detect installed +EFI bootloaders. See: http://www.rodsbooks.com/refind/</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <note> + <para>Please note that in order to be able to use the <literal>rEFInd</literal> +option, an installed EFI System Partition must match your system +architecture: if you have a 32bit EFI System Partition installed on a 64bit +machine for instance, then the rEFInd option will not be displayed/available +to you.</para> + </note> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="setupBootloader-ti2">Bootloader Setup</title> + </info> + + <section> + <title>Bootloader main options</title> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-setupBootloader.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata fileref="live-setupBootloader.png" +xml:id="setupBootloader-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Bootloader to use</emphasis></para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guimenuitem>GRUB2</guimenuitem> (with either a graphical or a text menu), +can be chosen for both <literal>Legacy MBR/BIOS</literal> systems and +<literal>UEFI</literal> systems.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guimenuitem>rEFInd</guimenuitem> (with a graphical menu) is an alternative +option solely for use with <literal>UEFI</literal> systems.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Boot device</emphasis></para> + + <warning> + <para>Don't change this unless you really know what you are doing.</para> + </warning> + + <note> + <para>There is no option to write GRUB to the boot sector of a partition (e.g: +<filename>sda1</filename>), as this method is considered unreliable.</para> + </note> + + <para>When using UEFI mode, then the <guilabel>Boot device</guilabel> will be +listed as <guimenuitem>EFI System Partition</guimenuitem>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Delay before booting the default image</emphasis></para> + + <para>This text box lets you set a delay, in seconds, before the default operating +system is started up.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Security</emphasis></para> + + <para>This allows you to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username +and password will be required when booting in order to select a booting +entry or change settings. This is optional, and most people are not likely +to have a need for it. The username is <literal>root</literal> and the +password is the one chosen hereafter.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Password</emphasis></para> + + <para>Choose a password for the bootloader (optional)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Password (again)</emphasis></para> + + <para>Retype the password and DrakX will check that it matches with the one set +above</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para><emphasis>Advanced</emphasis></para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Enable ACPI</emphasis></para> + + <para>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for power +management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices. Deselecting it +could be useful if, for example, your computer does not support ACPI or if +you think the ACPI implementation might cause some problems (for instance +random reboots or system lockups).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Enable SMP</emphasis></para> + + <para>This option enables/disables symmetric multiprocessing for multi-core +processors</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Enable APIC</emphasis></para> + + <para>Enabling this gives the operating system access to the Advanced Programmable +Interrupt Controller. APIC devices permit more complex priority models, and +Advanced IRQ (Interrupt Request) management.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Enable Local APIC</emphasis></para> + + <para>Here you can set Local APIC, which manages all external interrupts for a +specific processor in an SMP system</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Bootloader Configuration</title> + + <para>If, in the previous section you selected <literal>rEFInd</literal> as the +bootloader to use, you would then be presented with the options shown in the +screenshot directly below. Otherwise, please instead move on to the +subsequent screenshot for your options.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="rEFIndLoaderConfig.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-rEFIndLoaderConfig.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <para>Your rEFInd configuration options:</para> + + <listitem> + <para><guimenuitem>Install or update rEFInd in the EFI system +partition.</guimenuitem></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guimenuitem>Install in EFI/Boot partition (workaround for some +BIOS's).</guimenuitem></para> + + <para>With some BIOS's, the newly written bootloader for Mageia at end of the +installation will not be recognized. In that case, you can use this option +as a workaround for the issue.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>If you did not select rEFInd as the bootloader to use in the previous +section, then your bootloader configurations are shown below:</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-setupBootloader3.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-setupBootloader3.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Default</emphasis></para> + + <para>The operating system to be started up by default.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Append</emphasis></para> + + <para>This option lets you pass information to the kernel or tell the kernel to +give you more information as it boots.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Probe foreign OS</emphasis></para> + + <para>If you already have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to +add them to your new Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, +then untick the <guimenuitem>Probe Foreign OS</guimenuitem> option.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para><emphasis>Advanced</emphasis></para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-setupBootloader4.png"/> </imageobject> <imageobject +condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-setupBootloader4.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Video mode</emphasis></para> + + <para>This sets the screen size and colour depth to be used by the boot menu. If +you click the down-triangle you will be offered other size and colour depth +options.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Do not touch ESP or MBR</emphasis></para> + + <para>Select this option if you don't want a bootable Mageia, but would rather +chain-load it from another OS. You will get a warning that the bootloader is +missing. Click <guimenuitem>Ok </guimenuitem>only if you are sure you +understand the implications, and wish to proceed.</para> + + <warning> + <para>Chain-loading via legacy bootloaders (GRUB Legacy and LiLo) is no longer +supported by Mageia as it is likely to fail when attempting to boot this +resulting installation of Mageia. If you use anything other than GRUB2 or +rEFInd for this purpose, then you do so at your own risk!</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-setupBootloader5.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Other Options</title> + + <section> + <title>Using an existing bootloader</title> + + <para>The exact procedure for adding Mageia to an existing bootloader is beyond +the scope of this documentation. However in most cases it will involve +running the relevant bootloader installation program, which should detect +Mageia and automatically add an entry for it in the bootloader menu. See the +documentation for the relevant operating system.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Installing Without a Bootloader</title> + + <para>While you can opt to install Mageia without a bootloader (see section 2.1 +Advanced), this is not recommended unless you absolutely know what you are +doing, as without some form of bootloader your operating system will be +unable to start.</para> + </section> + + <xi:include href="setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml"/> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fd9150c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupBootloaderAddEntry.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry"> + + + <info> + <!--Lebarhon 2015 07 04 Project for Mageia 5. The UEFI and BIOS systems are so different I think it is better to split the page + +Lebarhon 2016 12 16 Updated for Mageia 6--> +<title xml:id="setupBootloaderAddEntry-ti1">Add or Modify a Boot Menu Entry</title> + </info> + + <para>To do this you need to manually edit /boot/grub2/custom.cfg or use the +software <emphasis role="bold">grub-customizer</emphasis> tool instead +(available in the Mageia repositories).</para> + + <note> + <para>For more information, see: <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia">https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Grub2-efi_and_Mageia</link></para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupSCSI.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupSCSI.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e3b6c19b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/setupSCSI.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="setupSCSI" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="setupSCSI-ti1">Setup SCSI</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 02 --> +<!-- NEEDS TO BE REVIEWED! --> +<!-- JohnR - edited 2012-03-03 --> +<!-- SimonNZG has reviewed 2012-04-03 (changed editted to edited in JohnR's comment ;-) --> +<!-- barjac has re-reviewed and made some minor tweaks. Revisions incremented. --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-24 added screenshot --> +<!-- marja 2012-04-25 replacing John's version 1.6 because that one was based on the + Mdv doc instead of on our setupSCSI file --> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/0217 apb: Merge 2nd/3rd paras and reword.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-setupSCSI.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="setupSCSI-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para revision="3.1" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa1">DrakX will normally detect hard disks correctly. However, with some older +SCSI controllers it may be unable to determine the correct drivers to use +and subsequently fail to recognise the drive.</para> + + <para revision="2" xml:id="setupSCSI-pa2">If your device is not recognised, you will need to manually tell DrakX which +SCSI drive(s) you have. DrakX should then be able to configure the drive(s) +correctly.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/software.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/software.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b39da584 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/software.xml @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:svg="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:m="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:html="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:db="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="software" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xreflabel="Software"> + + + <!--2018/02/27 apb: Created this XML to gather together the XML's which can make up a Software group.--> +<title>Software</title> + + <section> + <title>Media Selection</title> + + <xi:include href="add_supplemental_media.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="media_selection.xml"/> + </section> + + <xi:include href="chooseDesktop.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackageGroups.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="minimal-install.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="choosePackagesTree.xml"/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/soundConfig.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/soundConfig.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f75056e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/soundConfig.xml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="soundConfig" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="soundConfig-ti1">Sound Configuration</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Lebarhon 20170209 updated SC--> +<!--2018/02/13 apb: Text and typography.--> +<!--2018/02/17 apb: Centre-align PNG--> +<imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="dx2-soundConfig.png" +format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="soundConfig-im1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>This screen shows the details of the sound card driver chosen for you by the +installer, and this driver should work without problems.</para> + + <para>However, if you encounter any issues post-install, then run +<command>draksound</command> or start this tool via <menuchoice> +<guimenu>Mageia Control Center</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Hardware</guimenuitem> +<guimenuitem>Sound Configuration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. Then, in the +<literal>draksound</literal> or <emphasis>Sound Configuration</emphasis> +screen, click on <emphasis>Troubleshooting</emphasis> to find useful advice +about how to solve the problem.</para> + + <section xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced"> + <info> + <title xml:id="soundConfig-Advanced-ti1">Advanced</title> + </info> + + <para>If there is no actual default driver for your sound card, there may be other +possible alternative drivers available to choose from. If this is the case, +but you think the installer has not made the most appropriate choice, you +can click on <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> to manually specify a driver.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/takeOverHdConfirm.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/takeOverHdConfirm.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..df540a9f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/takeOverHdConfirm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns42="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-ti1">Confirm hard disk to be formatted</title> + </info> + + + + + + + + + + + + + + <mediaobject> +<!-- Made by marja on 2012 04 03 --> +<!-- test comment - johnr --> +<!-- 2012-04-24 marja - replaced "if you are not sure you selected the correct + hard disk." with "if you are not sure about your choice", because I'm sure I + saw this help screen when I had only one HD --> +<!-- 2013-05-05 marja added screenshot --> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography--> +<!--2018/02/20 apb: Change the 2 paras to itemized listitems.--> +<imageobject condition="classical"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="dx2-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> +<imageobject condition="live"> <imagedata align="center" +fileref="live-takeOverHdConfirm.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa1">Click on <emphasis>Previous</emphasis> if you are at all unsure about your +choice.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para revision="1" xml:id="takeOverHdConfirm-pa2">Click on <emphasis>Next</emphasis> to proceed if you are sure that it is OK +to erase <emphasis role="bold">every</emphasis> partition, <emphasis +role="bold">every</emphasis> operating system and <emphasis role="bold">all +data</emphasis> that might be on that hard disk.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/testing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/testing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ed36491a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/testing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="testing" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + <info> + <!--2019/01/06 apb: 1.1.1 Remove empty 'webcam:' description relating to MCC/Hardware (and it is not an item there anyway).--> +<title xml:id="testing-ti1">Testing Mageia as Live system</title> + </info> + + <section xml:id="testing-1"> + <info> + <title xml:id="testing1-ti1">Live mode</title> + </info> + + <para>This is the screen you will see if you selected the <emphasis +role="bold">Boot Mageia </emphasis>option from the Live media menu.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-liveMode.png"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="testing2-ti1">Testing hardware</title> + </info> + + <para>One of the aims of using the Live mode is to test that your hardware is +correctly managed by Mageia. You can check if all devices have a driver in +the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>network interface: configure it with net_applet</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>graphics card: if you see the previous screen, it's already OK.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>sound: a jingle has already been played</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>printer: configure your printer/s and print a test page</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>scanner: scan a document from ...</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>If everything is satisfactory, you can proceed with the installation. If +not, you can use the <emphasis>Quit</emphasis> button to exit.</para> + + <note> + <para>The configuration settings you apply here are carried over if you decide to +proceed with the installation.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section> + <info> + <title xml:id="testing3-ti1">Launch installation</title> + </info> + + <para>To launch the installation of the Live DVD to a hard disk or SSD drive, +simply click the <emphasis>Install on Hard Disk</emphasis> icon on the Live +desktop. You will then see this screen, followed by the <link +linkend="doPartitionDisks">Partitioning</link> step.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="live-liveMode-install.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/uninstall-Mageia.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/uninstall-Mageia.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2ec6161b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/uninstall-Mageia.xml @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="uninstall-Mageia" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <!--Lebarhon 2015-07-06 Not true with UEFI +Lebarhon 2016 12 16 this page should be deleted or rewritten.--> +<!--2018/02/15 apb: Text and typography.--> +<info> + <title xml:id="uninstall-Mageia-ti1">Uninstalling Mageia</title> + </info> + + + + + + <para>If Mageia didn't convince you or you can't install it correctly - in short +you want get rid of it - that is your right and Mageia also gives you the +possibility to uninstall. This is not true for every operating system.</para> + + <para>After backing up your data, reboot your Mageia installation DVD and select +<emphasis>Rescue system</emphasis>, then <emphasis>Restore Windows boot +loader</emphasis>. At the next boot, you will only have Windows, with no +option to choose your Mageia operating system.</para> + + <para>In Windows, to recover the space used by Mageia partitions: click on +<menuchoice> <guimenu>Start</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Control +Panel</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Administrative Tools</guimenuitem> +<guimenuitem>Computer Management</guimenuitem> +<guimenuitem>Storage</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Disk +Management</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. You will recognise a Mageia +partition because they are labeled <literal>Unknown</literal>, and also by +their size and place on the disk. Right-click on each of these partitions +and select <emphasis>Delete</emphasis> to free up the space.</para> + + <para>If you are using Windows XP, you can create a new partition and format it +(FAT32 or NTFS). It will then get a partition letter.</para> + + <para>If you have Vista or 7, you have one more possibility, you can extend the +existing partition that is at the left of the freed space. There are other +partitioning tools that can be used, such as <emphasis +role="bold">gparted</emphasis>, available for both Windows and Linux. As +always, when changing partitions, be very careful to back up anything +important to you.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/unused.xml b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/unused.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4802228c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/installer/ast/unused.xml @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="unused" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="unused-ti1">Keep or delete unused material</title> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject condition="live"> +<!--2018/03/03 apb: Adjusted text and updated SC's to Mga6.--> +<imageobject> <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="unused-im1" +fileref="live-unused.png" align="center" revision="1"/> </imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>In this step, the installer looks for unused locales packages and unused +hardware packages and you are then given an opportunity to delete them.</para> + + <para>If you do not foresee a case where your installation may need to run on +different hardware, or that you might need additional localization files +then you might wish to accept this proposal.</para> + + <para>Clicking <emphasis>Advanced</emphasis> will list the unused hardware and +localization files that will be removed if you proceed.</para> + + <mediaobject> +<imageobject> <imagedata fileref="../live-unused-InstallationProgress.png"/> +</imageobject></mediaobject> + + <para>The next step is the copying of files to hard disk. This process should just +take a little while to complete. When it is finishing you will briefly get a +blank screen - this is normal.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast.po b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast.po new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4fa6271a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast.po @@ -0,0 +1,9596 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE +# Copyright (C) YEAR Mageia +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Mageia Control Center Help package. +# +# Translators: +# enolp <enolp@softastur.org>, 2015,2018,2020 +# Ḷḷumex03, 2014 +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: doc-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-09-08 15:28+0300\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2020-04-02 02:10+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: enolp <enolp@softastur.org>\n" +"Language-Team: Asturian (http://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/mageia/" +"language/ast/)\n" +"Language: ast\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:11 +msgid "Access WebDAV shared drives and directories" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:14 +msgid "diskdrake --dav" +msgstr "diskdrake --dav" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:19 +msgid "diskdrake--dav1.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--dav1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure " +"WebDAV shares</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:30 en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:22 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:21 +#: en/drak3d.xml:15 en/drakconnect.xml:16 en/draknetcenter.xml:20 +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:18 en/draksambashare.xml:18 en/drakvpn.xml:16 +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:27 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:41 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:27 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:46 +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:17 en/system-config-printer.xml:21 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<link xlink:href=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV\">WebDAV</link> is a " +"protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it " +"appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a " +"WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV " +"server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:40 +msgid "Creating a new entry" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:42 +msgid "" +"The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if " +"any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new entry. " +"Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:46 +msgid "" +"Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions. Continue " +"with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking " +"<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the " +"<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct " +"it, if needed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:54 +msgid "diskdrake--dav3.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--dav3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:58 +msgid "" +"The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount " +"point." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:61 +msgid "" +"In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other " +"options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:67 +msgid "diskdrake--dav4.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--dav4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:71 +msgid "" +"The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the " +"access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--dav.xml:74 +msgid "" +"After you accepted the configuration with the radio button <guibutton>Done</" +"guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and your new mount point is " +"listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you are asked whether " +"or not to save the modifications in <emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose " +"this option if you want that the remote directory is available at each boot. " +"If your configuration is for one-time usage, do not save it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:12 +msgid "Share your hard disk partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:15 +msgid "diskdrake --fileshare" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:20 +msgid "diskdrake--fileshare.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--fileshare.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:26 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:25 +msgid "" +"This simple tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you, the " +"administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home " +"subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have " +"computers running either Linux or Windows operating system." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:33 +msgid "" +"It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled " +"\"Share your hard disk partitions\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:36 +msgid "" +"First, answer the question : \"<guilabel>Would you like to allow users to " +"share some of their directories ?</guilabel>\", click on <guibutton>No " +"sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on " +"<guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on " +"<guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for " +"the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their " +"directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically " +"created by the system. You will be asked about this later." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks you " +"choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. " +"Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on " +"the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both " +"Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any " +"required packages will be installed if necessary." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:52 +msgid "" +"The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen. In " +"this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows " +"you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare " +"group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group, " +"then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the " +"fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information " +"about Userdrake, see: <xref linkend=\"userdrake\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:61 +msgid "" +"When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and " +"reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--fileshare.xml:66 +msgid "" +"From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her " +"file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers " +"have this facility." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'xml:lang' of: <section> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:1 en/MCC-cover.xml:9 en/mcc-network.xml:1 en/MCC.xml:1 +#: en/software-management.xml:2 en/transfugdrake.xml:1 +msgid "en" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:3 +msgid "Access NFS shared drives and directories" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:6 +msgid "diskdrake --nfs" +msgstr "diskdrake --nfs" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:11 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--nfs.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:17 +msgid "." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:25 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare " +"some shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The " +"protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix " +"systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at boot. " +"Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session for a " +"user with tools such as file browsers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:36 en/diskdrake--smb.xml:38 +msgid "Procedure" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers " +"which share directories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the " +"shared directories and select the directory you want to access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:47 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs2.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--nfs2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:51 +msgid "" +"The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and you have " +"to specify where to mount the directory." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:56 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs3.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--nfs3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:60 +msgid "" +"After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and " +"change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button. After " +"mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:67 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs4.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--nfs4.png" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:73 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs5.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--nfs5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:77 +msgid "" +"On accepting the configuration with the <guibutton>Done</guibutton> button, " +"a message will displayed, asking \"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab " +"modifications\". This will make the directory available at each boot, if the " +"network is accessible. The new directory is then available in your file " +"browser, for example in Dolphin." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--nfs.xml:85 +msgid "diskdrake--nfs6.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--nfs6.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:3 +msgid "CD/DVD burner" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:5 +msgid "diskdrake --removable" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:10 +msgid "diskdrake--removable.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--removable.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>is found under the tab " +"Local disks in the Mageia Control Center labelled accordingly with your " +"removable hardware (CD/DVD players and burners and floppy drives only)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:20 +msgid "Its goal is to define the way your removable disk is mounted." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:22 +msgid "" +"At the top of the window there is a short description of your hardware and " +"the chosen options to mount it. Use the menu on the bottom to change them. " +"Check the item to be changed and then on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> " +"button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:28 +msgid "Mount point" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:30 +msgid "" +"Check this box to change the mount point. The default one is /media/cdrom." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><bridgehead> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:37 en/harddrake2.xml:66 +msgid "Options" +msgstr "Opciones" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:39 +msgid "" +"Many mount options can be chosen here either directly in the list or via the " +"<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> submenu. The main are:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:45 +msgid "user/nouser" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--removable.xml:47 +msgid "" +"user allows an ordinary user (not root) to mount the removable disk, this " +"option involves noexec, nosuid and nodev. The user who mounted the disk is " +"the only one who can umount it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:11 +msgid "Access Windows (SMB) shared drives and directories" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:14 +msgid "diskdrake --smb" +msgstr "diskdrake --smb" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:23 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to declare " +"which shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The " +"protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R) " +"systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared " +"directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with " +"tools such as file browsers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of " +"available servers, for example with <xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:40 +msgid "" +"Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers who " +"share directories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:43 +msgid "" +"Click on the server name and on > before the server name to display the " +"list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:47 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available, you " +"have to specify where to mount the directory." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:52 +msgid "diskdrake--smb2.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--smb2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:56 +msgid "" +"After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the <guimenu>Mount " +"button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some options with the " +"<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:60 +msgid "" +"In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to " +"connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it " +"with the same button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:66 +msgid "diskdrake--smb3.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--smb3.png" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:72 +msgid "diskdrake--smb4.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--smb4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:76 +msgid "" +"After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask " +"\"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications\". Saving, will allow " +"directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The " +"new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in dolphin." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/diskdrake--smb.xml:84 +msgid "diskdrake--smb5.png" +msgstr "diskdrake--smb5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:3 +msgid "3D Desktop Effects" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drak3d.xml:5 +msgid "drak3d" +msgstr "drak3d" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drak3d.xml:10 +msgid "drak3d.png" +msgstr "drak3d.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:18 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drak3d</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:17 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> lets you manage the 3D " +"desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by " +"default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:25 +msgid "Getting Started" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:27 +msgid "" +"To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the " +"package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can " +"start." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:31 +msgid "" +"After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window. Here you " +"can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or " +"<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a composite/" +"window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special effects for your " +"desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn it on." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:38 +msgid "" +"If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of " +"Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be " +"installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the <guibutton>Ok</" +"guibutton> button to continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drak3d.xml:45 +msgid "drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png" +msgstr "drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz " +"Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in " +"for the changes to take effect." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:53 +msgid "" +"After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz " +"Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager) tool." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:59 +msgid "Troubleshooting" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drak3d.xml:62 +msgid "Can't See Desktop after Logging in" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:64 +msgid "" +"If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop " +"but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in " +"screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drak3d.xml:71 +msgid "drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png" +msgstr "drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drak3d.xml:75 +msgid "" +"When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be " +"prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login " +"with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the " +"log in problem." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakauth.xml:9 +msgid "Authentication" +msgstr "Autenticación" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakauth.xml:11 +msgid "drakauth" +msgstr "drakauth" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakauth.xml:16 +msgid "drakauth.png" +msgstr "drakauth.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakauth</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> enables you to modify the " +"manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakauth.xml:25 +msgid "" +"By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your " +"computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so " +"and give information about that." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:3 +msgid "Set up autologin to automatically log in" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:6 +msgid "drakautologin" +msgstr "drakautologin" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:11 +msgid "drakautologin.png" +msgstr "drakautologin.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakautologin</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to " +"automatically login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without " +"asking for any password. It's called autologin. This is generally a good " +"idea when there is only one user like to be using the machine." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:22 +msgid "" +"It is found under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Boot</emphasis> tab in the " +"Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up autologin to automatically log in\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:26 +msgid "The interface buttons are pretty obvious:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:28 +msgid "" +"Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system starts</" +"guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the boot. If " +"not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be possible " +"to launch the graphic interface manually. This can be done by launching the " +"command 'startx' or 'systemctl start dm'." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakautologin.xml:34 +msgid "" +"If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either " +"<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to " +"continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check " +"<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if " +"needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default " +"username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakboot.xml:3 +msgid "Set up boot system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakboot.xml:5 +msgid "drakboot" +msgstr "drakboot" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:10 +msgid "drakboot--boot.png" +msgstr "drakboot--boot.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:14 +msgid "" +"If you are using a UEFI system instead of BIOS, the user interface is " +"slightly different as the boot device is obviously the EFI system Partition " +"(ESP)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:20 +msgid "drakboot--boot2.png" +msgstr "drakboot--boot2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:25 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakboot</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure " +"the boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default " +"boot, etc.)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:29 +msgid "" +"It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled \"Set up " +"boot system\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing. Changing " +"some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:38 +msgid "" +"In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible if " +"using BIOS, to choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub, " +"Grub2 or Lilo, and with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question " +"of taste, there are no other consequences. You can also set the " +"<guibutton>Boot device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you " +"are an expert. The boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any " +"modification can prevent your machine from booting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:46 +msgid "" +"In a UEFI system, the bootloader is <guilabel>Grub2-efi</guilabel> and is " +"installed in /boot/EFI partition. This FAT32 formatted partition is common " +"to all operating systems installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:50 +msgid "" +"In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set " +"the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in seconds. " +"During this delay, Grub or Lilo will display the list of available operating " +"systems, prompting you to make your choice. If no selection is made, the " +"bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:57 +msgid "" +"In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is " +"possible to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username and " +"password will be asked at the boot time to select a booting entry or change " +"settings. The username is \"root\" and the password is the one chosen here." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:63 +msgid "The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:66 +msgid "<guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:68 +msgid "" +"ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the " +"power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was " +"the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI " +"compatible." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:73 +msgid "<guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:75 +msgid "" +"SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for " +"multicore processors." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:79 +msgid "" +"If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual " +"processor and enable SMP." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:83 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local APIC:</" +"guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:86 +msgid "" +"APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two " +"components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O " +"APIC. The latter one routes the interrupts it receives from peripheral buses " +"to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful " +"for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC " +"system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message " +"\"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7\"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local " +"APIC." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:97 +msgid "drakboot1.png" +msgstr "drakboot1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:101 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen differs depending on which boot " +"loader you chose." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:106 +msgid "You have Grub Legacy or Lilo:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:108 +msgid "" +"In this case, you can see the list of all the available entries at boot " +"time. The default one is asterisked. To change the order of the menu " +"entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the selected item. If you " +"click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> " +"buttons, a new window appears to add a new entry in the bootloader menu or " +"to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar with Lilo or Grub to be " +"able to use these tools." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:118 +msgid "drakboot2.png" +msgstr "drakboot2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:122 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want " +"to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command \"title\". For " +"example: Mageia3." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:126 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches " +"the Grub command \"kernel\". For example /boot/vmlinuz." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:129 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the " +"kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command \"root\". For example (hd0,1)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:133 en/drakboot.xml:160 +msgid "" +"The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to " +"the kernel at boot time." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:136 +msgid "" +"If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this " +"entry by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:139 +msgid "" +"In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to " +"choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel> " +"file and a <guilabel>network profile</guilabel>, see <xref linkend=" +"\"draknetprofile\"/>, in the drop-down lists." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:147 +msgid "" +"You have Grub2 or Grub2-efi (boot loaders used by default respectively in " +"Legacy mode and UEFI mode):" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:150 +msgid "" +"In this case, the drop-down list labelled <guilabel>Default</guilabel> " +"displays all the available entries; click on the one wanted as the default " +"one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:156 +msgid "drakboot3.png" +msgstr "drakboot3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:163 +msgid "" +"If you have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them " +"to your Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, uncheck the box " +"<guilabel>Probe Foreign OS</guilabel>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:167 +msgid "" +"In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to " +"choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>. If you don't want a bootable " +"Mageia, but to chain load it from another OS, check the box <guilabel>Do not " +"touch ESP or MBR</guilabel> and accept the warning." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:175 +msgid "drakboot6.png" +msgstr "drakboot6.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:180 +msgid "" +"Not installing on ESP or MBR means that the installation is not bootable " +"unless chain loaded from another OS." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakboot.xml:184 +msgid "" +"To set many other parameters, you can use the tool named <emphasis>Grub " +"Customizer</emphasis>, available in the Mageia repositories (see below)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakboot.xml:190 +msgid "drakboot4.png" +msgstr "drakboot4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:11 +msgid "Collect Logs and System Information for Bug Reports" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:12 +msgid "drakbug_report" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakbug_report</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and " +"used on the command line." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:20 +msgid "" +"It is advised to write the output of this command to a file, for instance by " +"doing <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakbug_report > drakbugreport.txt</emphasis>, " +"but make sure you have enough disk space first: the file can easily be " +"several GBs large." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:24 +msgid "" +"The output is far too large to attach to a bug report without first removing " +"the unneeded parts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:26 +msgid "This command collects the following information on your system:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:29 +msgid "lspci" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:30 +msgid "pci_devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:31 +msgid "dmidecode" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:32 +msgid "fdisk" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:33 +msgid "scsi" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:34 +msgid "/sys/bus/scsi/devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:35 +msgid "lsmod" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:36 +msgid "cmdline" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:37 +msgid "pcmcia: stab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:38 +msgid "usb" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:39 +msgid "partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:40 +msgid "cpuinfo" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:41 +msgid "syslog" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:42 +msgid "Xorg.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:43 +msgid "monitor_full_edid" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:44 +msgid "stage1.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:45 +msgid "ddebug.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:46 +msgid "install.log" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:47 +msgid "fstab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:48 +msgid "modprobe.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:49 +msgid "lilo.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:50 +msgid "grub: menu.lst" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:51 +msgid "grub: install.sh" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:52 +msgid "grub: device.map" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:53 +msgid "xorg.conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:54 +msgid "urpmi.cfg" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:55 +msgid "modprobe.preload" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:56 +msgid "sysconfig/i18n" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:57 +msgid "/proc/iomem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:58 +msgid "/proc/ioport" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:59 +msgid "mageia version" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:60 +msgid "rpm -qa" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:61 +msgid "df" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakbug_report.xml:65 +msgid "" +"At the time this help page was written, the \"syslog\" part of this " +"command's output was empty, because this tool had not yet been adjusted to " +"our switch to systemd. If it is still empty, you can retrieve the \"syslog\" " +"by doing (as root) <emphasis role=\"bold\"> journalctl -a > journalctl.txt</" +"emphasis>. If you don't have a lot of diskspace, you can, for instance, take " +"the last 5000 lines of the log instead with: <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">journalctl -a | tail -n5000 > journalctl5000.txt</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakbug.xml:9 +msgid "Mageia Bug Report Tool" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakbug.xml:9 +msgid "drakbug" +msgstr "drakbug" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakbug.xml:15 +msgid "drakbug.png" +msgstr "drakbug.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:19 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakbug</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:19 +msgid "" +"Usually, this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> starts " +"automatically when a Mageia tool crashes. However, it is also possible that, " +"after filing a bug report, you are asked to start this tool to check some of " +"the information it gives, and then provide that in that existing bug report." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:21 +msgid "" +"If a new bug report needs to be filed and you are not used to doing that, " +"then please read <link xlink:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/" +"How_to_report_a_bug_properly\">How to report a bug report properly</link> " +"before clicking on the \"Report\" button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakbug.xml:23 +msgid "" +"In case the bug has already been filed by someone else (the error message " +"that drakbug gave will be the same, then), it is useful to add a comment to " +"that existing report that you saw the bug, too." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakclock.xml:3 +msgid "Manage date and time" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakclock.xml:5 +msgid "drakclock" +msgstr "drakclock" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakclock.xml:10 +msgid "drakclock.png" +msgstr "drakclock.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakclock</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the tab " +"System in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>\"Manage date and time" +"\"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a right " +"click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:21 +msgid "It's a very simple tool." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:23 +msgid "" +"On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">calendar</emphasis>. " +"On the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on " +"the upper right), the 2nd (in blue) and it is a Sunday. Select the month " +"(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or " +"2012). Select the day by clicking on its number." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:29 +msgid "" +"On the bottom left is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Network Time Protocol</" +"emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on time by " +"synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time " +"Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:34 +msgid "" +"On the right part is the <emphasis role=\"bold\">clock</emphasis>. It's " +"useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours, " +"minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows " +"to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see " +"your desktop environment settings for that." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:40 +msgid "" +"At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the " +"<guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list the " +"nearest town." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakclock.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they " +"will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation " +"settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3 +msgid "Remove a connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:3 +msgid "drakconnect --del" +msgstr "drakconnect --del" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:8 +msgid "drakconnect--del.png" +msgstr "drakconnect--del.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:12 +msgid "" +"Here, you can delete a network interface<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=" +"\"0\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:14 +msgid "" +"Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then " +"click <emphasis>next</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconnect--del.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted " +"successfully." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:3 +msgid "Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:6 +msgid "drakconnect" +msgstr "drakconnect" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:11 +msgid "drakconnect.png" +msgstr "drakconnect.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:19 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconnect</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:18 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure much " +"of local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from " +"your access provider or your network administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:25 +msgid "" +"Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware " +"and provider you have." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:30 +msgid "A new Wired connection (Ethernet)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:34 en/drakconnect.xml:162 +msgid "" +"The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one " +"to configure." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:39 en/drakconnect.xml:167 +msgid "" +"At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP " +"address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:44 en/drakconnect.xml:187 en/drakconnect.xml:557 +msgid "Automatic IP" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers " +"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained " +"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. " +"The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option " +"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers " +"have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address " +"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:62 +msgid "drakconnect5.png" +msgstr "drakconnect5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:68 en/drakconnect.xml:205 en/drakconnect.xml:572 +msgid "The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:72 en/drakconnect.xml:209 en/drakconnect.xml:576 +msgid "Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:77 en/drakconnect.xml:214 en/drakconnect.xml:581 +msgid "the DHCP client" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:81 en/drakconnect.xml:218 en/drakconnect.xml:585 +msgid "DHCP timeout" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:85 en/drakconnect.xml:222 +msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:90 en/drakconnect.xml:227 en/drakconnect.xml:594 +msgid "Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:95 en/drakconnect.xml:232 en/drakconnect.xml:599 +msgid "" +"the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server " +"requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP address. " +"This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:104 en/drakconnect.xml:241 +msgid "" +"After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection " +"configurations are explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:111 en/drakconnect.xml:248 en/drakconnect.xml:615 +msgid "Manual configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:115 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS " +"servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no " +"HOSTNAME is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is " +"attributed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:121 en/drakconnect.xml:258 +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like " +"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is <emphasis>255.255.255.0</" +"emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are available from your service " +"provider's website." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:126 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your computer is " +"called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is \"splash.boatanchor.net\", " +"the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". Unless you specifically need " +"it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, domestic ADSL would not need " +"this setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:136 +msgid "drakconnect30.png" +msgstr "drakconnect30.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:142 en/drakconnect.xml:279 en/drakconnect.xml:351 +#: en/drakconnect.xml:458 en/drakconnect.xml:636 en/drakconnect.xml:688 +#: en/drakconnect.xml:780 +msgid "The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:150 +msgid "A new Satellite connection (DVB)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:152 en/drakconnect.xml:696 en/draknetcenter.xml:91 +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:95 en/draknetcenter.xml:138 +msgid "" +"This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you " +"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:158 +msgid "A new Cable modem connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:172 +msgid "You have to specify a authentication method:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:176 +msgid "None" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:180 +msgid "" +"BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name " +"and password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:191 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers " +"are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained " +"below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. " +"The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option " +"<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers " +"have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address " +"from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:252 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS servers " +"to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME " +"is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is " +"attributed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:263 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your computer is " +"called \"splash\", and it's full domain name is \"splash.boatanchor.net\", " +"the Search Domain would be \"boatanchor.net\". Unless you specifically need " +"it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, domestic connection would not " +"need this setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:273 +msgid "drakconnect32.png" +msgstr "drakconnect32.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:287 +msgid "A new DSL connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:291 +msgid "" +"If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to " +"configure it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:296 en/drakconnect.xml:663 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:303 en/drakconnect.xml:380 +msgid "Select one of the protocols available:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:307 +msgid "Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:311 +msgid "Manual TCP/IP configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:315 +msgid "PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:319 +msgid "PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:323 +msgid "Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:329 +msgid "Access settings" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:333 en/drakconnect.xml:678 +msgid "Account Login (user name)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:337 en/drakconnect.xml:414 en/drakconnect.xml:682 +msgid "Account password" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:341 +msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:345 +msgid "(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:289 en/drakconnect.xml:359 en/drakconnect.xml:646 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"orderedlist\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:357 +msgid "A new ISDN connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:361 en/drakconnect.xml:706 +msgid "The wizard asks which device to configure:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:365 +msgid "Manual choice (internal ISDN card)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:369 +msgid "External ISDN modem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:375 +msgid "" +"A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and manufacturer. " +"Select your card." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:384 +msgid "Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:389 +msgid "Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:395 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave you. Then it is " +"asked for parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:402 +msgid "Connection name" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:406 +msgid "Phone number" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:410 +msgid "Login ID" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:418 +msgid "Authentication method" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:424 +msgid "" +"After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or " +"manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:430 +msgid "" +"The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by " +"automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to " +"put:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:436 +msgid "Domain name" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:440 +msgid "First and second DNS Server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:444 +msgid "" +"Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you " +"are sure that your provider is configured to accept it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:452 +msgid "" +"The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic " +"or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter the " +"IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:464 +msgid "A new Wireless connection (WiFi)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:468 +msgid "" +"A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for " +"Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure. Use ndiswrapper " +"only if the other configuration methods did not work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:475 +msgid "" +"At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that " +"the card has detected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:480 +msgid "Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:484 +msgid "drakconnect31.png" +msgstr "drakconnect31.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:490 +msgid "Operating mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:494 +msgid "Managed" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:497 +msgid "To access to an existing access point (the most frequent)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:503 +msgid "Ad-Hoc" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:506 +msgid "To configure direct connection between computers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:514 +msgid "Network Name (ESSID)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:518 +msgid "Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:523 +msgid "WPA/WPA2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:526 +msgid "This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><term> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:532 +msgid "WEP" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><variablelist><varlistentry><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:535 +msgid "Some old hardware deals only this encryption method." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:543 +msgid "Encryption key" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:545 +msgid "It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:552 +msgid "" +"At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a " +"manual IP address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:561 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers are " +"declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained below. " +"In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The HOSTNAME of " +"the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, the name " +"localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The Hostname can also be " +"provided by the DHCP server with the option <emphasis>Assign host name from " +"DHCP server</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:589 +msgid "Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:608 +msgid "" +"After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all " +"connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend=\"drakconnect-end\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:619 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS servers. The " +"HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, " +"the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:625 +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the IP address always looks like " +"<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is <emphasis>255.255.255.0</" +"emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are available from your providers " +"website." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:630 +msgid "" +"In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search domain</" +"emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first name, before the " +"period." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:644 +msgid "A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:648 +msgid "" +"If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to " +"configure it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:653 +msgid "The PIN is asked. Leave empty if the PIN is not required." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:658 +msgid "" +"The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option " +"<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:670 +msgid "Provide access settings" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:674 +msgid "Access Point Name" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:694 +msgid "A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:702 +msgid "A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:710 +msgid "Manual choice" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:714 +msgid "Detected hardware, if any." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:720 +msgid "A list of ports is proposed. Select your port." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:724 +msgid "" +"If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package " +"<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:729 +msgid "" +"A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your " +"provider. If it is not listed, select the option <guilabel>Unlisted</" +"guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave. Then it is asked " +"for Dialup options:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:736 +msgid "<emphasis>Connection name</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:740 +msgid "<emphasis>Phone number</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:744 +msgid "<emphasis>Login ID</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:748 +msgid "<emphasis>Password</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:752 +msgid "<emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:756 +msgid "PAP/CHAP" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:760 +msgid "Script-based" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:764 +msgid "PAP" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:768 +msgid "Terminal-based" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:772 +msgid "CHAP" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:786 +msgid "Ending the configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:788 +msgid "In the next step, you can specify:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:792 +msgid "<emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:796 +msgid "<emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:800 +msgid "<emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:804 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:809 +msgid "" +"In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is <emphasis>Allow " +"access point roaming</emphasis> which give the possibility to switch " +"automatically between access point according to the signal strength." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:816 +msgid "With the advanced button, you can specify:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:820 +msgid "Metric (10 by default)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:824 +msgid "MTU" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:828 +msgid "Network Hotplugging" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:832 +msgid "Enable IPv6 to IPv4 tunnel" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:836 +msgid "" +"The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start " +"immediately or not." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconnect.xml:841 +msgid "drakconnect9.png" +msgstr "drakconnect9.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:3 +msgid "Open a console as administrator" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:5 +msgid "drakconsole" +msgstr "drakconsole" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:10 +msgid "drakconsole.png" +msgstr "drakconsole.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakconsole</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakconsole.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives you access to a " +"console which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more " +"information about that." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:5 +msgid "Manage disk partitions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:7 +msgid "drakdisk or diskdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:12 +msgid "drakdiskBackup.png" +msgstr "drakdiskBackup.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:18 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">diskdrake</emphasis> " +"as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:17 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is very powerful, a tiny " +"error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a " +"partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll " +"see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on <emphasis>Exit</" +"emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:27 +msgid "" +"If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you " +"want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:32 +msgid "drakdisk.png" +msgstr "drakdisk.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:36 +msgid "" +"You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your " +"preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions, " +"resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a " +"partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear all</" +"guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete disk, " +"the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a partition." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If you have an UEFI system, you can see a small partition called \"EFI " +"System Partition\" and mounted on /boot/EFI. Never delete it, because it " +"contains all your different operating systems bootloaders." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:52 +msgid "" +"If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot " +"choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition " +"must be unmounted first." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:56 +msgid "It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:58 +msgid "" +"To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to " +"delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button " +"<guibutton role=\"bold\">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part " +"is selected" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:63 +msgid "You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:68 +msgid "drakdiskMountedPartition.png" +msgstr "drakdiskMountedPartition.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:72 +msgid "" +"Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton></emphasis> " +"gives some extra available actions, like labeling the partition, as can be " +"seen in the screenshot below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakdisk.xml:78 +msgid "drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png" +msgstr "drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakedm.xml:4 +msgid "Set up display manager" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakedm.xml:5 +msgid "drakedm" +msgstr "drakedm" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakedm.xml:9 +msgid "drakedm.png" +msgstr "drakedm.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakedm</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:12 +msgid "" +"Here<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> you can choose which display " +"manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available " +"on your system will be shown." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakedm.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look different. " +"However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM is a " +"lightweight display manager, SDDM and GDM have more extras." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:3 +msgid "Set up your personal firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:5 +msgid "drakfirewall" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:10 +msgid "drakfirewall.png" +msgstr "drakfirewall.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"Security tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Set up your personal " +"firewall\". It is the same tool in the first tab of \"Configure system " +"security, permissions and audit\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:20 +msgid "" +"A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming " +"connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the " +"first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection " +"attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box - " +"<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable " +"the firewall, and only check the needed services." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:27 +msgid "" +"It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on " +"<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field " +"<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these " +"examples :" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:32 +msgid "80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:34 +msgid "24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:37 +msgid "The listed ports should be separated by a space." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:39 +msgid "" +"If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is " +"checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:44 +msgid "drakfirewall2.png" +msgstr "drakfirewall2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:49 +msgid "" +"If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...) " +"it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even " +"recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:55 +msgid "" +"The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature " +"allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box " +"<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second " +"box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure " +"somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards " +"corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot " +"below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be " +"warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:64 +msgid "These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:69 +msgid "drakfirewall3.png" +msgstr "drakfirewall3.png" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:75 +msgid "drakfirewall4.png" +msgstr "drakfirewall4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:79 +msgid "" +"In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the " +"Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary " +"packages are downloaded." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><tip><para> +#: en/drakfirewall.xml:84 +msgid "" +"If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network & " +"Internet, icon Set up a new network interface." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakfont.xml:3 +msgid "Manage, add and remove fonts. Import Windows(TM) fonts" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakfont.xml:6 +msgid "drakfont" +msgstr "drakfont" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakfont.xml:11 +msgid "drakfont.png" +msgstr "drakfont.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakfont</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the <emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab. It " +"allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen " +"above shows:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:22 +msgid "the installed font names, styles and sizes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:26 +msgid "a preview of the selected font." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:30 +msgid "some buttons explained here later." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:36 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Get Windows Fonts: </emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:38 +msgid "" +"This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You " +"must have Microsoft Windows installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:41 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Options:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:43 +msgid "" +"It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly) able " +"to use the fonts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:46 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Uninstall:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:48 +msgid "" +"This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place. Be " +"careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the " +"documents that use them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:52 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:54 +msgid "" +"Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The " +"supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the " +"fonts to install, click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Install</emphasis> when " +"done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakfont.xml:60 +msgid "" +"If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont " +"main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:3 +msgid "Parental Controls" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakguard.xml:5 +msgid "drakguard" +msgstr "drakguard" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakguard.xml:10 +msgid "drakguard.png" +msgstr "drakguard.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakguard</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental Control</" +"guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the drakguard " +"package (not installed by default)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:21 en/msecgui.xml:19 +msgid "Presentation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to " +"restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three " +"useful capabilities:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:29 +msgid "" +"It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by " +"controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:35 +msgid "" +"It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can " +"only execute what you accept them to execute." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:40 +msgid "" +"It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through blacklists/" +"whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the website. To " +"achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental control blocker " +"DansGuardian." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:49 +msgid "Configuring Parental controls" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:52 +msgid "" +"If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2, " +"Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on " +"your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel " +"feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named " +"users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by " +"an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this " +"prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will " +"then suggest you reboot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:61 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental " +"control is enabled and the access to <guilabel>Block programs</guilabel> tab " +"is opened." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:65 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the " +"websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all " +"the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:69 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have " +"their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the " +"right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are " +"not inconvenienced. Select a user in the left hand side and click on " +"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user. Select an " +"user in the right hand side and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to " +"remove him/her from the allowed users." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:77 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Time control:</guibutton> If checked, internet access is allowed " +"with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and " +"<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time " +"window." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:83 +msgid "Blacklist/Whitelist tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:85 +msgid "" +"Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the " +"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/drakguard.xml:90 +msgid "Block Programs Tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:92 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to " +"restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the " +"applications you wish to block." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/drakguard.xml:96 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand " +"side will not be subject to acl blocking." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:9 +msgid "Share the Internet connection with other local machines" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakgw.xml:12 +msgid "drakgw" +msgstr "drakgw" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakgw.xml:17 +msgid "drakgw.png" +msgstr "drakgw.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:25 +msgid "Principles" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakgw.xml:29 +msgid "../drakgw-net.png" +msgstr "../drakgw-net.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:27 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>This is useful when you have a " +"computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local " +"network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to " +"other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the " +"gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card " +"must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to " +"the Internet (2)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are " +"set up, as documented in <xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:45 +msgid "Gateway wizard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:48 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakgw</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:47 +msgid "" +"The wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> offers successive steps " +"which are shown below:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:54 +msgid "" +"If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this " +"and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:60 +msgid "" +"specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard " +"automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that " +"what is proposed is correct." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:66 +msgid "" +"specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes " +"one, check that this is correct." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:71 +msgid "" +"The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask " +"and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual " +"configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:78 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>bind</code> is installed. Otherwise, you have to " +"specify the address of a DNS server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:84 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure " +"it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:91 +msgid "" +"specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard " +"will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it, " +"with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the " +"proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:99 +msgid "" +"The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to " +"printers and to share them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:104 +msgid "" +"You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:109 +msgid "Configure the client" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:111 +msgid "" +"If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to " +"specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address " +"automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting " +"to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is " +"using." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:117 +msgid "" +"If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular " +"specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the " +"gateway." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakgw.xml:123 +msgid "Stop connection sharing" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakgw.xml:125 +msgid "" +"If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch " +"the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the sharing." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:3 +msgid "Hosts definitions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:5 +msgid "drakhosts" +msgstr "drakhosts" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:10 +msgid "drakhosts.png" +msgstr "drakhosts.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakhosts</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:14 +msgid "" +"If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed IP-" +"addresses, this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to " +"specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name " +"instead of the IP-address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:20 +msgid "<guibutton>Add</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:22 +msgid "" +"With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window " +"to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an " +"alias which can be used in the same way that the name is." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:27 +msgid "<guibutton>Modify</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakhosts.xml:29 +msgid "" +"You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the " +"same window." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3 +msgid "Advanced setup for network interfaces and firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:3 +msgid "drakinvictus" +msgstr "drakinvictus" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:8 +msgid "drakinvictus.png" +msgstr "drakinvictus.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:12 en/draknetcenter.xml:127 en/drakups.xml:12 +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:12 en/drakxservices.xml:11 +msgid "" +"This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you " +"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Documentation_team\"> the Doc team.</link> Thanking you in advance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakinvictus.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakinvictus</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:8 +msgid "Network Center" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:9 +msgid "draknetcenter" +msgstr "draknetcenter" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:13 +msgid "draknetcenter.png" +msgstr "draknetcenter.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:16 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"Network & Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled \"Network " +"Center\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:21 +msgid "" +"When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks " +"configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite, " +"etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending " +"on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its " +"settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a " +"network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, " +"ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:30 +msgid "../draknetcenterEthernet-on.png" +msgstr "../draknetcenterEthernet-on.png" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:30 +msgid "../draknetcenterEthernet-off.png" +msgstr "../draknetcenterEthernet-off.png" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:31 +msgid "../draknetcenterWireless-off.png" +msgstr "../draknetcenterWireless-off.png" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:31 +msgid "../draknetcenterWireless-on.png" +msgstr "../draknetcenterWireless-on.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:28 +msgid "" +"In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the " +"first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <placeholder " +"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/> (this one is not connected<placeholder " +"type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"1\"/> ) and the second section shows " +"wireless networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <placeholder type=" +"\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"2\"/> and this one <placeholder type=" +"\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"3\"/>if connected. For the other network types, " +"the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not " +"connected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:34 +msgid "" +"In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected " +"networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal strengh</" +"guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and the " +"<guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then either " +"on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> or " +"<guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network to " +"another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings window " +"(see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption key in " +"particular)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:43 +msgid "Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:46 +msgid "draknetcenter1.png" +msgstr "draknetcenter1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:51 +msgid "The Monitor button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:54 +msgid "draknetcenter4.png" +msgstr "draknetcenter4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:57 +msgid "" +"This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the " +"PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is " +"available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray " +"-> Monitor Network</guimenu>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:61 +msgid "" +"There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the " +"local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which " +"gives details about connection status." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:65 +msgid "" +"At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic accounting</" +"guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:70 +msgid "The Configure button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:71 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">A - For a wired network</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:74 +msgid "draknetcenter2.png" +msgstr "draknetcenter2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:77 +msgid "" +"It is possible to change all the settings given during network creation. " +"Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton> " +"<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual " +"configuration may give better results." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:81 +msgid "" +"For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks " +"like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the " +"<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are " +"available from your providers website." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:85 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count " +"the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in " +"the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may " +"have to reconnect to the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:89 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager:" +"</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:94 en/draknetcenter.xml:126 +msgid "<guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:100 +msgid "draknetcenter5.png" +msgstr "draknetcenter5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:103 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">B - For a wireless network</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:104 +msgid "Only the items not already seen above are explained." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:107 +msgid "draknetcenter3.png" +msgstr "draknetcenter3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:110 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Operating mode:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:111 +msgid "" +"Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access " +"point, there is an <emphasis role=\"bold\">ESSID</emphasis> detected. " +"Select <guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as " +"the access point, your network card needs to support this mode." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:116 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:118 +msgid "If it is a private network, you need to know these settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:119 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a " +"passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA " +"personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used " +"in private networks." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:123 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:124 +msgid "" +"Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access " +"point while remaining connected to the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:132 +msgid "draknetcenter6.png" +msgstr "draknetcenter6.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:137 +msgid "The Advanced Settings button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetcenter.xml:143 +msgid "draknetcenter7.png" +msgstr "draknetcenter7.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:12 +msgid "Manage different network profiles" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:14 en/draknetprofile.xml:46 +msgid "Draknetprofile" +msgstr "Draknetprofile" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Each network interface of a Mageia system is initially configured with a fix " +"set of parameters. This corresponds to what is expected by a user of a " +"desktop computer, but may not be adequate when the system is moved between " +"various network environments: having the system run in different network " +"environments will require that multiple configurations co-exist for a given " +"network device - otherwise the interface might need to be re-configured each " +"time the network environment changes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:31 +msgid "Profiles" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Linux provides support for multiple configurations of network devices as a " +"standard feature. The notion of a <emphasis role='bold'>\"network profile\"</" +"emphasis> refers to a set of configurations of network devices, defined for " +"a specific network environment. Each network profile has a <emphasis " +"role='bold'>name</emphasis> - the initial configuration that comes out of " +"system generation has the name <emphasis>\"default\"</emphasis>; when a new " +"profile is created, a name must be specified which is different from all " +"already existing profile names." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:48 +msgid "" +"Draknetprofile is a - very simple - component of the Mageia Control Center " +"(MCC), it provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) for managing profiles. " +"This GUI allows to" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:56 +msgid "" +"switch between profiles - i.e. activate a target profile to become the " +"\"current profile\"," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:61 +msgid "create a new, additional profile," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:65 +msgid "delete a profile from the list of defined profiles." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:73 +msgid "Running Draknetprofile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:76 +msgid "Defining profiles, profile switching" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:78 +msgid "" +"Defining/modifying profiles concerns the entire Linux system and all its " +"users. Running draknetprofile therefore requires root privileges. Normally, " +"launching is achieved from within MCC (which already runs as root):" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:86 +msgid "./draknetprofile_mcc.png" +msgstr "./draknetprofile_mcc.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:90 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role='bold'>Figure 1: Mageia Control Center: Network & " +"Internet tab</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:98 +msgid "" +"launch the MCC by hitting the MCC icon in one of the panels of your desktop," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:103 +msgid "select the \"Network & Internet\" tab," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:107 +msgid "" +"hit \"Manage different network profiles\" in the \"Personalize and Secure " +"your network\" Section (solid red contour in Figure 1)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:113 +msgid "" +"Draknetprofile can also be launched by a command-line instruction from a " +"terminal emulator with root privileges (this may be helpful when standard-" +"output or error-output from draknetprofile needs to be consulted - for " +"instance for debugging). Simply type:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><informaltable><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:124 +msgid "<literal> draknetprofile </literal>" +msgstr "<literal> draknetprofile </literal>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:130 +msgid "After the launch, the main page of Draknetprofile will be displayed:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:136 +msgid "./draknetprofile_main.png" +msgstr "./draknetprofile_main.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><caption><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:140 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role='bold'>Figure 2: Management actions of Draknetprofile</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:145 +msgid "" +"The upper zone of the window contains the list of the names of all presently " +"defined profiles. The bottom zone presents a series of buttons:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:152 +msgid "" +"\"Activate\" ... establish the selected profile (top zone of the window) as " +"the current profile (and save the properties of the old profile);" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:158 +msgid "\"New\" ... create a new profile;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:162 +msgid "" +"\"Delete\" ... delete the selected profile from the list of defined profiles;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:167 +msgid "\"Quit\" ... exit from Draknetprofile." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:171 +msgid "" +"Before hitting the \"Activate\" or the \"Delete\" button, you have to select " +"a profile from the list: select it by a left-button click on the name of the " +"target profile." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:175 +msgid "" +"Hitting the \"New\" button will launch an auxiliary window where you can " +"type the name of the profile you want to create; this name must be different " +"from any already existing profile. This profile will be created as a precise " +"copy of the currently active profile and immediately activated as the " +"current profile. You will probably then need to specify its properties " +"(modify the automatically created configuration) in a second, independent " +"action:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:188 +msgid "exit from Draknetprofile (hit the \"Quit\" button)," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:192 +msgid "" +"back in the \"Network & Internet\" tab, you select the tab \"Set up a " +"new network interface (...)\" (marked with dashed red contour in Figure 1)," +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:198 +msgid "" +"you then go through the steps for configuring the interface; they are " +"similar to those you did for configuring the original interface during " +"system generation - as documented in the <link linkend='drakconnect-" +"ti1'>Drakconnect manual</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:206 +msgid "" +"The middle zone of the window is normally hidden, hit the \"Advanced\" " +"button to make it visible. It should display the list of names of " +"Draknetprofile <emphasis role='bold'>\"modules\"</emphasis> (such as " +"\"network\", \"firewall\", \"urpmi\"), each with a check-button next to the " +"name; these check-buttons determine whether the properties controlled by " +"that module are included into the profile or not." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:217 +msgid "Using a system that has more than one profile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:219 +msgid "" +"In a system where several profiles are defined, an additional user " +"interaction is required when the system boots: at the very end of the " +"bootstrapping activities - just before the Desktop Environment starts - you " +"will get a message like" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><informaltable><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:230 +msgid "" +"<literal> Select network profile: (1) default (2) roaming* </" +"literal>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:237 +msgid "" +"Type 1 or 2 to select the \"default\", respectively the \"roaming\" profile, " +"or carriage-return to select the profile that is marked with an asterisk " +"(the profile that was active when the system had been shut down)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:242 +msgid "" +"Presently (Mageia-5) there appears to be an intermittent problem: it happens " +"that the system becomes unresponsive after soliciting the user to select a " +"profile. The only way out of this situation is to launch another boot. This " +"problem is under investigation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:251 +msgid "Appendix: Files relevant to Draknetprofile" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:253 +msgid "" +"The configuration data of network interfaces are stored in the directory " +"<emphasis>/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/</emphasis>, in files with names " +"like <emphasis>ifcfg-xxx</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknetprofile.xml:257 +msgid "" +"The name of the currently active profile is maintained in the file " +"<emphasis>/etc/netprofile/current</emphasis> ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:9 +msgid "Share drives and directories using NFS" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draknfs.xml:11 +msgid "draknfs" +msgstr "draknfs" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknfs.xml:16 +msgid "draknfs.png" +msgstr "draknfs.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:24 +msgid "Prerequisites" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:27 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draknfs</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:26 +msgid "" +"When the wizard<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is launched for the " +"first time, it may display the following message:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:33 +msgid "The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:37 +msgid "" +"After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:42 +msgid "Main window" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:44 +msgid "" +"A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list " +"is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a " +"configuration tool." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:50 +msgid "Modify entry" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:52 +msgid "" +"The configuration tool is labeled \"Modify entry\". It may be also launched " +"with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are " +"available." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknfs.xml:58 +msgid "draknfs4.png" +msgstr "draknfs4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:64 +msgid "NFS Directory" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:66 +msgid "" +"Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The " +"<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose " +"it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:72 +msgid "Host access" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:74 +msgid "" +"Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared " +"directory." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:77 +msgid "NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:79 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name " +"recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:83 +msgid "<emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard " +"characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the " +"domain cs.foo.edu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:90 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all " +"hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either " +"`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:96 +msgid "User ID Mapping" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:98 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid " +"0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client " +"cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on " +"the server itself." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:103 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root squashing. " +"This option is mainly useful for diskless clients (no_root_squash)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:107 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids " +"to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP " +"directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID " +"mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:113 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of " +"the anonymous account." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:118 +msgid "Advanced options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:120 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests " +"originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024). This option " +"is on by default." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:124 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read " +"and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any " +"request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by " +"using this option." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:129 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from " +"violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made " +"by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:134 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can " +"help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See " +"exports(5) man page for more details." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:141 en/draksambashare.xml:176 +msgid "Menu entries" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:143 +msgid "So far the list has at least one entry." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draknfs.xml:147 +msgid "draknfs5.png" +msgstr "draknfs5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:153 en/draksambashare.xml:182 +msgid "File|Write conf" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:155 +msgid "Save the current configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:159 +msgid "NFS Server|Restart" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:161 en/draksambashare.xml:197 +msgid "" +"The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/draknfs.xml:166 +msgid "NFS Server|Reload" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draknfs.xml:168 en/draksambashare.xml:204 +msgid "" +"The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration files." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:10 +msgid "Proxy" +msgstr "Proxy" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:12 +msgid "drakproxy" +msgstr "drakproxy" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:17 +msgid "drakproxy.png" +msgstr "drakproxy.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakproxy</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:22 +msgid "" +"If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use " +"this tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> to configure it. Your net " +"administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify " +"some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakproxy.xml:30 +msgid "" +"From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a " +"proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts as " +"an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other " +"servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, " +"such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a " +"different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to " +"simplify and control their complexity." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:3 +msgid "Configure Media" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:5 +msgid "drakrpm-edit-media" +msgstr "drakrpm-edit-media" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:17 +msgid "drakrpm-edit-media.png" +msgstr "drakrpm-edit-media.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><important><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:22 +msgid "" +"First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (also known as " +"repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources " +"to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button " +"below)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:27 +msgid "" +"If you install (or upgrade) Mageia using an optical media (DVD or CD) or a " +"USB device, there will be a software source configured to the optical media " +"used. To avoid being asked to insert the media when you install new " +"packages, you should disable (or delete) this media. (It will have the " +"media type CD-Rom)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Your system is running under an architecture which may be 32-bit (called " +"i586), or 64-bit (called x86_64). Some packages are independent of whether " +"your system is 32-bit or 64-bit; these are called noarch packages. They " +"don't have their own noarch directories on the mirrors, but are all in both " +"the i586 and the x86_64 media." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:42 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:40 +msgid "" +"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Software management.</emphasis><placeholder type=\"footnote\" " +"id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:46 +msgid "The columns" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:48 +msgid "Column Enable:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:50 +msgid "" +"The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with " +"some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:54 +msgid "Column Update:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:56 +msgid "" +"The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only " +"media with \"Update\" in its name should be selected. For security reasons, " +"this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root " +"and type <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-edit-media --expert.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><bridgehead> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:62 +msgid "Column medium:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release " +"versions contain at least:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:69 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs " +"available supported by Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:74 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs " +"which are not free" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:79 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there " +"might be patent claims in some countries." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:82 +msgid "Each medium has 4 sub-sections:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the " +"this version of Mageia was released." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:91 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since " +"release due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium " +"enabled, even with a very slow internet connection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:97 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions " +"backported from Cauldron (the next version under development)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:103 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests " +"of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the " +"corrections." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:111 +msgid "The buttons on the right" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:114 +msgid "<guibutton>Remove:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:116 +msgid "" +"To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to " +"remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example) since " +"all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:121 +msgid "<guibutton>Edit:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:123 +msgid "" +"Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and " +"proxy)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:126 +msgid "<guibutton>Add:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Add the official repositories available on the Internet. These repositories " +"contain only safe and well tested software. Clicking on the \"Add\" button " +"adds the mirrorlist to your configuration, it is designed to make sure that " +"you install and update from a mirror close to you. If you prefer to choose a " +"specific mirror, then add it by choosing \"Add a specific media mirror\" " +"from the drop-down \"File\" menu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:135 +msgid "<guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:137 +msgid "" +"Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list " +"in the displayed order and will install the first package found for the same " +"release number - in the event of a version mismatch, the latest release will " +"be installed. So if possible, put the fastest repositories at the top." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:145 en/harddrake2.xml:64 +msgid "The menu" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:147 +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:149 +msgid "" +"A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and " +"click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:152 +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:154 +msgid "" +"Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's " +"too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the " +"actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them out. " +"Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose " +"between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the " +"<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by " +"clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:165 +msgid "drakrpmEditMedia2.png" +msgstr "drakrpmEditMedia2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:169 +msgid "" +"You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very " +"close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available " +"mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:174 +msgid "<guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:176 +msgid "" +"It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that " +"isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:181 +msgid "rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png" +msgstr "rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:179 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the medium type, find a " +"smart name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, " +"according to the medium type)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:187 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:189 +msgid "" +"This item allows you to choose when to \"Verify RPMs to be installed" +"\" (always or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to " +"define the download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by " +"default-, update only, always or never)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:194 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:196 +msgid "" +"To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate " +"the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In the " +"window that appear, select a medium and then click on <guibutton>Add</" +"guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and click on " +"<guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><warning><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:203 +msgid "Do this with care, as with all security-related questions" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:204 +msgid "<guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:206 +msgid "" +"If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it " +"here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy hostname</guibutton> and if " +"necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakrpm-edit-media.xml:213 +msgid "" +"For more information about configuring the media, see <link ns2:href=" +"\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Software_management\">the Mageia Wiki page</" +"link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:3 +msgid "Share directories and drives with Samba" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:6 +msgid "draksambashare" +msgstr "draksambashare" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:11 +msgid "draksambashare.png" +msgstr "draksambashare.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:20 +msgid "" +"Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some " +"resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure " +"the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is " +"also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the " +"resources of the Samba server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:28 +msgid "Preparation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:30 +msgid "" +"To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP " +"address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with " +"<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>, or at the DHCP server which identifies " +"the station with its MAC-address and give it always the same address. The " +"firewall has also to allow the incoming requests to the Samba server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:41 +msgid "Wizard - Standalone server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:44 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing<emphasis role=\"bold" +"\"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:43 +msgid "" +"At the first run, the tools <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> checks " +"if needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are " +"not yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:52 +msgid "draksambashare0.png" +msgstr "draksambashare0.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:56 +msgid "" +"In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already " +"selected." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:60 +msgid "draksambashare1.png" +msgstr "draksambashare1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the " +"access to the shared resources." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:67 +msgid "" +"The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on " +"the network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:72 +msgid "draksambashare2.png" +msgstr "draksambashare2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:76 +msgid "Choose the security mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:80 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the " +"resource" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:85 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for " +"each share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:90 +msgid "" +"You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP " +"address or host name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:95 +msgid "draksambashare3.png" +msgstr "draksambashare3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:99 +msgid "" +"Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be " +"described in the Windows workstations." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:104 +msgid "draksambashare4.png" +msgstr "draksambashare4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:108 +msgid "" +"The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:113 +msgid "draksambashare5.png" +msgstr "draksambashare5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:117 +msgid "" +"The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the " +"configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in <code>/" +"etc/samba/smb.conf</code>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:123 +msgid "draksambashare6.png" +msgstr "draksambashare6.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:129 +msgid "Wizard - Primary domain controller" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:133 +msgid "draksambashare13.png" +msgstr "draksambashare13.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:131 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If the \"Primary domain " +"controller\" option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is " +"to support or not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are " +"then the same as for standalone server, except you can choose also the " +"security mode:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:142 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and " +"group accounts in a central, shared, account repository. The centralized " +"account repository is shared between (security) controllers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:151 +msgid "Declare a directory to share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:153 +msgid "With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:157 +msgid "draksambashare15.png" +msgstr "draksambashare15.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:161 +msgid "" +"A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the <guibutton>Modify</" +"guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether the directory is " +"visible to the public, writable or browseable. The share name can not be " +"modified." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:168 +msgid "draksambashare16.png" +msgstr "draksambashare16.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:178 +msgid "When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:184 +msgid "Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:189 +msgid "Samba server|Configure" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:191 +msgid "The wizard can be run again with this command." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:195 +msgid "Samba server|Restart" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><formalpara><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:202 +msgid "Samba Server|Reload" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:210 +msgid "Printers share" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:212 +msgid "Samba also allows you to share printers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:216 +msgid "draksambashare17.png" +msgstr "draksambashare17.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><screenshot> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:214 en/drakvpn.xml:46 en/logdrake.xml:89 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:58 en/rpmdrake.xml:163 en/rpmdrake.xml:173 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:183 en/rpmdrake.xml:193 en/rpmdrake.xml:203 +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:238 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:222 +msgid "Samba users" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:227 +msgid "draksambashare18.png" +msgstr "draksambashare18.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/draksambashare.xml:224 +msgid "" +"In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared " +"resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref " +"linkend=\"userdrake\"/><placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksec.xml:3 +msgid "Configure authentication for Mageia tools" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksec.xml:6 +msgid "draksec" +msgstr "draksec" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksec.xml:11 +msgid "draksec0.png" +msgstr "draksec0.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksec</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Security</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:19 +msgid "" +"It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks " +"usually done by the administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:22 +msgid "Click on the little arrow before the item you want to drop down:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksec.xml:27 +msgid "draksec.png" +msgstr "draksec.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in " +"the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a " +"drop down list on the right side gives the choice between:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:37 +msgid "" +"Default: The launch mode depends on the chosen security level. See in the " +"same MCC tab, the tool \"Configure system security, permissions and audit\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:43 +msgid "User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:48 +msgid "" +"Administrator password: The root password is asked before the tool launching" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/draksec.xml:53 +msgid "No password: The tool is launched without asking any password." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:11 +msgid "Snapshots" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:12 +msgid "draksnapshot-config" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:18 +msgid "draksnapshot-config.png" +msgstr "draksnapshot-config.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksnapshot-config </emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is available in MCC's " +"<guilabel>System</guilabel> tab, in the <guilabel>Administration tools</" +"guilabel> section." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:26 +msgid "" +"When you start this tool in MCC for the first time, you will see a message " +"about installing draksnapshot. Click on <guibutton>Install</guibutton> to " +"proceed. Draksnapshot and some other packages it needs will be installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Click again on <guilabel>Snapshots</guilabel>, you will see the " +"<guilabel>Settings</guilabel> screen. Tick <guilabel>Enable Backups</" +"guilabel> and, if you want to backup the whole system, <guilabel>Backup the " +"whole system</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:34 +msgid "" +"If you only want to backup part of your directories, then choose " +"<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>. You will see a little pop-up screen. Use the " +"<guibutton>Add</guibutton> and <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> buttons next to " +"the <guilabel>Backup list</guilabel> to include or exclude directories and " +"files from the backup. Use the same buttons next to the <guilabel>Exclude</" +"guilabel> list to remove subdirectories and/or files from the chosen " +"directories, that should <emphasis role=\"bold\">not</emphasis> be included " +"in the backup. Click on <guibutton>Close</guibutton> when you are done." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:41 +msgid "" +"Now give the path to <guilabel>Where to backup</guilabel>, or choose the " +"<guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select the correct path. Any mounted " +"USB-key or external HD can be found in <emphasis role=\"bold\">/run/media/" +"your_user_name/</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksnapshot-config.xml:45 +msgid "Click on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> to make the snapshot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/draksound.xml:3 +msgid "Sound Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/draksound.xml:4 +msgid "draksound" +msgstr "draksound" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksound.xml:8 +msgid "draksound.png" +msgstr "draksound.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:11 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">draksound</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:11 en/mousedrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:13 +msgid "" +"Draksound deals with the sound configuration, PulseAudio options and " +"troubleshooting. It will help you if you experience sound problems or if you " +"change the sound card." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:16 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound " +"inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting " +"sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio " +"volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:20 +msgid "" +"PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it " +"enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:22 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It " +"is also recommended to leave it enabled." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:24 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> button gives assistance with " +"fixing any problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this " +"before asking the community for help." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/draksound.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button displays a new window with an " +"obvious button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/draksound.xml:30 +msgid "draksound1.png" +msgstr "draksound1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakups.xml:3 +msgid "Set up a UPS for power monitoring" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakups.xml:3 +msgid "drakups" +msgstr "drakups" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakups.xml:8 +msgid "drakups.png" +msgstr "drakups.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakups.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakups</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:3 +msgid "Configure VPN Connection to secure network access" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:6 +msgid "drakvpn" +msgstr "drakvpn" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:11 +msgid "drakvpn1.png" +msgstr "drakvpn1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:19 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakvpn</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:18 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows to configure " +"secure access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local " +"workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the " +"configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is " +"already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the " +"network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:30 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "Configuración" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:32 +msgid "" +"First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which " +"protocol is used for your virtual private network." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:35 +msgid "Then give your connection a name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:37 +msgid "At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:42 +msgid "For Cisco VPN" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:48 +msgid "drakvpn3.png" +msgstr "drakvpn3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:54 +msgid "" +"For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the " +"first time the tool is used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:59 +msgid "drakvpn7.png" +msgstr "drakvpn7.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:57 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>Select the files that you " +"received from the network administrator." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:64 +msgid "Advanced parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:68 +msgid "drakvpn8.png" +msgstr "drakvpn8.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:72 +msgid "The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:76 +msgid "" +"When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN " +"connection." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakvpn.xml:79 +msgid "" +"This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network " +"connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect " +"to this VPN." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3 +msgid "Configure webserver" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard apache2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_apache2.png" +msgstr "drakwizard_apache2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:12 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a " +"web server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:15 +msgid "What is a web server?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:17 +msgid "" +"Web server is the software that helps to deliver web content that can be " +"accessed through the Internet. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:21 +msgid "Setting up a web server with drakwizard apache2" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:23 +msgid "Welcome to the web server wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:30 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step1.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-web-step1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:34 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:49 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:34 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:55 +msgid "" +"The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:38 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:38 +msgid "Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:41 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step2.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-web-step2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Exposing the web server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad " +"things." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:49 +msgid "Server User Module" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:52 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step3.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-web-step3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:56 +msgid "Allows users to create their own sites." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:60 +msgid "User web directory name" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:63 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step4.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-web-step4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:67 +msgid "" +"The user needs to create and populate this directory, then the server will " +"display it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:71 +msgid "Server Document Root" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:74 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step5.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-web-step5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:78 +msgid "Allows you to configure the path to the web servers default documents." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:82 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:83 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:71 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:144 +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:105 +msgid "Summary" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:85 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step6.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-web-step6.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:89 en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:91 +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:78 en/drakwizard_squid.xml:153 +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:112 +msgid "" +"Take a second to check these options, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:93 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:82 +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:173 en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:116 +msgid "Finish" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:96 +msgid "drakwizard-web-step7.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-web-step7.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_apache2.xml:100 en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:89 +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:183 en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:123 +msgid "You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3 +msgid "Configure DNS" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard bind" +msgstr "drakwizard bind" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_bind.png" +msgstr "drakwizard_bind.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_bind.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:3 +msgid "Configure DHCP" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:5 +msgid "drakwizard dhcp" +msgstr "drakwizard dhcp" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:10 +msgid "drakwizard_dhcp.png" +msgstr "drakwizard_dhcp.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This tool is broken in Mageia 4 because of new naming scheme for the Net " +"interfaces" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:19 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a " +"<acronym>DHCP</acronym> server. It is a component of drakwizard which should " +"be installed before you can access to it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:26 +msgid "What is DHCP?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:28 +msgid "" +"The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (<acronym>DHCP</acronym>) is a " +"standardized networking protocol used on IP networks that dynamically " +"configures IP addresses and other information that is needed for Internet " +"communication. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:35 +msgid "Setting up a DHCP server with drakwizard dhcp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:37 +msgid "Welcome to the DHCP server wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:45 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step1.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-dhcp-step1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:54 +msgid "Selecting Adaptor" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:58 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step2.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-dhcp-step2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Choose the network interface, which is connected to the subnet, and for " +"which DHCP will assign IP addresses, and then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:68 +msgid "Select IP range" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:72 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step3.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-dhcp-step3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:76 +msgid "" +"Select the beginning and ending IP addresses of the range of IPs you want " +"the server to offer, along with the IP of the gateway machine connecting to " +"some place outside the local network, hopefully close to the Internet, then " +"click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:87 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step4.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-dhcp-step4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:96 +msgid "Hold on..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:100 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step5.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-dhcp-step5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:104 +msgid "" +"This can be fixed. Click <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> a few times and " +"change things around." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:109 +msgid "Hours later..." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:113 +msgid "drakwizard-dhcp-step6.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-dhcp-step6.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:121 en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:87 +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:189 +msgid "What is done" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:125 +msgid "Installing the package dhcp-server if needed;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:129 +msgid "" +"Saving <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf</code> in <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf.orig;</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:134 +msgid "" +"Creating a new <code>dhcpd.conf</code> starting from <code>/usr/share/" +"wizards/dhcp_wizard/scripts/dhcpd.conf.default</code> and adding the new " +"parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:140 +msgid "<code>hname</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:144 +msgid "<code>dns</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:148 +msgid "net" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:152 +msgid "ip" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:156 +msgid "<code>mask</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:160 +msgid "<code>rng1</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:164 +msgid "<code>rng2</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:168 +msgid "<code>dname</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:172 +msgid "<code>gateway</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:176 +msgid "<code>tftpserverip</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:180 +msgid "<code>dhcpd_interface</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:186 +msgid "" +"Also modifying Webmin configuration file <code>/etc/webmin/dhcpd/config</" +"code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_dhcp.xml:191 +msgid "Restarting <code>dhcpd.</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:10 +msgid "Configure time" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:12 +msgid "drakwizard ntp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:19 +msgid "drakwizard_ntp.png" +msgstr "drakwizard_ntp.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:25 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> purpose is to set the " +"time of your server synchronised with an external server. It isn't installed " +"by default and you have to also install the drakwizard and drakwizard-base " +"packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:32 +msgid "Setup a NTP server with drakwizard ntp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:36 +msgid "" +"After a welcome screen (see above), the second one ask you to choose three " +"time servers in the drop down lists and suggests to use pool.ntp.org twice " +"because this server always points to available time servers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:43 +msgid "drakwizard-ntp1.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-ntp1.png" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:49 +msgid "drakwizard-ntp2.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-ntp2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata><info> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:51 +msgid "<author> <personname/> </author> <pubdate/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:50 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:63 +msgid "" +"The following screens allows to choose the region and the city and then, you " +"arrive on a summary. If something is wrong, you can obviously change it " +"using the <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>button. If everything is right, " +"click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button to proceed to the test. It " +"may take a while and you finally get this screen below:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:72 +msgid "drakwizard-ntp3.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-ntp3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:78 +msgid "Click on the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button to close the tool" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:89 +msgid "This tool executes the following steps:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:93 +msgid "Installing the package <code>ntp</code> if needed" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:97 +msgid "" +"Saving the files <code>/etc/sysconfig/clock</code> to <code>/etc/sysconfig/" +"clock.orig</code> and <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> to <code>/etc/ntp/" +"step-tickers.orig</code>;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:104 +msgid "" +"Writing a new file <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> with the list of " +"servers;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:109 +msgid "" +"Modifying the file <code>/etc/ntp.conf</code> by inserting the first server " +"name;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:114 +msgid "" +"Stopping and starting <code>crond</code>, <code>atd</code> and <code>ntpd</" +"code> services;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_ntp.xml:119 +msgid "" +"Setting the hardware clock to the current system time with UTC reference." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3 +msgid "Configure FTP" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard proftpd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_proftpd.png" +msgstr "drakwizard_proftpd.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:12 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:12 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up an " +"<acronym>FTP</acronym> server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:15 +msgid "What is <acronym>FTP</acronym>?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:17 +msgid "" +"File Transfer Protocol (<acronym>FTP</acronym>) is a standard network " +"protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a " +"<acronym>TCP</acronym>-based network, such as the Internet. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:21 +msgid "Setting up an FTP server with drakwizard proftpd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:23 +msgid "Welcome to the FTP wizard. Buckle up." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:30 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step1.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-ftp-step1.png" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:41 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step2.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-ftp-step2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:45 +msgid "" +"Exposing the FTP server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad " +"things." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:49 +msgid "Server Information" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:52 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step3.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-ftp-step3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:56 +msgid "" +"Enter name the sever will use to introduce itself, someone to email " +"complaints too and whether to allow root login access." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:60 +msgid "Server Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:63 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step4.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-ftp-step4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:67 +msgid "" +"Set listening port, jailed user, allow resumes and/or <acronym>FXP</acronym> " +"(File eXchange Protocol)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:74 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step5.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-ftp-step5.png" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_proftpd.xml:85 +msgid "drakwizard-ftp-step6.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-ftp-step6.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:10 +msgid "Configure proxy" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:12 +msgid "drakwizard squid" +msgstr "drakwizard squid" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:17 +msgid "drakwizard_squid.png" +msgstr "drakwizard_squid.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up a " +"proxy server. It is a component of drakwizard which should be installed " +"before you can access to it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:29 +msgid "What is a proxy server?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:31 +msgid "" +"A proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts " +"as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other " +"servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, " +"such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a " +"different server and the proxy server evaluates the request as a way to " +"simplify and control its complexity. (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:40 +msgid "Setting up a proxy server with drakwizard squid" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:42 +msgid "Welcome to the proxy server wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:50 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step1.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:60 +msgid "Selecting the proxy port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:64 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step2.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:69 +msgid "" +"Select the proxy port browsers will connect through, then click " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:74 +msgid "Set Memory and Disk Usage" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:78 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step3.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:83 +msgid "" +"Set memory and disk cache limits, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:88 +msgid "Select Network Access Control" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:92 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step4.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:97 +msgid "" +"Set visibility to local network or world, then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:102 +msgid "Grant Network Access" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:106 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step5.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:111 +msgid "Grant access to local networks, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:116 +msgid "Use Upper Level Proxy Server?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:120 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step6.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step6.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:125 +msgid "Cascade through another proxy server? If no, skip next step." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:130 +msgid "Upper Level Proxy URL and Port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:134 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step7.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step7.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:139 +msgid "" +"Provide upper level proxy hostname and port, then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:148 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step8.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step8.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:158 +msgid "Start during boot?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:162 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step9.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step9.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:168 +msgid "" +"Choose if the proxy server should be started during the boot time, then " +"click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:177 +msgid "drakwizard-proxy-step10.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-proxy-step10.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:193 +msgid "Installing the package squid if needed;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:197 +msgid "" +"Saving <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf</code> in <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf." +"orig;</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:202 +msgid "" +"Creating a new <code>squid.conf</code> starting from <code>squid.conf." +"default</code> and adding the new parameters:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:208 +msgid "<code>cache_dir</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:212 +msgid "<code>localnet</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:216 +msgid "cache_mem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:220 +msgid "http_port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:224 +msgid "" +"<code>level</code> 1, 2 or 3 and <code>http_access</code> according to level" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:229 +msgid "<code>cache_peer</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:233 +msgid "<code>visible_hostname</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/drakwizard_squid.xml:239 +msgid "Restarting <code>squid.</code>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3 +msgid "OpenSSH daemon configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:3 +msgid "drakwizard sshd" +msgstr "drakwizard sshd" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:8 +msgid "drakwizard_sshd.png" +msgstr "drakwizard_sshd.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:13 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:13 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can help you to set up an " +"<acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:16 +msgid "What is <acronym>SSH</acronym>?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:18 +msgid "" +"Secure Shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol for secure data " +"communication, remote command-line login, remote command execution, and " +"other secure network services between two networked computers that connects, " +"via a secure channel over an insecure network, a server and a client " +"(running SSH server and <acronym>SSH</acronym> client programs, " +"respectively). (From Wikipedia)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:22 +msgid "Setting up an <acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon with drakwizard sshd" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:24 +msgid "Welcome to the Open SSH wizard." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:28 +msgid "Select Type of Configure Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:31 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step1.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:35 +msgid "" +"Choose <guilabel>Expert</guilabel> for all options or <guilabel>Newbie</" +"guilabel> to skip steps 3-7, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:39 +msgid "General Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:42 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step2.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:46 +msgid "" +"Sets visibility and root access options. Port 22 is the standard " +"<acronym>SSH</acronym> port." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:50 +msgid "Authentication Methods" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:53 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step3.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:57 +msgid "" +"Allow a variety of authentication methods users can use while connecting, " +"then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:61 +msgid "Logging" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:64 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step4.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:68 +msgid "" +"Choose logging facility and level of output, then click <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:72 +msgid "Login Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:75 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step5.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:79 +msgid "Configure per-login settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:83 +msgid "User Login Options" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:86 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step6.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step6.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:90 +msgid "" +"Configure the user access settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><title> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:94 +msgid "Compression and Forwarding" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:97 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step7.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step7.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><procedure><step><para> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:101 +msgid "" +"Configure X11 forwarding and compression during transfer, then click " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:108 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step8.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step8.png" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><procedure><step><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakwizard_sshd.xml:119 +msgid "drakwizard-sshd-step9.png" +msgstr "drakwizard-sshd-step9.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:3 +msgid "Manage system services by enabling or disabling them" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:4 +msgid "drakxservices" +msgstr "drakxservices" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:8 +msgid "drakxservices.png" +msgstr "drakxservices.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/drakxservices.xml:13 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">drakxservices</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:10 +msgid "Hardware configuration" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:12 +msgid "harddrake2" +msgstr "harddrake2" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:17 +msgid "harddrake2.png" +msgstr "harddrake2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">harddrake2</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> gives a general view of " +"the hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job " +"to look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command " +"<code>ldetect </code>which refers to a list of hardware in <code>ldetect-" +"lst</code> package." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:31 +msgid "The window" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:33 +msgid "The window is divided in two columns." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:35 +msgid "" +"The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are " +"grouped by categories. Click on the > to expand the content of a " +"category. Each device can be selected in this column." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:39 +msgid "" +"The right column displays information about the selected device. The " +"<guimenu>Help -> Fields description</guimenu> gives some information " +"about the content of the fields." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:43 +msgid "" +"According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are " +"available at the bottom of the right column:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:48 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be used to " +"parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must " +"used by experts only." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:54 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which can " +"configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:68 +msgid "" +"The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to " +"enable automatic detection:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:73 +msgid "modem" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:77 +msgid "Jaz devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:81 +msgid "Zip parallel devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/harddrake2.xml:83 +msgid "" +"By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check " +"the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will " +"be operational the next time this tool is started." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:7 +msgid "keyboarddrake" +msgstr "keyboarddrake" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:12 +msgid "keyboarddrake.png" +msgstr "keyboarddrake.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">keyboarddrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:19 +msgid "" +"The keyboarddrake tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> helps you " +"configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on Mageia. " +"It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can be found " +"in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled " +"\"Configure mouse and keyboard\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:29 +msgid "Keyboard Layout" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed " +"in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each " +"layout should be used for." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:37 +msgid "Keyboard Type" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/keyboarddrake.xml:39 +msgid "" +"This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are " +"unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/localedrake.xml:10 +msgid "Manage localization for your system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/localedrake.xml:13 +msgid "localedrake" +msgstr "localedrake" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/localedrake.xml:18 +msgid "localedrake.png" +msgstr "localedrake.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">localedrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can be found in the " +"System section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled \"Manage " +"localization for your system\". It opens with a window in which you can " +"choose your language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during " +"installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate " +"compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:34 +msgid "" +"The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected " +"language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to " +"countries not listed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:38 +msgid "You have to restart your session after any modifications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/localedrake.xml:42 +msgid "Input method" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:44 +msgid "" +"In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an " +"input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input " +"methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, " +"Korean, etc)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:48 +msgid "" +"For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so " +"users should not need to configure it manually." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/localedrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions " +"and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another " +"part of the Mageia Control Center. See <xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:3 +msgid "View and search system logs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/logdrake.xml:5 +msgid "logdrake" +msgstr "logdrake" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/logdrake.xml:10 +msgid "logdrake.png" +msgstr "logdrake.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">logdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found in the Mageia " +"Control Center System tab, labelled \"<guilabel>View and search system logs</" +"guilabel>\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:22 +msgid "To do a search in the logs" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to <emphasis>do " +"not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s) to search in " +"the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is possible to " +"limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the month " +"and year, and check \"<guibutton>Show only for the selected day</guibutton>" +"\". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button to see the " +"results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the file</guilabel>. It is " +"possible to save the results in the .txt format by clicking on the <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Save</emphasis> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:36 +msgid "" +"The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia " +"configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools. These logs are " +"updated each time a configuration is modified." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/logdrake.xml:43 +msgid "To configure a mail alert" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:45 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and " +"the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured " +"address." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:49 +msgid "" +"To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Mail Alert</" +"emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton> Configure " +"the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the running " +"services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to look watch. " +"(See screenshot above)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:55 +msgid "The following services can be watched :" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:59 +msgid "Webmin Service" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:63 +msgid "Postfix Mail Server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:67 +msgid "FTP Server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:71 +msgid "Apache World Wide Web Server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:75 +msgid "SSH Server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:79 +msgid "Samba Server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:83 +msgid "Xinetd Service" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:87 +msgid "BIND Domain Name Resolve" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/logdrake.xml:91 +msgid "logdrake1.png" +msgstr "logdrake1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider " +"unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows " +"the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone " +"out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value " +"to 3 times the number of processors." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/logdrake.xml:103 +msgid "" +"In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the " +"person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local " +"or on the Internet)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:10 +msgid "Display Available NFS And SMB Shares" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:11 +msgid "lsnetdrake" +msgstr "lsnetdrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:16 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">lsnetdrake</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and " +"used on the command line." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lsnetdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you " +"can write this help, please contact <link ns2:href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/" +"en/Documentation_team\"> the Documentation team.</link> Thanking you in " +"advance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:3 +msgid "Display Your PCI, USB and PCMCIA Information" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:6 +msgid "lspcidrake" +msgstr "lspcidrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:10 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">lspcidrake</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:9 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> can only be started and " +"used on the command line. It will give some more information if used under " +"root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"lspcidrake gives the list of all the connected devices to the computer (USB, " +"PCI and PCMCIA) and the used drivers. It needs the ldetect and ldetect-lst " +"packages to work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:20 +msgid "lspcidrake1.png" +msgstr "lspcidrake1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:24 +msgid "" +"With the -v option, lspcidrake adds the vendor and device identifications." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"lspcidrake often generates very long lists, so, to find an information, it " +"is often used in a pipeline with the grep command, like in these examples:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:31 +msgid "Information about the graphic card;" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:33 +msgid "<command>lspcidrake | grep VGA</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:35 +msgid "Information about the network" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:37 +msgid "<command>lspcidrake | grep -i network</command>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:39 +msgid "-i to ignore case distinctions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:41 +msgid "" +"In this screenshot below, you can see the action of the -v option for " +"lspcidrake and the -i option for grep." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:46 +msgid "lspcidrake2.png" +msgstr "lspcidrake2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/lspcidrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"There is another tool that gives information about the hardware, it is " +"called <emphasis role=\"bold\">dmidecode</emphasis> (under root)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:3 +msgid "Software Packages Update" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:5 +msgid "MageiaUpdate or drakrpm-update" +msgstr "MageiaUpdate o drakrpm-update" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:10 +msgid "MageiaUpdate.png" +msgstr "MageiaUpdate.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis role=\"bold\">drakrpm-update</" +"emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software management.</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:20 +msgid "" +"To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with drakrpm-" +"editmedia with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you are " +"prompted to do so." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:25 +msgid "" +"As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists " +"those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by " +"default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the " +"<guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:30 +msgid "" +"By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of " +"the window. The print<emphasis role=\"bold\"> ></emphasis> before a title " +"means you can click to drop down a text." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><para><inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:38 en/mgaapplet-config.xml:21 +msgid "MageiaUpdate1.png" +msgstr "MageiaUpdate1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/MageiaUpdate.xml:35 +msgid "" +"When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by " +"displaying this red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject\" id=\"0\"/" +"> . Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:5 +msgid "Boot" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:10 +msgid "mcc-boot.png" +msgstr "mcc-boot.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:16 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot " +"steps. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:19 +msgid "Configure boot steps" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:21 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakautologin\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakautologin\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakboot\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakboot\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-boot.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakedm\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakedm\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><title> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:12 en/MCC.xml:4 +msgid "Mageia Control Center" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <book><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:14 +msgid "The tools to configure the Mageia system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <book><info><cover><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:17 +msgid "../mageia-2013.png" +msgstr "../mageia-2013.png" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:21 en/MCC.xml:6 +msgid "" +"The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA " +"3.0 license <link ns6:href=\"http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/" +"\">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:24 en/MCC.xml:9 +msgid "" +"This manual was produced with the help of the <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"calenco.com\">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link ns6:href=\"http://www." +"neodoc.biz\">NeoDoc</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <article><info><cover><para> +#: en/MCC-cover.xml:26 en/MCC.xml:11 +msgid "" +"It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link ns6:" +"href=\"https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team\">Documentation Team</" +"link>, if you would like to help improve this manual." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:4 +msgid "Hardware" +msgstr "Hardware" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-hardware.png" +msgstr "mcc-hardware.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:15 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your " +"hardware. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:20 +msgid "Manage your hardware" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:22 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"harddrake2\"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure hardware</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:27 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksound\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"draksound\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:34 +msgid "Configure graphics" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:36 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"drak3d\"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:41 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"XFdrake\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"XFdrake\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:48 +msgid "Configure mouse and keyboard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:50 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"keyboarddrake\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"keyboarddrake\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:54 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"mousedrake\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"mousedrake\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:61 +msgid "Configure printing and scanning" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:63 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"system-config-printer\"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s), " +"the print job queues, ...</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:68 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"scannerdrake\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"scannerdrake\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:75 en/mcc-network.xml:58 +msgid "Others" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-hardware.xml:77 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakups\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakups\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:3 +msgid "About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:6 +msgid "" +"The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options or tabs to " +"choose from in the left column, and even ten if the drakwizard package was " +"installed. Each of these tabs gives a different set of tools that can be " +"selected in the big right panel." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:8 +msgid "" +"The ten following chapters are about those ten options and the related tools." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:10 +msgid "" +"The last chapter is about some other Mageia tools, that cannot be chosen in " +"any of the MCC tabs." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:12 +msgid "" +"The titles of the pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool " +"screens." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-intro.xml:14 +msgid "" +"There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on " +"the \"Search\" tab in the left column." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:6 en/mcc-localdisks.xml:17 +msgid "Local disks" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:11 +msgid "mcc-localdisks.png" +msgstr "mcc-localdisks.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:15 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your " +"local disks. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:18 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakdisk\"></xref>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakdisk\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--removable\"></xref>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--removable\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-localdisks.xml:20 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--fileshare\"></xref>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--fileshare\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:4 en/mcc-networkservices.xml:17 +msgid "Network Services" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-networkservices.png" +msgstr "mcc-networkservices.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if " +"the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose " +"between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or " +"on <xref linkend=\"mcc-sharing\"/>to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_dhcp\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_dhcp\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_bind\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_bind\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:27 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_squid\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_squid\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:31 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_ntp\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_ntp\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networkservices.xml:35 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_sshd\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_sshd\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:4 +msgid "Network Sharing" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-networksharing.png" +msgstr "mcc-networksharing.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:13 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and " +"directories. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:17 +msgid "Configure Windows(R) shares" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:18 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--smb\"></xref>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--smb\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:19 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"draksambashare\"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and " +"directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:22 +msgid "Configure NFS shares" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--nfs\"></xref>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--nfs\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:24 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknfs\"></xref>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"draknfs\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:27 +msgid "Configure WebDAV shares" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-networksharing.xml:28 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--dav\"></xref>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"diskdrake--dav\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:3 +msgid "Network and Internet" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:8 +msgid "mcc-network.png" +msgstr "mcc-network.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:12 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link " +"below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:18 +msgid "Manage your network devices" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:21 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"draknetcenter\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect--del\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakconnect--del\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:36 +msgid "Personalize and Secure your network" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:39 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakproxy\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakproxy\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:43 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakgw\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakgw\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:47 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draknetprofile\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"draknetprofile\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:51 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakvpn\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakvpn\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-network.xml:61 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakhosts\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:5 en/mcc-security.xml:18 +msgid "Security" +msgstr "Seguranza" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:10 +msgid "mcc-security.png" +msgstr "mcc-security.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:16 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a " +"link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"msecgui\"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, " +"permissions and audit</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfirewall\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakfirewall\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:29 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"draksec\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"draksec\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:33 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakinvictus\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakinvictus\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-security.xml:37 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakguard\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakguard\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:4 en/mcc-sharing.xml:17 +msgid "Sharing" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:9 +msgid "mcc-sharing.png" +msgstr "mcc-sharing.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:15 +msgid "" +"This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only " +"visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can " +"choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link " +"below or on <xref linkend=\"mcc-networkservices\"/>to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_proftpd\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_proftpd\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-sharing.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_apache2\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakwizard_apache2\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:3 +msgid "System" +msgstr "Sistema" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:7 +msgid "mcc-system.png" +msgstr "mcc-system.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:10 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several system and administration " +"tools. Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:14 +msgid "Manage system services" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:16 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakauth\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakauth\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:19 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakxservices\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakxservices\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:22 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakfont\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakfont\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:28 +msgid "Localization" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:30 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakclock\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakclock\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:33 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"localedrake\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"localedrake\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><title> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:39 +msgid "Administration tools" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:41 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"logdrake\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"logdrake\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:44 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakconsole\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakconsole\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:47 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"userdrake\"/><emphasis> = Manage users on system</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/mcc-system.xml:50 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"transfugdrake\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"transfugdrake\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:3 +msgid "Configure updates frequency" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:5 +msgid "mgaapplet-config" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:10 +msgid "mgaapplet-config.png" +msgstr "mgaapplet-config.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is present in the Mageia " +"Control Center under the tab <emphasis role=\"bold\">Software management</" +"emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click / Updates " +"configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <placeholder type=\"inlinemediaobject" +"\" id=\"1\"/> in the system tray." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mgaapplet-config.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for " +"updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check. The " +"check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is out." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the pointer device (mouse, touchpad)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:6 +msgid "mousedrake" +msgstr "mousedrake" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:11 +msgid "mousedrake.png" +msgstr "mousedrake.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:15 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">mousedrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by " +"Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/mousedrake.xml:23 +msgid "" +"The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse " +"and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time \"Universal / Any " +"PS/2 & USB mice\" is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is " +"immediately taken into account." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:3 +msgid "MSEC: System Security and Audit" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/msecgui.xml:5 +msgid "msecgui" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:13 +msgid "msecgui.png" +msgstr "msecgui.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">msecgui</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:21 +msgid "" +"msecgui<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is a graphic user interface " +"for msec that allows to configure your system security according to two " +"approaches:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:28 +msgid "" +"It sets the system behaviour, msec imposes modifications to the system to " +"make it more secure." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:33 +msgid "" +"It carries on periodic checks automatically on the system in order to warn " +"you if something seems dangerous." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:38 +msgid "" +"msec uses the concept of \"security levels\" which are intended to configure " +"a set of system permissions, which can be audited for changes or " +"enforcement. Several of them are proposed by Mageia, but you can define your " +"own customised security levels." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:45 +msgid "Overview tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:47 +msgid "See the screenshot above" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:49 +msgid "" +"The first tab takes up the list of the different security tools with a " +"button on the right side to configure them:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:54 +msgid "" +"Firewall, also found in the MCC / Security / Set up your personal firewall" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:59 +msgid "Updates, also found in MCC / Software Management / Update your system" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:64 +msgid "msec itself with some information:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:68 +msgid "enabled or not" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:72 +msgid "the configured Base security level" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:76 +msgid "" +"the date of the last Periodic checks and a button to see a detailed report " +"and another button to execute the checks just now." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:86 +msgid "Security settings tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:88 +msgid "" +"A click on the second tab or on the Security <guibutton>Configure</" +"guibutton> button leads to the same screen shown below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:94 +msgid "msecgui2.png" +msgstr "msecgui2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:100 +msgid "Basic security tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:103 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security levels:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:106 +msgid "" +"After having checked the box <guilabel>Enable MSEC tool</guilabel>, this tab " +"allows you by a double click to choose the security level that appears then " +"in bold. If the box is not checked, the level « none » is applied. The " +"following levels are available:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:113 +msgid "" +"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">none</emphasis>. This level is intended if you " +"do not want to use msec to control system security, and prefer tuning it on " +"your own. It disables all security checks and puts no restrictions or " +"constraints on system configuration and settings. Please use this level only " +"if you are knowing what you are doing, as it would leave your system " +"vulnerable to attack." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:122 +msgid "" +"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">standard</emphasis>. This is the default " +"configuration when installed and is intended for casual users. It " +"constrains several system settings and executes daily security checks which " +"detect changes in system files, system accounts, and vulnerable directory " +"permissions. (This level is similar to levels 2 and 3 from past msec " +"versions)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:131 +msgid "" +"Level <emphasis role=\"bold\">secure</emphasis>. This level is intended when " +"you want to ensure your system is secure, yet usable. It further restricts " +"system permissions and executes more periodic checks. Moreover, access to " +"the system is more restricted. (This level is similar to levels 4 (High) and " +"5 (Paranoid) from old msec versions)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:140 +msgid "" +"Besides those levels, different task-oriented security are also provided, " +"such as the <emphasis role=\"bold\">fileserver </emphasis>, <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">webserver</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"bold\">netbook</emphasis> " +"levels. Such levels attempt to pre-configure system security according to " +"the most common use cases." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:149 +msgid "" +"The last two levels called <emphasis role=\"bold\">audit_daily </emphasis> " +"and <emphasis role=\"bold\">audit_weekly</emphasis> are not really security " +"levels but rather tools for periodic checks only." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:156 +msgid "" +"These levels are saved in <filename>/etc/security/msec/level.<levelname></" +"filename>. You can define your own customised security levels, saving them " +"into specific files called <filename>level.<levelname></filename>, placed " +"into the folder <filename>/etc/security/msec/.</filename> This function is " +"intended for power users which require a customised or more secure system " +"configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:165 +msgid "" +"Keep in mind that user-modified parameters take precedence over default " +"level settings." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:170 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security alerts:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:173 +msgid "" +"If you check the box <guibutton>Send security alerts by email to:</" +"guibutton>, the security alerts generated by msec are going to be sent by " +"local e-mail to the security administrator named in the nearby field. You " +"can fill either a local user or a complete e-mail address (the local e-mail " +"and the e-mail manager must be set accordingly). At last, you can receive " +"the security alerts directly on your desktop. Check the relevant box to " +"enable it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><important><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:182 +msgid "" +"It is strongly advisable to enable the security alerts option in order to " +"immediately inform the security administrator of possible security problems. " +"If not, the administrator will have to regularly check the logs files " +"available in <filename>/var/log/security.</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:188 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"underline\">Security options:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:190 +msgid "" +"Creating a customised level is not the only way to customise the computer " +"security, it is also possible to use the tabs presented here after to change " +"any option you want. Current configuration for msec is stored in <filename>/" +"etc/security/msec/security.conf</filename>. This file contains the current " +"security level name and the list of all the modifications done to the " +"options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:199 +msgid "System security tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:201 +msgid "" +"This tab displays all the security options on the left side column, a " +"description in the centre column, and their current values on the right side " +"column." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:207 +msgid "msecgui3.png" +msgstr "msecgui3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:211 +msgid "" +"To modify an option, double click on it and a new window appears (see " +"screenshot below). It displays the option name, a short description, the " +"actual and default values, and a drop down list where the new value can be " +"selected. Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the " +"choice." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:219 +msgid "msecgui11.png" +msgstr "msecgui11.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:224 +msgid "" +"Do not forget when leaving msecgui to save definitively your configuration " +"using the menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you " +"have changed the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before " +"saving them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:232 +msgid "msecgui10.png" +msgstr "msecgui10.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:238 +msgid "Network security" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:240 +msgid "" +"This tab displays all the network options and works like the previous tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:245 +msgid "msecgui4.png" +msgstr "msecgui4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:251 +msgid "Periodic checks tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:253 +msgid "" +"Periodic checks aim to inform the security administrator by means of " +"security alerts of all situations msec thinks potentially dangerous." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:257 +msgid "" +"This tab displays all the periodic checks done by msec and their frequency " +"if the box <guibutton>Enable periodic security checks</guibutton> is " +"checked. Changes are done like in the previous tabs." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:264 +msgid "msecgui5.png" +msgstr "msecgui5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:270 +msgid "Exceptions tab" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:272 +msgid "" +"Sometimes alert messages are due to well known and wanted situations. In " +"these cases they are useless and wasted time for the administrator. This tab " +"allows you to create as many exceptions as you want to avoid unwanted alert " +"messages. It is obviously empty at the first msec start. The screenshot " +"below shows four exceptions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:280 +msgid "msecgui6.png" +msgstr "msecgui6.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:284 +msgid "" +"To create an exception, click on the <guibutton>Add a rule</guibutton> button" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:289 +msgid "msecgui7.png" +msgstr "msecgui7.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:293 +msgid "" +"Select the wanted periodic check in the drop down list called " +"<guilabel>Check</guilabel> and then, enter the <guilabel>Exception</" +"guilabel> in the text area. Adding an exception is obviously not definitive, " +"you can either delete it using the <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button of " +"the <guilabel>Exceptions</guilabel> tab or modify it with a double clicK." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><title> +#: en/msecgui.xml:303 +msgid "Permissions" +msgstr "Permisos" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:304 +msgid "" +"This tab is intended for file and directory permissions checking and " +"enforcement." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:306 +msgid "" +"Like for the security, msec owns different permissions levels (standard, " +"secure, ..), they are enabled accordingly with the chosen security level. " +"You can create your own customised permissions levels, saving them into " +"specific files called <filename>perm.<levelname> </filename> placed into " +"the folder <filename>/etc/security/msec/</filename> . This function is " +"intended for power users which require a customised configuration. It is " +"also possible to use the tab presented here after to change any permission " +"you want. Current configuration is stored in <filename>/etc/security/msec/" +"perms.conf.</filename> This file contains the list of all the modifications " +"done to the permissions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:318 +msgid "msecgui8.png" +msgstr "msecgui8.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:321 +msgid "" +"Default permissions are visible as a list of rules (a rule per line). You " +"can see on the left side, the file or folder concerned by the rule, then the " +"owner, then the group and then the permissions given by the rule. If, for a " +"given rule:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:327 +msgid "" +"the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is not checked, msec only checks if the " +"defined permissions for this rule are respected and sends an alert message " +"if not, but does not change anything." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:333 +msgid "" +"the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is checked, then msec will rule the " +"permissions respect at the first periodic check and overwrite the " +"permissions." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><important><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:337 +msgid "" +"For this to work, the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Periodic check tab</emphasis> must be configured accordingly." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:339 +msgid "" +"To create a new rule, click on the <guibutton> Add a rule</guibutton> button " +"and fill the fields as shown in the example below. The joker * is allowed in " +"the <guilabel>File</guilabel> field. “current” means no modification." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/msecgui.xml:345 +msgid "msecgui9.png" +msgstr "msecgui9.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:348 +msgid "" +"Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the choice and do " +"not forget when leaving to save definitively your configuration using the " +"menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you have changed " +"the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before saving them." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><note><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:353 +msgid "" +"It is also possible to create or modify the rules by editing the " +"configuration file <filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf</filename>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:356 +msgid "" +"Changes in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Permission tab</emphasis> (or " +"directly in the configuration file) are taken into account at the first " +"periodic check (see the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role=\"bold" +"\">Periodic checks tab</emphasis>). If you want them to be taken immediately " +"into account, use the msecperms command in a console with root rights. You " +"can use before, the msecperms -p command to know the permissions that will " +"be changed by msecperms." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><section><caution><para> +#: en/msecgui.xml:363 +msgid "" +"Do not forget that if you modify the permissions in a console or in a file " +"manager, for a file where the box <guilabel>Enforce </guilabel> is checked " +"in the <emphasis role=\"bold\">Permissions tab </emphasis>, msecgui will " +"write the old permissions back after a while, accordingly to the " +"configuration of the options CHECK_PERMS and CHECK_PERMS_ENFORCE in the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Periodic Checks tab </emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:4 +msgid "Other Mageia Tools" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:7 +msgid "" +"There are more Mageia tools than those that can be started in the Mageia " +"Control Center. Click on a link below to learn more, or continue reading the " +"next pages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:11 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakbug\"/><emphasis>drakbug</emphasis>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"drakbug\"/><emphasis>drakbug</emphasis>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:16 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"drakbug_report\"/><emphasis>drakbug_report </emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:21 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"lsnetdrake\"/><emphasis>TO BE WRITTEN </emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:25 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"lspcidrake\"/>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"lspcidrake\"/>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/otherMageiaTools.xml:29 +msgid "And more tools?" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:3 +msgid "Software Management (Install and Remove Software)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:6 +msgid "rpmdrake" +msgstr "rpmdrake" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:11 +msgid "rpmdrake.png" +msgstr "rpmdrake.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:18 +msgid "Introduction to rpmdrake" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:20 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/>, also known as drakrpm, " +"is a program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the " +"graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online " +"package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official " +"servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages " +"available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only " +"certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by " +"default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed " +"packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries " +"of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names " +"included in the packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:35 +msgid "" +"To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref linkend=" +"\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/> ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><important><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:43 +msgid "rpmdrake8.png" +msgstr "rpmdrake8.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><important><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:38 +msgid "" +"During the installation, the configured repository is the medium used for " +"the installation, generally the DVD or CD. If you keep this medium, rpmdrake " +"will ask it each time you want to install a package, with this pop-up " +"window : <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>If the above message " +"annoys you and you have a good internet connection without too strict " +"download limit, it is wise to remove that medium and replace it by online " +"repositories thanks to <xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"/> ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><important><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:49 +msgid "" +"Moreover, the online repositories are always up to date, contains much more " +"packages, and allow to update your installed packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:55 +msgid "The main parts of the screen" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:60 +msgid "rpmdrake1.png" +msgstr "rpmdrake1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:67 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Package type filter:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:69 +msgid "" +"This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first " +"time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical " +"interface. You can display either all the packages and all their " +"dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only, " +"updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><warning><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:77 +msgid "" +"The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who " +"probably do not want command line or specialist tools. Since you're reading " +"this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge " +"of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to \"All\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<firstterm> <emphasis role=\"bold\">Package state filter:</emphasis> </" +"firstterm>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:89 +msgid "" +"This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the " +"packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and " +"not installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:95 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Search mode:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their " +"summaries, through their complete description or through the files included " +"in the packages." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:103 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">\"Find\" box:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:105 +msgid "" +"Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword " +"for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for \"mplayer\" and " +"\"xine\" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:111 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Erase all:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:113 +msgid "" +"This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the \"Find\" " +"box ." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:118 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Categories list:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:120 +msgid "" +"This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and " +"sub categories." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:125 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Description panel:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:127 +msgid "" +"This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete " +"description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It " +"can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the " +"package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:137 +msgid "The status column" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:139 +msgid "" +"Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by " +"category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A " +"list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium " +"is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is " +"installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or " +"uncheck the box before the package name and click on <guibutton>Apply</" +"guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:155 +msgid "Icon" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><thead><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:157 +msgid "Legend" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:165 +msgid "../rpmdrake2.png" +msgstr "../rpmdrake2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:169 +msgid "This package is already installed" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:175 +msgid "../rpmdrake3.png" +msgstr "../rpmdrake3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:179 +msgid "This package will be installed" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:185 +msgid "../rpmdrake4.png" +msgstr "../rpmdrake4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:189 +msgid "This package cannot be modified" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:195 +msgid "../rpmdrake5.png" +msgstr "../rpmdrake5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:199 +msgid "This package is an update" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:205 +msgid "../rpmdrake6.png" +msgstr "../rpmdrake6.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><table><tgroup><tbody><row><entry> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:209 +msgid "This package will be uninstalled" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:147 +msgid "<placeholder type=\"table\" id=\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:215 +msgid "Examples in the screenshot above:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:219 +msgid "" +"If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status " +"icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking " +"on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:227 +msgid "" +"If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange " +"with a down arrow status icon will appear and it will be installed when " +"clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:235 +msgid "The dependencies" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><screenshot><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:240 +msgid "rpmdrake7.png" +msgstr "rpmdrake7.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/rpmdrake.xml:245 +msgid "" +"Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They " +"are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an " +"information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected " +"dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It " +"may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed " +"library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a " +"button to get more information and another button to choose which package to " +"install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:10 +msgid "Set up scanner" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:11 +msgid "scannerdrake" +msgstr "scannerdrake" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:18 +msgid "Installation" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing " +"<emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> allows you to configure " +"a single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. " +"It also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a " +"remote computer or to access remote scanners." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:29 +msgid "" +"When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following " +"message:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:32 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>\"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:35 +msgid "<emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?\"</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:38 +msgid "" +"Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install <code>scanner-" +"gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet installed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:44 +msgid "scannerdrake.png" +msgstr "scannerdrake.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:50 +msgid "" +"If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see " +"the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance, " +"<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:55 +msgid "" +"In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner " +"sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref linkend=" +"\"scannersharing\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:59 +msgid "" +"However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its " +"cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new " +"scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a " +"scanner manually</emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:64 +msgid "" +"Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the " +"list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:69 +msgid "scannerdrake2.png" +msgstr "scannerdrake2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:76 +msgid "" +"If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click <emphasis>Cancel</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:79 +msgid "" +"Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link xlink:href=" +"\"http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html\">SANE: Supported " +"Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link xlink:href=\"http://forums." +"mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:87 +msgid "Choose port" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><figure><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:91 +msgid "scannerdrake3.png" +msgstr "scannerdrake3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><figure> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:86 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"info\" id=\"0\"/> <placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=" +"\"1\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:97 +msgid "" +"You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available ports</" +"emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that case, " +"select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:102 +msgid "" +"After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen " +"similar to the one below." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:104 +msgid "" +"If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref linkend=" +"\"scannerextrasteps\"/>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:108 +msgid "scannerdrake4.png" +msgstr "scannerdrake4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:117 +msgid "Scannersharing" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:122 +msgid "scannerdrake5.png" +msgstr "scannerdrake5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be " +"accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also " +"decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on " +"this machine." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:133 +msgid "" +"Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or " +"deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on " +"this computer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:137 +msgid "" +"Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted " +"from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:143 +msgid "scannerdrake6.png" +msgstr "scannerdrake6.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:149 +msgid "Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:153 +msgid "scannerdrake7.png" +msgstr "scannerdrake7.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:159 +msgid "" +"Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote " +"machines." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:164 +msgid "scannerdrake8.png" +msgstr "scannerdrake8.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:170 +msgid "\"All remote machines\" are allowed to access the local scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:175 +msgid "scannerdrake9.png" +msgstr "scannerdrake9.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:181 +msgid "" +"If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool " +"offers to do it." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:184 +msgid "At the end, the tool will alter these files:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:186 +msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:188 +msgid "<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:190 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive " +"\"net\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:193 +msgid "" +"It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and <emphasis>xinetd</" +"emphasis> to be started on boot." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:199 en/system-config-printer.xml:278 +msgid "Specifics" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:205 +msgid "Hewlett-Packard" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:207 +msgid "" +"Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis> " +"(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow " +"you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device Manager</" +"emphasis>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:214 +msgid "Epson" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:216 +msgid "" +"Drivers are available from <link xlink:href=\"http://download.ebz.epson.net/" +"dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this page</link>. When indicated, you must " +"install the <emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then " +"<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the " +"<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict " +"with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be " +"ignored." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><info><title> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:231 +msgid "Extra installation steps" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:234 +msgid "" +"It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref " +"linkend=\"choosescannerport\"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra " +"steps to correctly configure your scanner." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:239 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded " +"each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device, " +"after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the " +"firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you " +"downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:241 +msgid "" +"When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at " +"each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:246 +msgid "" +"Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the <emphasis>/etc/sane.d/" +"\"name_of_your_SANE_backend\".conf file.</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/scannerdrake.xml:250 +msgid "" +"Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know " +"what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link xlink:href=\"http://" +"forums.mageia.org/en/\">forums</link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/software-management.xml:5 en/software-management.xml:15 +msgid "Software Management" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/software-management.xml:10 +msgid "software-management.png" +msgstr "software-management.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:14 +msgid "" +"In this screen you can choose between several tools for software management. " +"Click on a link below to learn more." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:17 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>" +msgstr "<xref linkend=\"rpmdrake\"></xref>" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:20 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"MageiaUpdate\"></xref><emphasis> = Update your system</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:23 +msgid "<xref linkend=\"mgaapplet-config\"></xref>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/software-management.xml:26 +msgid "" +"<xref linkend=\"drakrpm-edit-media\"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media " +"sources for install and update</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:8 +msgid "Install and configure a printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:11 +msgid "system-config-printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:16 +msgid "system-config-printer.png" +msgstr "system-config-printer.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:23 +msgid "" +"Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own <link " +"ns2:title=\"CUPS\" ns2:href=\"http://localhost:631\">configuration " +"interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia " +"offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer " +"which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu " +"and openSUSE." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:30 +msgid "" +"You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the " +"installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:37 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>system-" +"config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be asked for." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:34 +msgid "" +"Printer installation is carried out in the <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> " +"section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the <guilabel>Configure " +"printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/" +">." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:42 +msgid "MCC will ask for the installation two packages:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:45 +msgid "task-printing-server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><blockquote><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:47 +msgid "task-printing-hp" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:50 +msgid "" +"It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of " +"dependencies are needed." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:53 +msgid "" +"To add a printer, choose the \"Add\" printer button. The system will try to " +"detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a " +"printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a " +"printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line. The window " +"will also attempt to configure a network printer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:61 +msgid "Automatically detected printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:63 +msgid "" +"This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the " +"name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click \"Next" +"\". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be " +"automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known " +"drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the " +"next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend=\"terminate\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:72 +msgid "No automatically detected printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:76 +msgid "printer3.png" +msgstr "printer3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:80 +msgid "" +"When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window " +"to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following " +"options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:86 +msgid "Select printer from database" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:92 +msgid "provide PPD file" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:98 +msgid "search for a driver to download" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:102 +msgid "" +"By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer " +"first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one " +"driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have " +"encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one " +"which know to work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:110 +msgid "Complete the installation process" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:112 +msgid "" +"After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will " +"allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is " +"the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of " +"available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After " +"this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available " +"printers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:121 +msgid "Network printer" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:123 +msgid "" +"Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or " +"wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to " +"another workstation that serves as printserver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><note><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed " +"IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the same " +"as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a fixed " +"one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:134 +msgid "" +"The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or " +"printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a " +"configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label " +"on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a " +"Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on it " +"as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters " +"after \"HWaddr\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:142 +msgid "" +"You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to " +"your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose, " +"you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> - <guilabel>Find " +"Network Printer</guilabel> option in the <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu " +"and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it " +"says \"host\"." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:149 +msgid "" +"If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a " +"protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the " +"list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:154 +msgid "" +"Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find " +"which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:160 +msgid "Network printing protocols" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:162 +msgid "" +"One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as " +"JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network " +"via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is " +"known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers " +"which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the IP-" +"address is that of the router. Note that the tool \"Hp Device manager\" can " +"manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like <emphasis>hp:/" +"net/<name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case, fixed IP-adress is " +"not required." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:172 +msgid "" +"Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the " +"protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change " +"the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be " +"changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is " +"the same as above." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:180 +msgid "printer5.png" +msgstr "printer5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:184 +msgid "The other protocols are:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:188 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer which can " +"be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer " +"connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by " +"some ADSL-routers." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:197 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the same as ipp, " +"but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol. The port has to be " +"defined. By default, the port 631 is used." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:205 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same as ipp, but " +"with TLS secured protocol." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:212 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which can be " +"accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer " +"connected to a station using LPD." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:220 +msgid "" +"<emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer connected to a " +"station running Windows or a SMB server and shared." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:226 +msgid "" +"The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form " +"the URI:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:231 +msgid "Appsocket" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:233 +msgid "<uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:237 +msgid "Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:239 +msgid "<uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:241 +msgid "<uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:245 +msgid "Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><itemizedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:247 +msgid "<uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:251 +msgid "" +"Additional information can be found in the <link ns2:href=\"http://www.cups." +"org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html\">CUPS documentation.</link>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:256 +msgid "Device Properties" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:258 +msgid "" +"You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to " +"parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your " +"system, but you can specify a different one with the <guimenu>Server</" +"guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu, another window which " +"gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters of the server, " +"following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><title> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:268 +msgid "Troubleshoot" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:270 +msgid "" +"You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by " +"inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:273 +msgid "" +"You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the <guimenu>Help</" +"guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:280 +msgid "" +"It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in " +"Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the <link ns2:" +"href=\"http://openprinting.org/printers/\">openprinting</link> site to check " +"if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package is " +"already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then, redo " +"the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report the " +"problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this tool " +"and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer works " +"or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other up-to-date " +"drivers or for more recent devices." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:292 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Brother printers</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:294 +msgid "" +"<link ns2:href=\"http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/" +"en/download_prn.html\">This page</link> give a list of drivers provided by " +"Brother. Search the driver for your device, download the rpm(s) and install." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:298 +msgid "" +"You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:301 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one devices</" +"emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:304 +msgid "" +"These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the " +"detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information " +"<link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html\">here</" +"link>. The tool \"HP Device Manager\" is available in the <guilabel>System</" +"guilabel> menu. Also view <link ns2:href=\"http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-" +"web/install/manual/hp_setup.html\">configuration</link> for the management " +"of the printer." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:311 +msgid "" +"A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner " +"features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't " +"allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate). In this " +"case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the " +"picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device. Afterwards, " +"open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory " +"card which is appeared in the /media folder." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:319 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Samsung colour printer</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:321 +msgid "" +"For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link ns2:href=\"http://" +"foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/\">this site provides drivers</link> for the QPDL " +"protocol." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:324 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:326 +msgid "" +"Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link ns2:href=\"http://" +"download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX\">this search page</" +"link>. For the scanner part, you must install the \"iscan-data\" package " +"first, then \"iscan\" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also be " +"available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages " +"according to your architecture." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:332 +msgid "" +"It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a " +"conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:336 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Canon printers</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><section><para> +#: en/system-config-printer.xml:338 +msgid "" +"For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint " +"<link ns2:href=\"http://www.turboprint.info/\">available here </link>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:9 +msgid "Import Windows(TM) documents and settings" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:12 +msgid "transfugdrake" +msgstr "transfugdrake" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:17 +msgid "transfugdrake.png" +msgstr "transfugdrake.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:21 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center " +"labeled <guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings " +"from a <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark " +"class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark class=\"registered" +"\">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark> installation on the same " +"computer as the Mageia installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:33 +msgid "" +"Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake " +"immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:37 +msgid "" +"After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some " +"explanation about the tool and import options." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:40 +msgid "" +"As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of " +"<trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> installation." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:44 +msgid "" +"When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to " +"choose accounts in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> and " +"Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account " +"than yours own." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:51 +msgid "transfugdrake1.png" +msgstr "transfugdrake1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:56 +msgid "" +"Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of " +"transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark> user account names with special symbols can be displayed " +"incorrectly." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:62 +msgid "" +"Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:67 +msgid "" +"Some <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> applications " +"(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For " +"example, NVidia drivers in <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark>are updated using <emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not " +"use such accounts for the import purposes." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:74 +msgid "" +"When you finished with the accounts selection press <guibutton>Next</" +"guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import " +"documents:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:80 +msgid "transfugdrake2.png" +msgstr "transfugdrake2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:84 +msgid "" +"Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark class=\"registered\">Windows</" +"trademark> data from <emphasis>My Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</" +"emphasis> and <emphasis>My Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to " +"skip import by selecting the appropriate item in this window." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:89 +msgid "" +"When you finished with the document import method choosing press " +"<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method " +"to import bookmarks:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:95 +msgid "transfugdrake3.png" +msgstr "transfugdrake3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:99 +msgid "" +"Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and " +"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia " +"<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:103 +msgid "" +"Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> " +"button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:112 +msgid "The next page allows you to import desktop background:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:116 +msgid "transfugdrake4.png" +msgstr "transfugdrake4.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:120 +msgid "" +"Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:123 +msgid "" +"The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the " +"<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/transfugdrake.xml:128 +msgid "transfugdrake5.png" +msgstr "transfugdrake5.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/userdrake.xml:11 +msgid "Users and Groups" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/userdrake.xml:13 +msgid "userdrake" +msgstr "userdrake" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:18 +msgid "userdrake.png" +msgstr "userdrake.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:23 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis role=" +"\"bold\">userdrake</emphasis> as root." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:22 +msgid "" +"This tool<placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=\"0\"/> is found under the " +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center " +"labelled \"Manage users on system\"" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:27 +msgid "" +"The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this " +"means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings " +"(ID, shell, ...)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:31 +msgid "" +"When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in " +"the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the " +"<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:35 +msgid "<guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:37 +msgid "This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:41 +msgid "userdrake1.png" +msgstr "userdrake1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:45 +msgid "" +"The field <emphasis role=\"bold\">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the " +"entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything " +"or nothing as well!" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:49 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login</emphasis> is the only required field." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:52 +msgid "" +"Setting a <emphasis role=\"bold\">Password</emphasis> is highly recommended. " +"There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the password is weak, " +"too short or is too similar to the login name. You should use figures, lower " +"and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The shield will turn " +"orange and then green as the password strength improves." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:59 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure " +"you entered what you intended to." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:62 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that " +"allows you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options " +"are Bash, Dash and Sh." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:66 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if " +"checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new " +"user as the only member (this may be edited)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:70 +msgid "" +"The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately " +"after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:73 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">2 Add Group</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:75 +msgid "" +"You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific " +"group ID." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:78 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:80 +msgid "" +"<guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given " +"for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:83 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Account Info</emphasis>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:87 +msgid "userdrake2.png" +msgstr "userdrake2.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:91 +msgid "" +"The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account. " +"Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary " +"accounts." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:95 +msgid "" +"The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long " +"as the account is locked." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:98 +msgid "It is also possible to change the icon." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:100 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an " +"expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his " +"password periodically." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/userdrake.xml:106 +msgid "userdrake3.png" +msgstr "userdrake3.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:110 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups " +"that the user is a member of." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><note><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:114 +msgid "" +"If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be " +"effective until his/her next login." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:118 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:120 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the " +"group name." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:123 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the " +"users who are members of the group" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:126 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">5 Delete</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:128 +msgid "" +"Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis role=\"bold\">Delete</" +"emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to ask if home " +"directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group has been " +"created for the user, it will be deleted as well." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><warning><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:133 +msgid "It is possible to delete a group which is not empty." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:136 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">6 Refresh</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:138 +msgid "" +"The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to " +"refresh the display." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:141 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">7 Guest Account</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/userdrake.xml:143 +msgid "" +"<emphasis role=\"bold\">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is " +"intended to give somebody temporary access to the system with total " +"security. Login is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to " +"make modifications to the system from this account. The personal directories " +"are deleted at the end of the session. This account is enabled by default, " +"to disable it, click in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest " +"account</guimenu>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><title> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:3 +msgid "Set up the graphical server" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><info><subtitle> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:5 +msgid "XFdrake" +msgstr "XFdrake" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:10 +msgid "XFdrake.png" +msgstr "XFdrake.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><footnote><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:17 +msgid "" +"You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis>XFdrake</" +"emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> as root. Mind the " +"capital letters." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:14 +msgid "" +"This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis " +"role=\"bold\">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the " +"graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>. <placeholder type=\"footnote\" id=" +"\"0\"/>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:24 +msgid "The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:26 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Graphic card</emphasis>:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:28 +msgid "" +"The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server " +"configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example " +"one with a proprietary driver." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:32 +msgid "" +"The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by " +"manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical " +"order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel> " +"Xorg</guilabel>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:38 +msgid "" +"In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most " +"graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while " +"in your Desktop Environment." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:42 +msgid "" +"If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - " +"<guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing " +"Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:47 +msgid "" +"If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you want to " +"use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for example)." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:53 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Monitor:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:55 +msgid "" +"In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and " +"you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor " +"isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the " +"<guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:62 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Resolution:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:64 +msgid "" +"This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the " +"colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Attribute 'fileref' of: <section><para><mediaobject><imageobject><imagedata> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:69 +msgid "XFdrake1.png" +msgstr "XFdrake1.png" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:67 +msgid "" +"<placeholder type=\"mediaobject\" id=\"0\"/>When you change the color depth, " +"a multi-colored bar will appear next to the second button and show a preview " +"of what the selected color depth looks like." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:75 +msgid "" +"The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another " +"one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card " +"and the monitor, it is possible to click on <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to " +"set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or " +"select an uncomfortable setting." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:81 +msgid "" +"The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for " +"another one." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:85 +msgid "" +"Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and " +"restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:92 +msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">Test:</emphasis>" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:94 +msgid "" +"Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking " +"on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the " +"graphical environment doesn't work." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para><note><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:99 +msgid "" +"In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a " +"text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use " +"XFdrake's text version." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:102 +msgid "" +"If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't want " +"to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything is " +"right, click on <guibutton role=\"bold\">OK</guibutton>." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><title> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:107 +msgid "Options:" +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:110 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable Ctrl-Alt-" +"Backspace</emphasis> is checked, it will no longer be possible to restart X " +"server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:116 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable " +"three specific features depending on the graphic card." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><orderedlist><listitem><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:121 +msgid "" +"<guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time, " +"<emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon booting</" +"emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it may be " +"unchecked for a server." +msgstr "" + +#. type: Content of: <section><para> +#: en/XFdrake.xml:128 +msgid "" +"After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system will ask " +"you to confirm. There is still time to cancel everything and keep the " +"previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect " +"and reconnect to activate the new configuration." +msgstr "" diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MCC-cover.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MCC-cover.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1438102f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MCC-cover.xml @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<book xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" + xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:lang="en" xml:id="MCC"> + + <info> + <title>Mageia Control Center</title> + <cover> + <para role="tagline">The tools to configure the Mageia system</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../mageia-2013.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>. + </para> + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>. + </para> + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + <article> + +<xi:include href="mcc-intro.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="software-management.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-sharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networkservices.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-hardware.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-network.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-system.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networksharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-localdisks.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-security.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-boot.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="otherMageiaTools.xml"></xi:include> + +</article> +</book> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MCC.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MCC.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..686be70f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MCC.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?><!-- Converted by db4-upgrade version 1.0 --> +<article xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:lang="en" xml:id="MCC"> + + <info> + <title>Mageia Control Center</title> + <cover> + <para xml:id="CC_BY-SA">The texts and screenshots in this manual are available under the CC BY-SA +3.0 license <link +ns6:href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/</link>. + </para> + <para>This manual was produced with the help of the <link +ns6:href="http://www.calenco.com">Calenco CMS</link> developed by <link +ns6:href="http://www.neodoc.biz">NeoDoc</link>. + </para> + <para>It was written by volunteers in their free time. Please contact <link +ns6:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team">Documentation +Team</link>, if you would like to help improve this manual.</para> + </cover> + </info> + + +<xi:include href="mcc-intro.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="software-management.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-sharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networkservices.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-hardware.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-network.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-system.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-networksharing.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-localdisks.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-security.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="mcc-boot.xml"></xi:include> + +<xi:include href="otherMageiaTools.xml"></xi:include> + +</article> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MageiaUpdate.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MageiaUpdate.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..98794ef6 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/MageiaUpdate.xml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="MageiaUpdate"> + <info> + <title xml:id="MageiaUpdate-ti1">Software Packages Update</title> + + <subtitle>MageiaUpdate o drakrpm-update</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="MageiaUpdate-im1" align="center" fileref="MageiaUpdate.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">MageiaUpdate</emphasis> or <emphasis +role="bold">drakrpm-update</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Software +management.</emphasis></para> + + <para><note> + <para>To work, MageiaUpdate needs the repositories to be configured with +drakrpm-editmedia with some media checked as updates. If they are not, you +are prompted to do so.</para> + </note></para> + + <para>As soon as this tool is launched, it scans the installed packages and lists +those with an update available in the repositories. They are all selected by +default to be automatically downloaded and installed. Click on the +<guibutton>Update</guibutton> button to start the process.</para> + + <para>By clicking on a package, more information is displayed in the lower half of +the window. The print<emphasis role="bold"> ></emphasis> before a title +means you can click to drop down a text.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>When updates are available, an applet in the system tray warns you by +displaying this red icon <inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject> +. Just click and enter the user password to update the system alike.</para> + </note></para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/XFdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/XFdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a08240ae --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/XFdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="XFdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="XFdrake-ti1">Set up the graphical server</title> + + <subtitle>XFdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="XFdrake-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="XFdrake.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis +role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>. Select <emphasis><guilabel>Set up the +graphical server</guilabel></emphasis>. <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +<emphasis>XFdrake</emphasis> as normal user or <emphasis>drakx11</emphasis> +as root. Mind the capital letters.</para> + </footnote></para> + + <para/> + + <para>The buttons allow you to change the graphical configuration.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Graphic card</emphasis>:</para> + + <para>The graphic card currently detected is displayed and the matching server +configured. Click on this button to change to another server, for example +one with a proprietary driver.</para> + + <para>The available servers are sorted under <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> by +manufacturer in alphabetical order and then by model also in alphabetical +order. The free drivers are sorted by alphabetical order under<guilabel> +Xorg</guilabel>.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>In case of problems, <emphasis>Xorg - Vesa</emphasis> will work with most +graphic cards and give you time to find and install the right driver while +in your Desktop Environment.</para> + + <para>If even Vesa doesn't work, choose <emphasis><guilabel>Xorg</guilabel> - +<guilabel>fbdev</guilabel></emphasis>, which is used while installing +Mageia, but doesn't allow you to change resolution or refresh rates.</para> + </note>If you made your choice for a free driver, you may be asked if you want to +use a proprietary driver instead with more features (3D effects for +example).</para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Monitor:</emphasis></para> + + <para>In the same way as above, the monitor currently detected is displayed and +you can click on the button to change to another one. If the desired monitor +isn't in the <guilabel>Vendor</guilabel> list, choose in the +<guilabel>Generic</guilabel> list a monitor with the same features.</para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Resolution:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This button allows the choice of the resolution (number of pixels) and the +colour depth (number of colours). It displays this screen:</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="XFdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>When you change the color depth, a +multi-colored bar will appear next to the second button and show a preview +of what the selected color depth looks like.</para> + + <para>The first button shows the currently resolution, click to change for another +one. The list gives all the possible choices according to the graphic card +and the monitor, it is possible to click on <guilabel>Other</guilabel> to +set other resolutions, but bear in mind that you can damage your monitor or +select an uncomfortable setting.</para> + + <para>The second button shows the currently colour depth, click to change this for +another one.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>Depending on the chosen resolution, it may be necessary to logout and +restart the graphical environment for the settings to take effect.</para> + </note></para> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Test:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Once the configuration done, it is recommended to do a test before clicking +on OK because it is easier to modify the settings now than later if the +graphical environment doesn't work.</para> + + <para><note> + <para>In case of a non working graphical environment, type Alt+Ctrl+F2 to open a +text environment, connect as root and type XFdrake (with the caps) to to use +XFdrake's text version.</para> + </note>If the test fails, just wait until the end, if it works but you don't want +to change after all, click on <guibutton>No</guibutton>, if everything is +right, click on <guibutton role="bold">OK</guibutton>.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <title>Options:</title> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Global options</guilabel>: If <emphasis>Disable +Ctrl-Alt-Backspace</emphasis> is checked, it will no longer be possible to +restart X server using Ctrl+Alt+Backspace keys.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Graphic card options</guilabel>: Allows you to enable or disable +three specific features depending on the graphic card.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>Graphical interface at startup</guilabel>: Most of the time, +<emphasis>Automatically start the graphical interface (Xorg) upon +booting</emphasis> is checked to make the boot switch to graphical mode, it +may be unchecked for a server.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <para>After a click on the <guibutton>Quit</guibutton> button, the system will ask +you to confirm. There is still time to cancel everything and keep the +previous configuration, or to accept. In this case, you have to disconnect +and reconnect to activate the new configuration.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--dav.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--dav.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8000d4d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--dav.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="diskdrake--dav" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--dav-ti1">Access WebDAV shared drives and directories</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --dav</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="diskdrake--dav1.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--dav-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --dav</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center, under the Network Sharing tab, labeled <guilabel>Configure +WebDAV shares</guilabel>.</para> + + <section> + <title>Introduction</title> + + <para><link xlink:href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/WebDAV">WebDAV</link> is a +protocol that allows to mount a web server's directory locally, so that it +appears as a local directory. It is necessary that the remote machine run a +WebDAV server. This is not the aim of this tool to configure the WebDAV +server.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Creating a new entry</title> + + <para>The first screen of the tool displays the already configured entries, if +any, and a <guibutton>New</guibutton> button. Use it to create a new +entry. Insert the server URL in the field of the new screen.</para> + + <para>Then you get a screen with radio buttons to select some actions. Continue +with the action <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> by clicking +<guibutton>OK</guibutton> after selecting the radio button, as the +<guibutton>Server</guibutton> is already configured. You can however correct +it, if needed.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The content of the remote directory will be accessible through this mount +point.</para> + + <para>In the next step, give your user name and password. If you need some other +options, you can give them in the <guibutton>advanced</guibutton> screen.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--dav4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The option <guibutton>Mount</guibutton> allows you to mount immediately the +access.</para> + + <para>After you accepted the configuration with the radio button +<guibutton>Done</guibutton>, the first screen is displayed again and your +new mount point is listed. After you choose <guibutton>Quit</guibutton>, you +are asked whether or not to save the modifications in +<emphasis>/etc/fstab</emphasis>. Choose this option if you want that the +remote directory is available at each boot. If your configuration is for +one-time usage, do not save it.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--fileshare.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--fileshare.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..09581505 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--fileshare.xml @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + + <info> + <!--2079.07.07 apb: Corrected syntax for userdrake link. --> +<title xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-ti1">Share your hard disk partitions</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --fileshare</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="diskdrake--fileshare.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="diskdrake--fileshare-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This simple tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --fileshare</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you, the +administrator, to allow users to share parts of their own /home +subdirectories with other users of a same local network which may have +computers running either Linux or Windows operating system.</para> + + <para>It is found in the Mageia Control Center, under the Local Disk tab, labelled +"Share your hard disk partitions".</para> + + <para>First, answer the question : "<guilabel>Would you like to allow users to +share some of their directories ?</guilabel>", click on <guibutton>No +sharing</guibutton> if the answer is no for all users, click on +<guibutton>Allow all users</guibutton> for all users and click on +<guibutton>Custom</guibutton> if the answer is no for some users and yes for +the others. In this last case, the users that are authorised to share their +directories must belong to the fileshare group, which is automatically +created by the system. You will be asked about this later.</para> + + <para>Click on <guilabel>OK</guilabel>, a second screen appears which asks you +choose between <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> or <guibutton>SMB</guibutton>. +Check <guibutton>NFS</guibutton> if Linux is the only operating system on +the network, check <guibutton>SMB</guibutton> if the network includes both +Linux and Windows machines and then click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Any +required packages will be installed if necessary.</para> + + <para>The configuration is now complete unless the Custom option was chosen. In +this case, an extra screen prompts you to open Userdrake. This tool allows +you to add users authorised to share their directories to the fileshare +group. In the User tab, click on the user to add to the fileshare group, +then on <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>, In the Groups tab. Check the +fileshare group and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. For more information +about Userdrake, see: <xref linkend="userdrake"/></para> + + <note> + <para>When adding a new user to the fileshare group, you have to disconnect and +reconnect the network for the modifications to be taken into account.</para> + </note> + + <para>From now on each user belonging to the fileshare group can select in his/her +file manager the directories to be shared, although not all file managers +have this facility.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--nfs.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--nfs.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d7fd7cb --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--nfs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:lang="en" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-ti1">Access NFS shared drives and directories</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --nfs</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="2" xml:id="diskdrake--nfs-im1" align="center" fileref="diskdrake--nfs.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <para>.</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>Introduction</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --nfs</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to declare some +shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The +protocol used for this is NFS which is available on most Linux or Unix +systems. The shared directory will be thus available directly at +boot. Shared directories can be also accessible directly in a single session +for a user with tools such as file browsers.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Procedure</title> + + <para>Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers +which share directories.</para> + + <para>Click on the > symbol before the server name to display the list of the +shared directories and select the directory you want to access.</para> + + <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs2.png"> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The button <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> will be available and you have +to specify where to mount the directory.</para> + + <mediaobject ns2:href="diskdrake--nfs3.png"> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>After choosing the mount point, You can mount it. You can also verify and +change some options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button. After +mounting the directory, you can unmount it with the same button.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>On accepting the configuration with the <guibutton>Done</guibutton> button, +a message will displayed, asking "Do you want to save the /etc/fstab +modifications". This will make the directory available at each boot, if the +network is accessible. The new directory is then available in your file +browser, for example in Dolphin.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--nfs6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--removable.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--removable.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5581c3b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--removable.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="diskdrake--removable"> + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--removable-ti1">CD/DVD burner</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --removable</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" fileref="diskdrake--removable.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="diskdrake--removable-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --removable</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote>is found under the tab Local +disks in the Mageia Control Center labelled accordingly with your removable +hardware (CD/DVD players and burners and floppy drives only). </para> + + <para>Its goal is to define the way your removable disk is mounted. </para> + + <para>At the top of the window there is a short description of your hardware and +the chosen options to mount it. Use the menu on the bottom to change +them. Check the item to be changed and then on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> +button. </para> + + <section> + <title>Mount point</title> + + <para>Check this box to change the mount point. The default one is /media/cdrom.</para> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Opciones</title> + + <para>Many mount options can be chosen here either directly in the list or via the +<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> submenu. The main are:</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>user/nouser</title> + + <para>user allows an ordinary user (not root) to mount the removable disk, this +option involves noexec, nosuid and nodev. The user who mounted the disk is +the only one who can umount it. </para> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--smb.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--smb.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..29c519e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/diskdrake--smb.xml @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="diskdrake--smb" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="diskdrake--smb-ti1">Access Windows (SMB) shared drives and directories</title> + + <subtitle>diskdrake --smb</subtitle> + + </info> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>Introduction</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake --smb</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to declare which +shared directories to be accessible to all users on the machine. The +protocol used for this is SMB which has been popularized on Windows(R) +systems. The shared directory will be available directly at boot. Shared +directories can be also accessed directly in a single session by a user with +tools such as file browsers.</para> + + <para>Before starting the tool, it is a good idea to declare the names of +available servers, for example with <xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Procedure</title> + + <para>Select <guibutton>search servers</guibutton> to obtain a list of servers who +share directories.</para> + + <para>Click on the server name and on > before the server name to display the +list of the shared directories and select the directory you want to access.</para> + + <para>The <guibutton>Mount point</guibutton> button will become available, you +have to specify where to mount the directory.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>After choosing the mount point, it can be mounted with the <guimenu>Mount +button</guimenu>. You can also verify and change some options with the +<guibutton>Options</guibutton> button.</para> + + <para>In options, you can specify the user name and the password of those able to +connect to the SMB server. After mounting the directory, you can unmount it +with the same button.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>After accepting the configuration with the Done button, a message will ask +"Do you want to save the /etc/fstab modifications". Saving, will allow +directory to made available at each boot, if the network is accessible. The +new directory is then available in your file browser, for example in +dolphin.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="diskdrake--smb5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drak3d.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drak3d.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..afc70028 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drak3d.xml @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drak3d" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drak3d-ti1">3D Desktop Effects</title> + + <subtitle>drak3d</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im1" revision="1" align="center" fileref="drak3d.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>Introduction</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drak3d</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> lets you manage the 3D +desktop effects on your operating system. 3D effects are turned off by +default.</para> + </section> + + <section annotations="center"> + <title>Getting Started</title> + + <para>To use this tool, you need to have the glxinfo package installed. If the +package is not installed, you will be prompted to do so before drak3d can +start.</para> + + <para>After starting drak3d, you will be presented with a menu window. Here you +can choose either <guilabel>No 3D Desktop Effects</guilabel> or +<guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel>. Compiz Fusion is part of a +composite/window manager, which includes hardware-accelerated special +effects for your desktop. Choose <guilabel>Compiz Fusion</guilabel> to turn +it on.</para> + + <para>If this is your first time using this program after a clean installation of +Mageia, you will get a warning message telling you which packages need to be +installed in order to use Compiz Fusion. Click on the +<guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button to continue.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drak3d-im3" fileref="drak3d_installing_CompizFusion.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Once the appropriate packages are installed, you will notice that Compiz +Fusion is selected in the drak3d menu, but you must log out and log back in +for the changes to take effect.</para> + + <para>After logging back in, Compiz Fusion will be activated. To configure Compiz +Fusion, see the page for the ccsm (CompizConfig Settings Manager) tool.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Troubleshooting</title> + + <section> + <title>Can't See Desktop after Logging in</title> + + <para>If after turning on Compiz Fusion you attempt to log back into your desktop +but can't see anything, restart your computer to get back to the log in +screen. Once there, click on the Desktop icon and select drak3d.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drak3d_troubleshooting_login_option.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>When you log in, if your account is listed as an administrator, you will be +prompted for your password again. Otherwise, use the administrator login +with his/her account. Then you can undo any changes that may have caused the +log in problem.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakauth.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakauth.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7288f61f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakauth.xml @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakauth" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakauth-ti1">Autenticación</title> + + <subtitle>drakauth</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakauth.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakauth-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakauth</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> enables you to modify the +manner in which you can be recognized as user of the machine or on the net.</para> + + <para>By default, information for your authentication is stored in a file on your +computer. Modify it only if your network administrator invites you to do so +and give information about that.</para> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakautologin.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakautologin.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..84bc2c30 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakautologin.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakautologin"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakautologin-ti1">Set up autologin to automatically log in</title> + + <subtitle>drakautologin</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakautologin-im1" fileref="drakautologin.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakautologin</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to automatically +login the same user, in her/his desktop environment, without asking for any +password. It's called autologin. This is generally a good idea when there +is only one user like to be using the machine.</para> + + <para>It is found under the <emphasis role="bold">Boot</emphasis> tab in the +Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up autologin to automatically log in".</para> + + <para>The interface buttons are pretty obvious:</para> + + <para>Check <guibutton>Launch the graphical environment when your system +starts</guibutton>, if you want X Window System to be executed after the +boot. If not, the system will start in text mode. Nevertheless, it will be +possible to launch the graphic interface manually. This can be done by +launching the command 'startx' or 'systemctl start dm'.</para> + + <para>If the first box is checked, two other options are available, check either +<guibutton>No, I don't want autologin</guibutton>, if you want the system to +continue to ask for which user to connect (and password) or check +<guibutton>Yes, I want autologin with this (user, desktop)</guibutton>, if +needed. In this case, you also need to supply the <guilabel>Default +username</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Default desktop</guilabel>.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakboot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakboot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a2ef1c32 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakboot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakboot" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakboot-ti1">Set up boot system</title> + + <subtitle>drakboot</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="drakboot--boot-im1" align="center" fileref="drakboot--boot.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If you are using a UEFI system instead of BIOS, the user interface is +slightly different as the boot device is obviously the EFI system Partition +(ESP).</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot--boot2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakboot</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to configure the +boot options (choice of the bootloader, set a password, the default boot, +etc.)</para> + + <para>It is found under the Boot tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled "Set up +boot system".</para> + + <warning> + <para>Don't use this tool if you don't know exactly what you are doing. Changing +some settings may prevent your machine from booting again !</para> + </warning> + + <para>In the first part, called <guilabel>Bootloader</guilabel>, it is possible if +using BIOS, to choose which <guibutton>Bootloader to use</guibutton>, Grub, +Grub2 or Lilo, and with a graphical or a text menu. It is just a question +of taste, there are no other consequences. You can also set the +<guibutton>Boot device</guibutton>, don't change anything here unless you +are an expert. The boot device is where the bootloader is installed and any +modification can prevent your machine from booting.</para> + + <para>In a UEFI system, the bootloader is <guilabel>Grub2-efi</guilabel> and is +installed in /boot/EFI partition. This FAT32 formatted partition is common +to all operating systems installed.</para> + + <para>In the second part, called <guilabel>Main options</guilabel>, you can set +the <guibutton>Delay before booting default image</guibutton>, in +seconds. During this delay, Grub or Lilo will display the list of available +operating systems, prompting you to make your choice. If no selection is +made, the bootloader will boot the default one once the delay elapses.</para> + + <para>In the third and last part, called <guibutton>Security</guibutton>, it is +possible to set a password for the bootloader. This means a username and +password will be asked at the boot time to select a booting entry or change +settings. The username is "root" and the password is the one chosen here.</para> + + <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button gives some extra options.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Enable ACPI:</guibutton></para> + + <para>ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is a standard for the +power management. It can save energy by stopping unused devices, this was +the method used before APM. Check this box if your hardware is ACPI +compatible.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Enable SMP:</guibutton></para> + + <para>SMP stands for Symmetric Multi Processors, it's an architecture for +multicore processors.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you have a processor with HyperThreading, Mageia will see it as a dual +processor and enable SMP.</para> + </note> + + <para><guibutton>Enable APIC</guibutton> and <guibutton>Enable Local +APIC:</guibutton></para> + + <para>APIC stands for Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller. There are two +components in the Intel APIC system, the local APIC (LAPIC) and the I/O +APIC. The latter one routes the interrupts it receives from peripheral buses +to one or more local APICs that are in the processor. It is really useful +for multi-processor systems. Some computers have problems with the APIC +system which can cause freezes or incorrect device detection (error message +"spurious 8259A interrupt: IRQ7"). In this case, disable APIC and/or Local +APIC.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The <guibutton>Next</guibutton> screen differs depending on which boot +loader you chose.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>You have Grub Legacy or Lilo:</para> + + <para>In this case, you can see the list of all the available entries at boot +time. The default one is asterisked. To change the order of the menu +entries, click on the up or down arrows to move the selected item. If you +click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> or <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> +buttons, a new window appears to add a new entry in the bootloader menu or +to modify an existing one. You need to be familiar with Lilo or Grub to be +able to use these tools.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field is freeform, write here what you want +to be displayed in the menu. It matches the Grub command "title". For +example: Mageia3.</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> field contains the kernel name. It matches +the Grub command "kernel". For example /boot/vmlinuz.</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Root</guilabel> field contains the device name where the +kernel is stored. It matches the Grub command "root". For example (hd0,1).</para> + + <para>The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to +the kernel at boot time.</para> + + <para>If the box <guilabel>Default</guilabel> is checked, Grub will boot this +entry by default.</para> + + <para>In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to +choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>, an <guilabel>initrd</guilabel> +file and a <guilabel>network profile</guilabel>, see <xref +linkend="draknetprofile"/>, in the drop-down lists.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>You have Grub2 or Grub2-efi (boot loaders used by default respectively in +Legacy mode and UEFI mode):</para> + + <para>In this case, the drop-down list labelled <guilabel>Default</guilabel> +displays all the available entries; click on the one wanted as the default +one.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The <guilabel>Append</guilabel> field contains the options to be given to +the kernel at boot time.</para> + + <para>If you have other operating systems installed, Mageia attempts to add them +to your Mageia boot menu. If you don't want this behaviour, uncheck the box +<guilabel>Probe Foreign OS</guilabel></para> + + <para>In the extra screen called <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>, it is possible to +choose the <guilabel>Video mode</guilabel>. If you don't want a bootable +Mageia, but to chain load it from another OS, check the box <guilabel>Do not +touch ESP or MBR</guilabel> and accept the warning.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <warning> + <para>Not installing on ESP or MBR means that the installation is not bootable +unless chain loaded from another OS.</para> + </warning> + + <para>To set many other parameters, you can use the tool named <emphasis>Grub +Customizer</emphasis>, available in the Mageia repositories (see below).</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakboot4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakbug.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakbug.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..428ce792 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakbug.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section +xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" +xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" +xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" +xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakbug" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakbug-ti1">Mageia Bug Report Tool</title><subtitle>drakbug</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakbug-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" + fileref="drakbug.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Usually, this tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakbug</emphasis>.</para></footnote> starts automatically +when a Mageia tool crashes. However, it is also possible that, after filing +a bug report, you are asked to start this tool to check some of the +information it gives, and then provide that in that existing bug report.</para> + + <para>If a new bug report needs to be filed and you are not used to doing that, +then please read <link +xlink:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/How_to_report_a_bug_properly">How to +report a bug report properly</link> before clicking on the "Report" button.</para> + + <para>In case the bug has already been filed by someone else (the error message +that drakbug gave will be the same, then), it is useful to add a comment to +that existing report that you saw the bug, too.</para> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakbug_report.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakbug_report.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..91d5bb2f --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakbug_report.xml @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section +xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" +xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" +xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" +xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xml:id="drakbug_report" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="drakbug_report-ti1">Collect Logs and System Information for Bug Reports</title><subtitle>drakbug_report</subtitle> + </info> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakbug_report</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can only be started and used +on the command line.</para> + +<para>It is advised to write the output of this command to a file, for instance by +doing <emphasis role="bold">drakbug_report > drakbugreport.txt</emphasis>, +but make sure you have enough disk space first: the file can easily be +several GBs large.</para> +<note><para>The output is far too large to attach to a bug report without first removing +the unneeded parts.</para></note> + <para>This command collects the following information on your system:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem><para> lspci</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> pci_devices</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> dmidecode</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> fdisk</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> scsi</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> /sys/bus/scsi/devices</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> lsmod</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> cmdline</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> pcmcia: stab</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> usb</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> partitions</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> cpuinfo</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> syslog</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> Xorg.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> monitor_full_edid</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> stage1.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> ddebug.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> install.log</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> fstab</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> modprobe.conf</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> lilo.conf</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> grub: menu.lst</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> grub: install.sh</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> grub: device.map</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> xorg.conf</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> urpmi.cfg</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> modprobe.preload</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> sysconfig/i18n</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> /proc/iomem</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> /proc/ioport</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> mageia version</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> rpm -qa</para></listitem> + <listitem><para> df</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + + <note><para>At the time this help page was written, the "syslog" part of this command's +output was empty, because this tool had not yet been adjusted to our switch +to systemd. If it is still empty, you can retrieve the "syslog" by doing (as +root) <emphasis role="bold"> journalctl -a > journalctl.txt</emphasis>. If +you don't have a lot of diskspace, you can, for instance, take the last 5000 +lines of the log instead with: <emphasis role="bold">journalctl -a | tail +-n5000 > journalctl5000.txt</emphasis>.</para></note> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakclock.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakclock.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..86a9f7c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakclock.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakclock"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakclock-ti1">Manage date and time</title> + + <subtitle>drakclock</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakclock.png" xml:id="drakclock-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakclock</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the tab System +in the Mageia Control Center labelled <guilabel>"Manage date and +time"</guilabel>. In some desktop environments it is also available by a +right click / Adjust date and Time ... on the clock in the system tray.</para> + + <para>It's a very simple tool.</para> + + <para>On the upper left part, is the <emphasis role="bold">calendar</emphasis>. On +the screenshot above, the date is September (on the upper left), 2012 (on +the upper right), the 2nd (in blue) and it is a Sunday. Select the month +(or year) by clicking on the little arrows on each side of September (or +2012). Select the day by clicking on its number.</para> + + <para>On the bottom left is the <emphasis role="bold">Network Time +Protocol</emphasis> synchronising, it is possible to have a clock always on +time by synchronising it with a server. Check <guilabel>Enable Network Time +Protocol</guilabel> and choose the closest server.</para> + + <para>On the right part is the <emphasis role="bold">clock</emphasis>. It's +useless to set the clock if NTP is enabled. Three boxes display hours, +minutes and seconds (15, 28 and 22 on the screenshot). Use the little arrows +to set the clock to the correct time. The format can't be changed here, see +your desktop environment settings for that.</para> + + <para>At least, on the bottom right, select your time zone by clicking on the +<guibutton>Change Time Zone</guibutton> button and choosing in the list the +nearest town.</para> + + <note> + <para>Even if it isn't possible to choose a date or time format in this tool, they +will be displayed on your desktop in accordance with the localisation +settings.</para> + </note> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconnect--del.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconnect--del.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7b3e85c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconnect--del.xml @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakconnect--del" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakconnect--del-ti1">Remove a connection</title><subtitle>drakconnect --del</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakconnect--del-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect--del.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Here, you can delete a network interface<footnote><para>You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakconnect --del</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote>.</para> + <para>Click on the drop down menu, choose the one you want to remove and then +click <emphasis>next</emphasis>.</para> + <para>You'll see a message that the network interface has been deleted +successfully.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconnect.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconnect.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..feccea4e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconnect.xml @@ -0,0 +1,808 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakconnect"> + <info annotations="simonnzg listened to Aicha by Khaled & Faudel whilst editing this document."> + <title xml:id="drakconnect-ti1">Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, ADSL, ...)</title> + + <subtitle>drakconnect</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakconnect-im1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakconnect.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>Introduction</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakconnect</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows to configure much of +local network or Internet access. You have to know some information from +your access provider or your network administrator.</para> + + <para>Select the type of connection you want to set, according to which hardware +and provider you have.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Wired connection (Ethernet)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one +to configure.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP +address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Automatic IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers +are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. +The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers +have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address +from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the DHCP client</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP timeout</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection +configurations are explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Manual configuration</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Ethernet/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS +servers to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no +HOSTNAME is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is +attributed by default.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your service provider's website.</para> + + <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search +domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your +computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is +"splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be "boatanchor.net". Unless +you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, +domestic ADSL would not need this setting.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect30.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Satellite connection (DVB)</title> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Cable modem connection</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The first window lists the interfaces which are available. Select the one +to configure.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this point, the choice is given between an automatic or a manual IP +address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>You have to specify a authentication method:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>None</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>BPALogin (necessary for Telstra). In this case you have to provide User name +and password.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Automatic IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers +are declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, the IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default. +The Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis>. Not all DHCP servers +have such a function and if you're setting up your PC to get an IP address +from a domestic ADSL router, it is unlikely.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the DHCP client</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP timeout</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After accepting, the last steps which are common to all connection +configurations are explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Manual configuration</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Cable/IP settings</emphasis>: you need to declare what DNS servers +to use. The HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME +is specified, the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is +attributed by default.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the IP address usually looks like +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your service provider's website.</para> + + <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search +domain</emphasis>. It would usually be your home domain, i.e. if your +computer is called "splash", and it's full domain name is +"splash.boatanchor.net", the Search Domain would be "boatanchor.net". Unless +you specifically need it, it's ok not to define this setting. Again, +domestic connection would not need this setting.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect32.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new DSL connection</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the tool detects network interfaces, it offers to select one and to +configure it.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select one of the protocols available:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Manual TCP/IP configuration</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PPP over ADSL (PPPoA)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Point to Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Access settings</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Account Login (user name)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Account password</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>(Advanced) Virtual Path ID (VPI)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>(Advanced) Virtual Circuit ID (VCI)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new ISDN connection</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The wizard asks which device to configure:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Manual choice (internal ISDN card)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>External ISDN modem</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of hardware is proposed, classified by category and +manufacturer. Select your card.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select one of the protocols available:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Protocol for the rest of the world, except Europe (DHCP)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Protocol for Europe (EDSS1)</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is then offered, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave +you. Then it is asked for parameters:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Connection name</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Phone number</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Login ID</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Account password</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Authentication method</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After that, you have to select if you get the IP address by automatic or +manual method. In the last case, specify IP address and Subnet mask.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next step is to choose how DNS servers address are obtained, by +automatic or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to +put:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Domain name</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>First and second DNS Server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Select if the hostname is set from IP. This option is to select only if you +are sure that your provider is configured to accept it.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next step is to choose how the gateway address is obtained, by automatic +or manual method. In the case of manual configuration, you have to enter the +IP address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Wireless connection (WiFi)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>A first window lists the interfaces which are available and an entry for +Windows driver (ndiswrapper). Select the one to configure. Use ndiswrapper +only if the other configuration methods did not work.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this step, the choice is given between the different access points that +the card has detected.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Specific parameter for the wireless card are to provide:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect31.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Operating mode:</para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Managed</term> + + <listitem> + <para>To access to an existing access point (the most frequent).</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Ad-Hoc</term> + + <listitem> + <para>To configure direct connection between computers.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Network Name (ESSID)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Encryption mode: it depends of how the access point is configured.</para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>WPA/WPA2</term> + + <listitem> + <para>This encryption mode is to prefer if your hardware allows it.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>WEP</term> + + <listitem> + <para>Some old hardware deals only this encryption method.</para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Encryption key</para> + + <para>It is generally provided with the hardware which give the access point.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>At this step, the choice is given between an automatic IP address or a +manual IP address.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Automatic IP</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to select if DNS servers are +declared by the DHCP server or are manually specified, as explained +below. In the last case, IP address of DNS servers has to be set. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is +specified, the name localhost.localdomain is attributed by default. The +Hostname can also be provided by the DHCP server with the option +<emphasis>Assign host name from DHCP server</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The advanced button give the opportunity to specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Search domain (not accessible, as provided by the DHCP server)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the DHCP client</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>DHCP timeout</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get YP server from DHCP (checked by default): specify the NIS servers</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Get NTPD server from DHCP (synchronisation of clocks)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the HOSTNAME required by DHCP. Only use this option if the DHCP server +requires the client to specify a hostname before receiving an IP +address. This option is not dealt by some DHCP servers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>After accepting the configuration the step, which is common to all +connection configurations, is explained: <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Manual configuration</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>IP settings</emphasis>: you have to declare DNS servers. The +HOSTNAME of the computer can be specified here. If no HOSTNAME is specified, +the name <literal>localhost.localdomain</literal> is attributed by default.</para> + + <para>For a residential network, the IP address always looks like +<emphasis>192.168.x.x</emphasis>, Netmask is +<emphasis>255.255.255.0</emphasis>, and the Gateway and DNS servers are +available from your providers website.</para> + + <para>In advanced settings, you can specified a <emphasis>Search +domain</emphasis>. It must seem to your hostname without the first name, +before the period.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new GPRS/Edge/3G connection</title> + + <para><orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the tool detects wireless interfaces, it offers to select one and to +configure it.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The PIN is asked. Leave empty if the PIN is not required.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The wizard asks for network. If it is not detected, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider gave.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Provide access settings</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Access Point Name</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Account Login (user name)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Account password</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Bluetooth Dial-Up Networking connection</title> + + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>A new Analog telephone modem connection (POTS)</title> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para>The wizard asks which device to configure:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Manual choice</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Detected hardware, if any.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of ports is proposed. Select your port.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>If not yet installed, it will be suggested that you install the package +<emphasis>kppp-provider</emphasis>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>A list of providers is proposed, classified by countries. Select your +provider. If it is not listed, select the option +<guilabel>Unlisted</guilabel> and then enter the options your provider +gave. Then it is asked for Dialup options:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Connection name</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Phone number</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Login ID</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Password</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Authentication</emphasis>, choose between:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>PAP/CHAP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Script-based</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>PAP</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Terminal-based</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>CHAP</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The next steps are exposed at <xref linkend="drakconnect-end"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakconnect-end"> + <title>Ending the configuration</title> + + <para>In the next step, you can specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Allow users to manage the connection</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Start the connection at boot</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Enable traffic accounting</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Allow interface to be controlled by Network Manager</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>In the case of a wireless connection, a supplemental box is <emphasis>Allow +access point roaming</emphasis> which give the possibility to switch +automatically between access point according to the signal strength.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>With the advanced button, you can specify:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Metric (10 by default)</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>MTU</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Network Hotplugging</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Enable IPv6 to IPv4 tunnel</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The last step allows you to specify if the connection is to start +immediately or not.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakconnect9.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconsole.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconsole.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..65b8f97c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakconsole.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakconsole"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakconsole-ti1">Open a console as administrator</title> + + <subtitle>drakconsole</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakconsole-im1" fileref="drakconsole.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakconsole</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> gives you access to a console +which is directly opened as root. We do not think that you need more +information about that.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakdisk.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakdisk.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..96a2e342 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakdisk.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakdisk"> + + + <info> + <title xml:id="drakdisk-ti1">Manage disk partitions</title> + + <subtitle>drakdisk or diskdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskBackup-im1" revision="1" fileref="drakdiskBackup.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <warning> + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakdisk</emphasis> or <emphasis +role="bold">diskdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is very powerful, a tiny +error or a cat jumping on your keyboard can lead to losing all data on a +partition or even to erasing the entire hard disk. For that reason, you'll +see the screen above on top of the tool screen. Click on +<emphasis>Exit</emphasis> if you're not sure you want to continue.</para> + </warning> + + <para>If you have more than one hard disk, you can switch to the hard disk you +want to work on by selecting the correct tab (sda, sdb, sdc etc).</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakdisk-im1" fileref="drakdisk.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>You can choose from many actions to adjust your hard disk to your +preferences. Wiping an entire hard disk, splitting or merging partitions, +resizing them or changing the filesystem, formatting or viewing what is in a +partition: it is all possible. The <emphasis><guibutton>Clear +all</guibutton></emphasis> button at the bottom is to erase the complete +disk, the other buttons become visible on the right after you click on a +partition.</para> + + + + <!-- 2015-07-06 Note added by Lebarhon --> +<note> + <para>If you have an UEFI system, you can see a small partition called "EFI System +Partition" and mounted on /boot/EFI. Never delete it, because it contains +all your different operating systems bootloaders.</para> + </note> + + <para>If the selected partition is mounted, like in the example below, you cannot +choose to resize, format or delete it. To be able to do that the partition +must be unmounted first.</para> + + <para>It is only possible to resize a partition on its right side</para> + + <para>To change a partition type (change ext3 to ext4 for example) you have to +delete the partition and then re-create it with the new type. The button +<guibutton role="bold">Create</guibutton> appears when a disk empty part is +selected</para> + + <para>You can choose a mount point that doesn't exist, it will be created.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakdiskMountedPartition-im1" revision="1" fileref="drakdiskMountedPartition.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Selecting <emphasis><guibutton>Toggle to expert mode</guibutton></emphasis> +gives some extra available actions, like labeling the partition, as can be +seen in the screenshot below.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakdiskExpertUnmounted-im1" align="center" fileref="drakdiskExpertUnmounted.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakedm.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakedm.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3edfe0ab --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakedm.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakedm"> + <info> + + <!--2012-09-03 marja: changed title to the title of this screen in MCC . 2017-04-10 simonnzg has looked and seems OK--> +<title xml:id="drakedm-ti1">Set up display manager</title> + <subtitle>drakedm</subtitle> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="drakedm.png" align="center" xml:id="drakedm-im1" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para xml:id="drakedm-pa1" revision="1">Here<footnote><para xml:id="drakedm-pa3" revision="1">You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakedm</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> you can choose which display +manager to use to log into your desktop environment. Only the ones available +on your system will be shown.</para> + <para xml:id="drakedm-pa2" revision="1">Most users will only notice that the provided login screens look +different. However, there are differences in supported features, too. LXDM +is a lightweight display manager, SDDM and GDM have more extras.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakfirewall.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakfirewall.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d478493a --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakfirewall.xml @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakfirewall" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakfirewall-ti1">Set up your personal firewall</title> + + <subtitle>drakfirewall</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakfirewall.png" align="center" xml:id="drakfirewall-im1" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakfirewall</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the Security +tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Set up your personal +firewall". It is the same tool in the first tab of "Configure system +security, permissions and audit".</para> + + <para>A basic firewall is installed by default with Mageia. All the incoming +connections from the outside are blocked if they aren't authorised. In the +first screen above, you can select the services for which outside connection +attempts are accepted. For your security, uncheck the first box - +<guilabel>Everything (no firewall)</guilabel> - unless you want to disable +the firewall, and only check the needed services.</para> + + <para>It is possible to manually enter the port numbers to open. Click on +<guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> and a new window is opened. In the field +<guilabel>Other ports</guilabel>, enter the needed ports following these +examples :</para> + + <para>80/tcp : open the port 80 tcp protocol</para> + + <para>24000:24010/udp : open all the ports from 24000 to 24010 udp protocol</para> + + <para>The listed ports should be separated by a space.</para> + + <para>If the box <guilabel>Log firewall messages in system logs</guilabel> is +checked, the firewall messages will be saved in system logs</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>If you don't host specific services (web or mail server, file sharing, ...) +it is completely possible to have nothing checked at all, it is even +recommended, it won't prevent you from connecting to the internet.</para> + </note> + + <para>The next screen deals with the Interactive Firewall options. These feature +allow you to be warned of connection attempts if at least the first box +<guilabel>Use Interactive Firewall </guilabel>is checked. Check the second +box to be warned if the ports are scanned (in order to find a failure +somewhere and enter your machine). Each box from the third one onwards +corresponds to a port you opened in the two first screens; in the screenshot +below, there are two such boxes: SSH server and 80:150/tcp. Check them to be +warned each time a connection is attempted on those ports.</para> + + <para>These warning are given by alert popups through the network applet.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakfirewall4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In the last screen, choose which network interfaces are connected to the +Internet and must be protected. Once the OK button is clicked, the necessary +packages are downloaded.</para> + + <tip> + <para>If you don't know what to choose, have a look in MCC tab Network & +Internet, icon Set up a new network interface.</para> + </tip> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakfont.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakfont.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..74c3f3f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakfont.xml @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakfont"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakfont-ti1">Manage, add and remove fonts. Import Windows(TM) fonts</title> + + <subtitle>drakfont</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakfont-im1" fileref="drakfont.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakfont</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the <emphasis role="bold">System</emphasis> tab. It +allows you to manage the fonts available on the computer. The main screen +above shows:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>the installed font names, styles and sizes.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>a preview of the selected font.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>some buttons explained here later.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para/> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Get Windows Fonts: </emphasis></para> + + <para>This button automatically adds the fonts found on the Windows partition. You +must have Microsoft Windows installed.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Options:</emphasis></para> + + <para>It allows you to specify the applications or devices (printers mostly) able +to use the fonts.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Uninstall:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This button is to remove installed fonts and possibly save some place. Be +careful when removing fonts because it may have serious consequences on the +documents that use them.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Import:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Allows you to add fonts from a third party (CD, internet, ...). The +supported formats are ttf, pfa, pfb, pcf, pfm and gsf. Click on the +<emphasis role="bold">Import</emphasis> button and then on <emphasis +role="bold">Add</emphasis>, a file manager pops up where you can select the +fonts to install, click on <emphasis role="bold">Install</emphasis> when +done. They are installed in the folder /usr/share/fonts.</para> + + <para>If the newly installed (or removed) fonts doesn't appear in the Drakfont +main screen, close and re open it to see the modifications.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakguard.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakguard.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a205953 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakguard.xml @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakguard"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakguard-ti1">Parental Controls</title> + + <subtitle>drakguard</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakguard.png" revision="1" xml:id="drakguard-im1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakguard</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center, under the Security tab, labelled <guilabel>Parental +Control</guilabel>. If you don't see this label, you have to install the +drakguard package (not installed by default).</para> + + <section> + <title>Presentation</title> + + <para>Drakguard is an easy way to set up parental controls on your computer to +restrict who can do what, and at which times of day. Drakguard has three +useful capabilities:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>It restricts web access to named users to set times of day. It does this by +controlling the shorewall firewall built into Mageia.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It blocks execution of particular commands by named users so these users can +only execute what you accept them to execute.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It restricts access to websites, both manually defined through +blacklists/whitelists, but also dynamically based on the content of the +website. To achieve this Drakguard uses the leading opensource parental +control blocker DansGuardian.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Configuring Parental controls</title> + + <para><warning> + <para>If your computer contains hard drive partitions that are formatted in Ext2, +Ext3, or ReiserFS format you will see a pop up offering to configure ACL on +your partitions. ACL stands for Access Control Lists, and is a Linux kernel +feature that allows access to individual files to be restricted to named +users. ACL is built into Ext4 and Btrfs file systems, but must be enabled by +an option in Ext2, Ext3, or Reiserfs partitions. If you select 'Yes' to this +prompt drakguard will configure all your partitions to support ACL, and will +then suggest you reboot.</para> + </warning><guibutton>Enable parental control</guibutton>: If checked, the parental +control is enabled and the access to <guilabel>Block programs</guilabel> tab +is opened.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Block all network traffic</guibutton>: If checked, all the +websites are blocked, except the ones in the whitelist tab. Otherwise, all +the websites are allowed, except the ones in the blacklist tab.</para> + + <para><guibutton>User access</guibutton>: Users on the left hand side will have +their access restricted according to the rules you define. Users on the +right hand side have unrestricted access so adult users of the computer are +not inconvenienced. Select a user in the left hand side and click on +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to add him/her as an allowed user. Select an +user in the right hand side and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to +remove him/her from the allowed users.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Time control:</guibutton> If checked, internet access is allowed +with restrictions between the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> time and +<guilabel>End</guilabel> time. It is totally blocked outside these time +window.</para> + + <section> + <title>Blacklist/Whitelist tab</title> + + <para>Enter the website URL in the first field at the top and click on the +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> button.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Block Programs Tab</title> + + <para><guibutton>Block Defined Applications</guibutton>: Enables the use of ACL to +restrict access to specific applications. Insert the path to the +applications you wish to block.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Unblock Users list</guibutton>: Users listed on the right hand +side will not be subject to acl blocking.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakgw.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakgw.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..789a2b5b --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakgw.xml @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakgw" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakgw-ti1">Share the Internet connection with other local machines</title> + + <subtitle>drakgw</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakgw.png" format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="drakgw-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-principles"> + <title>Principles</title> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../drakgw-net.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>This is useful when you have a +computer (3) which has Internet (2) access and is connected also to a local +network (1). You can use computer (3) as a gateway to give that access to +other workstations (5) and (6) in the local network (1). For this, the +gateway must have two interfaces; the first one such as an ethernet card +must be connected to the local network, and the second one (4) connected to +the Internet (2).</para> + + <para>The first step is to verify that the network and the access to Internet are +set up, as documented in <xref linkend="draknetcenter"/>.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-wizard"> + <title>Gateway wizard</title> + + <para>The wizard<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakgw</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> offers successive steps +which are shown below:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If the wizard does not detect at least two interfaces, it warns about this +and asks to stop the network and configure the hardware.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify the interface used for the Internet connection. The wizard +automatically suggests one of the interfaces, but you should verify that +what is proposed is correct.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify which interface is used for the Lan access. The wizard also proposes +one, check that this is correct.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The wizard proposes parameters for the Lan network, such as IP address, mask +and domain name. Check that these parameters are compatible with the actual +configuration. It is recommended that you accept these values.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer has to be used as a DNS server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>bind</code> is installed. Otherwise, you have to +specify the address of a DNS server.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a DHCP server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>dhcp-server</code> is installed and offer to configure +it, with start and end addresses in the DHCP range.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>specify if the computer is to be used as a proxy server. If yes, the wizard +will check that <code>squid</code> is installed and offer to configure it, +with the address of the administrator (admin@mydomain.com), name of the +proxy (myfirewall@mydomaincom), the port (3128) and the cache size (100 Mb).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The last step allows you to check if the gateway machine is connected to +printers and to share them.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + + <para>You will be warned about the need to check the firewall if it is active.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-configure"> + <title>Configure the client</title> + + <para>If you have configured the gateway machine with DHCP, you only need to +specify in the network configuration tool that you get an address +automatically (using DHCP). The parameters will be obtained when connecting +to the network. This method is valid whatever operating system the client is +using.</para> + + <para>If you must manually specify the network parameters, you must in particular +specify the gateway by entering the IP-address of the machine acting as the +gateway.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="drakgw-stop"> + <title>Stop connection sharing</title> + + <para>If you want to stop sharing the connection on the Mageia computer, launch +the tool. It will offer to reconfigure the connection or to stop the +sharing.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakhosts.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakhosts.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..220fa9f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakhosts.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakhosts" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakhosts-ti1">Hosts definitions</title> + + <subtitle>drakhosts</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakhosts.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakhosts-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If some systems on your network grant you services, and have fixed +IP-addresses, this tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakhosts</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows to +specify a name to access them more easily. Then you can use that name +instead of the IP-address.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Add</guibutton></para> + + <para>With this button, you add the name for a new system. You will get a window +to specify the IP-address, the host name for the system, and optionally an +alias which can be used in the same way that the name is.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Modify</guibutton></para> + + <para>You can access the parameters of an entry previously defined. You get the +same window.</para> + + <para/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakinvictus.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakinvictus.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5d44a273 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakinvictus.xml @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakinvictus" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakinvictus-ti1">Advanced setup for network interfaces and firewall</title><subtitle>drakinvictus</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakinvictus-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakinvictus.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakinvictus</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknetcenter.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknetcenter.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..baf88644 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknetcenter.xml @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="draknetcenter"> + + + <info> + <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-31 +Write some text means i can't do it :( +What must we say about networks out of wired (Ethernet) and wireless (WI fi) like GPRS, bluetooth ? I can't write anything. +--> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="draknetcenter-ti1">Network Center</title> + <subtitle>draknetcenter</subtitle> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draknetcenter.png" align="center" xml:id="draknetcenter-im1" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draknetcenter</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is found under the Network +& Internet tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled "Network Center"</para> + <para/> + <section> + <title>Introduction</title> + <para>When this tool is launched, a window opens listing all the networks +configured on the computer, whatever their type (wired, wireless, satellite, +etc.). When clicking on one of them, three or four buttons appear, depending +on the network type, to allow you to look after the network, change its +settings or connect/disconnect. This tool isn't intended to create a +network, for this see <guilabel>Set up a new network interface (LAN, ISDN, +ADSL, ...)</guilabel> in the same MCC tab.</para> + <para>In the screenshot below, given as example, we can see two networks, the +first one is wired and connected, recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterEthernet-on.png"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> (this one is not connected<inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterEthernet-off.png"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> ) and the second section shows wireless +networks, not connected recognizable by this icon <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterWireless-off.png"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject> and this one <inlinemediaobject><imageobject><imagedata fileref="../draknetcenterWireless-on.png"/></imageobject></inlinemediaobject>if connected. For the other network types, +the colour code is always the same, green if connected and red if not +connected.</para> + <para>In the wireless part of the screen, you can also see all the detected +networks, with the <guilabel>SSID</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Signal +strengh</guilabel>, if they are encrypted (in red) or not (in green), and +the <guilabel>Operating mode</guilabel>. Click on the chosen one and then +either on <guibutton>Monitor</guibutton>, <guibutton>Configure</guibutton> +or <guibutton>Connect</guibutton>. It is possible here to go from a network +to another one. If a private network is selected, the Network Settings +window (see below) will open and ask you for extra settings ( an encryption +key in particular).</para> + <para>Click on <guibutton>Refresh</guibutton> to update the screen.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + <section> + <title>The Monitor button</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>This button allows you to watch the network activity, downloads (toward the +PC, in red) and uploads (toward the Internet, in green). The same screen is +available by right clicking on the <guimenu>Internet icon in the system tray +-> Monitor Network</guimenu>.</para> + <para>There is a tab for each network (here eth0 is the wired network, lo the +local loopback and wlan0 the wireless network) and a tab connection which +gives details about connection status.</para> + <note> + <para>At the bottom of the window is a title <guilabel>Traffic +accounting</guilabel>, we will look at that in the next section.</para> + </note> + </section> + <section> + <title>The Configure button</title> + <para><emphasis role="bold">A - For a wired network</emphasis></para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>It is possible to change all the settings given during network +creation. Most of the time, checking <guibutton>Automatic IP</guibutton> +<guibutton>(BOOTP/DHCP)</guibutton> will do, but in case of problems, manual +configuration may give better results.</para> + <para>For a residential network, the <guilabel>IP address</guilabel> always looks +like 192.168.0.x, <guilabel>Netmask</guilabel> is 255.255.255.0, and the +<guilabel>Gateway</guilabel> and <guilabel>DNS servers</guilabel> are +available from your providers website.</para> + <para><guibutton>Enable traffic accounting</guibutton> if checked this will count +the traffic on a hourly, daily or monthly basis. The results are visible in +the Network monitor detailed in the previous section. Once enabled, you may +have to reconnect to the network.</para> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow interface to be controlled by Network +Manager:</emphasis></para> + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para> + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para><emphasis role="bold">B - For a wireless network</emphasis></para> + <para>Only the items not already seen above are explained.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Operating mode:</emphasis></para> + <para>Select <guilabel>Managed</guilabel> if the connection is via an access +point, there is an <emphasis role="bold">ESSID</emphasis> detected. Select +<guilabel>Ad-hoc</guilabel> if it is a peer to peer network. Select +<emphasis role="bold">Master</emphasis> if your network card is used as the +access point, your network card needs to support this mode.</para> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Encryption mode and Encryption key:</emphasis></para> + <para>If it is a private network, you need to know these settings.</para> + <para><guilabel>WEP</guilabel> uses a password and is weaker than WPA which uses a +passphrase. <guilabel>WPA Pre-Shared Key</guilabel> is also called WPA +personal or WPA home. <guilabel>WPA Enterprise</guilabel> is not often used +in private networks.</para> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Allow access point roaming</emphasis>:</para> + <para>Roaming is a technology which enables allows computer to change its access +point while remaining connected to the network.</para> + <para><guibutton>The button Advanced:</guibutton></para> + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + <section> + <title>The Advanced Settings button</title> + <para>This section hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draknetcenter7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknetprofile.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknetprofile.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..34f189ec --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknetprofile.xml @@ -0,0 +1,237 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + +<section xmlns='http://docbook.org/ns/docbook' + xmlns:ns5='http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML' + xmlns:ns4='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg' + xmlns:ns3='http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml' + xmlns:ns2='http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink' + xmlns:ns='http://docbook.org/ns/docbook' + xml:id='draknetprofile' version='5.0'> + + <info> + <title xml:id='draknetprofile-ti1'>Manage different network profiles</title> + <subtitle>Draknetprofile</subtitle> + </info> + + <section> + <title>Introduction</title> + + <para>Each network interface of a Mageia system is initially configured with a fix +set of parameters. This corresponds to what is expected by a user of a +desktop computer, but may not be adequate when the system is moved between +various network environments: having the system run in different network +environments will require that multiple configurations co-exist for a given +network device - otherwise the interface might need to be re-configured each +time the network environment changes.</para> + + <section> + <title>Profiles</title> + + <para>Linux provides support for multiple configurations of network devices as a +standard feature. The notion of a <emphasis role='bold'>"network +profile"</emphasis> refers to a set of configurations of network devices, +defined for a specific network environment. Each network profile has a +<emphasis role='bold'>name</emphasis> - the initial configuration that comes +out of system generation has the name <emphasis>"default"</emphasis>; when a +new profile is created, a name must be specified which is different from all +already existing profile names.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Draknetprofile</title> + + <para>Draknetprofile is a - very simple - component of the Mageia Control Center +(MCC), it provides a Graphical User Interface (GUI) for managing +profiles. This GUI allows to + + <itemizedlist> + + <listitem> + <para>switch between profiles - i.e. activate a target profile to become the +"current profile",</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>create a new, additional profile,</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>delete a profile from the list of defined profiles.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Running Draknetprofile</title> + + <section> + <title>Defining profiles, profile switching</title> + + <para>Defining/modifying profiles concerns the entire Linux system and all its +users. Running draknetprofile therefore requires root privileges. Normally, +launching is achieved from within MCC (which already runs as root):</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id='draknetprofile-im1' + fileref='./draknetprofile_mcc.png' format='PNG' align='center' + revision='1'/> + </imageobject> + <caption> + <para><emphasis role='bold'>Figure 1: Mageia Control Center: Network & +Internet tab</emphasis></para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + + <orderedlist> + + <listitem> + <para>launch the MCC by hitting the MCC icon in one of the panels of your desktop,</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>select the "Network & Internet" tab,</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>hit "Manage different network profiles" in the "Personalize and Secure your +network" Section (solid red contour in Figure 1).</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <para>Draknetprofile can also be launched by a command-line instruction from a +terminal emulator with root privileges (this may be helpful when +standard-output or error-output from draknetprofile needs to be consulted - +for instance for debugging). Simply type:</para> + + <informaltable frame='all' colsep='1' rowsep='1'> + <tgroup cols='1'> + <?dbhtml cellpadding='4' ?> + <tbody> + <row><?dbhtml bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?><?dbfo bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?> + <entry><literal> draknetprofile </literal></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + + <para>After the launch, the main page of Draknetprofile will be displayed:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id='draknetprofile-im2' + fileref='./draknetprofile_main.png' format='PNG' + align='center' revision='1'/> + </imageobject> + <caption> + <para><emphasis role='bold'>Figure 2: Management actions of +Draknetprofile</emphasis></para> + </caption> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The upper zone of the window contains the list of the names of all presently +defined profiles. The bottom zone presents a series of buttons:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + + <listitem> + <para>"Activate" ... establish the selected profile (top zone of the window) as +the current profile (and save the properties of the old profile);</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>"New" ... create a new profile;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>"Delete" ... delete the selected profile from the list of defined profiles;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>"Quit" ... exit from Draknetprofile.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Before hitting the "Activate" or the "Delete" button, you have to select a +profile from the list: select it by a left-button click on the name of the +target profile.</para> + + <para>Hitting the "New" button will launch an auxiliary window where you can type +the name of the profile you want to create; this name must be different from +any already existing profile. This profile will be created as a precise copy +of the currently active profile and immediately activated as the current +profile. You will probably then need to specify its properties (modify the +automatically created configuration) in a second, independent action:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + + <listitem> + <para>exit from Draknetprofile (hit the "Quit" button),</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>back in the "Network & Internet" tab, you select the tab "Set up a new +network interface (...)" (marked with dashed red contour in Figure 1),</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>you then go through the steps for configuring the interface; they are +similar to those you did for configuring the original interface during +system generation - as documented in the <link +linkend='drakconnect-ti1'>Drakconnect manual</link>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The middle zone of the window is normally hidden, hit the "Advanced" button +to make it visible. It should display the list of names of Draknetprofile +<emphasis role='bold'>"modules"</emphasis> (such as "network", "firewall", +"urpmi"), each with a check-button next to the name; these check-buttons +determine whether the properties controlled by that module are included into +the profile or not.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Using a system that has more than one profile</title> + + <para>In a system where several profiles are defined, an additional user +interaction is required when the system boots: at the very end of the +bootstrapping activities - just before the Desktop Environment starts - you +will get a message like</para> + + <informaltable frame='all' colsep='1' rowsep='1'> + <tgroup cols='1'> + <?dbhtml cellpadding='4' ?> + <tbody> + <row><?dbhtml bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?><?dbfo bgcolor='#DDDDDD' ?> + <entry><literal> Select network profile: (1) default (2) +roaming* </literal></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + + <para>Type 1 or 2 to select the "default", respectively the "roaming" profile, or +carriage-return to select the profile that is marked with an asterisk (the +profile that was active when the system had been shut down).</para> + + <para>Presently (Mageia-5) there appears to be an intermittent problem: it happens +that the system becomes unresponsive after soliciting the user to select a +profile. The only way out of this situation is to launch another boot. This +problem is under investigation.</para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Appendix: Files relevant to Draknetprofile</title> + + <para>The configuration data of network interfaces are stored in the directory +<emphasis>/etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/</emphasis>, in files with names +like <emphasis>ifcfg-xxx</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>The name of the currently active profile is maintained in the file +<emphasis>/etc/netprofile/current</emphasis> . + </para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknfs.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknfs.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e1f890f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draknfs.xml @@ -0,0 +1,165 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="draknfs" xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draknfs-ti1">Share drives and directories using NFS</title> + + <subtitle>draknfs</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>Prerequisites</title> + + <para>When the wizard<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draknfs</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is launched for the +first time, it may display the following message:</para> + + <blockquote> + <para>The package nfs-utils needs to be installed. Do you want to install it?</para> + </blockquote> + + <para>After completing the installation, a window with an empty list is displayed.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Main window</title> + + <para>A list of directories which are shared is displayed. At this step, the list +is empty. The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button gives access to a +configuration tool.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Modify entry</title> + + <para>The configuration tool is labeled "Modify entry". It may be also launched +with the <guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. The following parameters are +available.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs4.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>NFS Directory</title> + + <para>Here you can specify which directory is to be shared. The +<guibutton>Directory</guibutton> button gives access to a browser to choose +it.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Host access</title> + + <para>Here you can specify the hosts that are authorized to access the shared +directory.</para> + + <para>NFS clients may be specified in a number of ways:</para> + + <para><emphasis>single host</emphasis>: a host either by an abbreviated name +recognized be the resolver, fully qualified domain name, or an IP address</para> + + <para><emphasis>netgroups</emphasis>: NIS netgroups may be given as @group.</para> + + <para><emphasis>wildcards</emphasis>: machine names may contain the wildcard +characters * and ?. For instance: *.cs.foo.edu matches all hosts in the +domain cs.foo.edu.</para> + + <para><emphasis>IP networks</emphasis>: you can also export directories to all +hosts on an IP (sub-)network simultaneously. For example, either +`/255.255.252.0' or `/22' appended to the network base address.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>User ID Mapping</title> + + <para><emphasis>map root user as anonymous</emphasis>: maps requests from uid/gid +0 to the anonymous uid/gid (root_squash). The root user from the client +cannot read or write to the files on the server which are created by root on +the server itself.</para> + + <para><emphasis>allow real remote root access</emphasis>: turn off root +squashing. This option is mainly useful for diskless clients +(no_root_squash).</para> + + <para><emphasis>map all users to anonymous user</emphasis>: maps all uids and gids +to the anonymous user (all_squash). Useful for NFS-exported public FTP +directories, news spool directories, etc. The opposite option is no user UID +mapping (no_all_squash), which is the default setting.</para> + + <para><emphasis>anonuid and anongid</emphasis>: explicitly set the uid and gid of +the anonymous account.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Advanced options</title> + + <para><emphasis>Secured Connection</emphasis>: this option requires that requests +originate on an internet port less than IPPORT_RESERVED (1024). This option +is on by default.</para> + + <para><emphasis>Read-Only share</emphasis>: allow either only read or both read +and write requests on this NFS volume. The default is to disallow any +request which changes the filesystem. This can also be made explicit by +using this option.</para> + + <para><emphasis>Synchronous access</emphasis>: prevents the NFS server from +violating the NFS protocol and to reply to requests before any changes made +by these requests have been committed to stable storage (e.g. disc drive).</para> + + <para><emphasis>Subtree checking</emphasis>: enable subtree checking which can +help improve security in some cases, but can decrease reliability. See +exports(5) man page for more details.</para> + </section> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Menu entries</title> + + <para>So far the list has at least one entry.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="draknfs5.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="draknfs-im5"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>File|Write conf</title> + + <para>Save the current configuration.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>NFS Server|Restart</title> + + <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>NFS Server|Reload</title> + + <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration +files.</para> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakproxy.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakproxy.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1b1cdfa5 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakproxy.xml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakproxy" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakproxy-ti1">Proxy</title> + + <subtitle>drakproxy</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakproxy.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakproxy-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If you have to use a proxy server to access to the internet, you can use +this tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakproxy</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> to configure it. Your net +administrator will give you the information you need. You can also specify +some services which can be accessed without the proxy by exception.</para> + + <para>From Wikipedia, on 2012-09-24, article Proxy server: In computer networks, a +proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts as +an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other +servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, +such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a +different server. The proxy server evaluates the request as a way to +simplify and control their complexity.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakrpm-edit-media.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakrpm-edit-media.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a3bc614 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakrpm-edit-media.xml @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-ti1">Configure Media</title> + + <subtitle>drakrpm-edit-media</subtitle> + </info> + + + + + + <mediaobject> + <!-- 2013-01-06 marja - added Qilaq's and spturtle's corrections --> +<!--2013-10-22 marja - improved wording, thanks to Aragorn :-) + - adjusted "Add" part to changed behaviour of this tool + (no longer a choice to only add "update sources" is + given) --> +<imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-im1" fileref="drakrpm-edit-media.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><important> + <para>First thing to do after an install is to add software sources (also known as +repositories, media, mirrors). That means you must select the media sources +to be used to install and update packages and applications. (see Add button +below).</para> + </important> <note> + <para>If you install (or upgrade) Mageia using an optical media (DVD or CD) or a +USB device, there will be a software source configured to the optical media +used. To avoid being asked to insert the media when you install new +packages, you should disable (or delete) this media. (It will have the +media type CD-Rom).</para> + </note> <note> + <para>Your system is running under an architecture which may be 32-bit (called +i586), or 64-bit (called x86_64). Some packages are independent of whether +your system is 32-bit or 64-bit; these are called noarch packages. They +don't have their own noarch directories on the mirrors, but are all in both +the i586 and the x86_64 media.</para> + </note></para> + + <para>This tool is present in the Mageia Control Center under the tab <emphasis +role="bold">Software management.</emphasis><footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote></para> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-columns">The columns</title> + + <bridgehead>Column Enable:</bridgehead> + + <para>The checked media will be used to install new packages. Be cautious with +some media such as Testing and Debug, they could make your system unusable.</para> + + <bridgehead>Column Update:</bridgehead> + + <para>The checked media will be used to update packages, it must be enabled. Only +media with "Update" in its name should be selected. For security reasons, +this column isn't modifiable in this tool, you must open a console as root +and type <emphasis role="bold">drakrpm-edit-media --expert.</emphasis></para> + + <bridgehead>Column medium:</bridgehead> + + <para>Display the medium name. Mageia official repositories for final release +versions contain at least:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Core</emphasis> which contains most programs available +supported by Mageia.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Nonfree</emphasis> which contains some programs which +are not free</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Tainted</emphasis> free software for which there might +be patent claims in some countries.</para> + + <para>Each medium has 4 sub-sections:</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Release</emphasis> the packages as of the day the this +version of Mageia was released.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Updates</emphasis> the packages updated since release +due to security or bug concerns. Everyone should have this medium enabled, +even with a very slow internet connection.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Backports</emphasis> some packages of new versions +backported from Cauldron (the next version under development).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Testing</emphasis> which is used for temporary tests +of new updates, to allow the bug reporters and the QA team to validate the +corrections.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-right-button">The buttons on the right</title> + + <para><guibutton>Remove:</guibutton></para> + + <para>To remove a medium, click on it and then on this button. It is wise to +remove the medium used for the installation (CD or DVD for example) since +all the packages it contains are in the official Core release medium.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Edit:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Allows you to modify the selected medium settings, (URL, downloader and +proxy).</para> + + <para><guibutton>Add:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Add the official repositories available on the Internet. These repositories +contain only safe and well tested software. Clicking on the "Add" button +adds the mirrorlist to your configuration, it is designed to make sure that +you install and update from a mirror close to you. If you prefer to choose a +specific mirror, then add it by choosing "Add a specific media mirror" from +the drop-down "File" menu.</para> + + <para><guibutton>Up and down arrows:</guibutton></para> + + <para>Change the list order. When Drakrpm looks for a package, it reads the list +in the displayed order and will install the first package found for the same +release number - in the event of a version mismatch, the latest release will +be installed. So if possible, put the fastest repositories at the top.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="drakrpm-edit-media-menu">The menu</title> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Update:</guimenu></para> + + <para>A window pops up with the media list. Select the ones you want to update and +click on the <guibutton>Update</guibutton> button.</para> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror:</guimenu></para> + + <para>Suppose you aren't happy with the actual mirror, because for example it's +too slow or often unavailable, you can choose another mirror. Select all the +actual media and click on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to take them +out. Click on <guimenu>File -> Add a specific media mirror</guimenu>, choose +between update only or the full set (if you do not know, choose the +<guibutton>Full set of sources</guibutton>) and accept the contact by +clicking on <guibutton>Yes</guibutton>. This window opens:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakrpmEditMedia2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>You can see, on the left, a list of countries, choose yours or one very +close by clicking on the > symbol, this will display all the available +mirrors in that country. Select one and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><guimenu>File -> Add a custom medium:</guimenu></para> + + <para>It is possible to install a new media (from a third party for example) that +isn't supported by Mageia. A new window appears:</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrakeEditMedia1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>Select the medium type, find a smart +name that well define the medium and give the URL (or the path, according to +the medium type)</para> + + <para><guimenu>Options -> Global options:</guimenu></para> + + <para>This item allows you to choose when to "Verify RPMs to be installed" (always +or never), the download program (curl, wget or aria2) and to define the +download policy for information about the packages (on demand -by default-, +update only, always or never).</para> + + <para><guimenu>Options -> Manage keys:</guimenu></para> + + <para>To guarantee a high level of security, digital keys are used to authenticate +the media. It is possible for each medium to allow or disallow a key. In the +window that appear, select a medium and then click on +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> to allow a new key or to select a key and click +on <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> to disallow that key.</para> + + <para><warning> + <para>Do this with care, as with all security-related questions</para> + </warning><guimenu>Options -> Proxy:</guimenu></para> + + <para>If you need to use a proxy server for internet access, you can configure it +here. You only need to give the <guibutton>Proxy hostname</guibutton> and if +necessary a <guilabel>Username</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel>.</para> + + <para/> + + <para>For more information about configuring the media, see <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Software_management">the Mageia Wiki +page</link>.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksambashare.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksambashare.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..52ec55be --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksambashare.xml @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="draksambashare" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksambashare-ti1">Share directories and drives with Samba</title> + + <subtitle>draksambashare</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare.png" format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="draksambashare-im1" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>Introduction</title> + + <para>Samba is a protocol used in different Operating Systems to share some +resources like directories or printers. This tool allows you to configure +the machine as a Samba server using the protocol SMB/CIFS. This protocol is +also used by Windows(R) and workstations with this OS can access the +resources of the Samba server.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Preparation</title> + + <para>To be accessed from other workstations, the server has to have a fixed IP +address. This can be specified directly on the server, for example with +<xref linkend="draknetcenter"/>, or at the DHCP server which identifies the +station with its MAC-address and give it always the same address. The +firewall has also to allow the incoming requests to the Samba server.</para> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Wizard - Standalone server</title> + + <para>At the first run, the tools <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing<emphasis +role="bold"> draksambashare</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> checks if +needed packages are installed and proposes to install them if they are not +yet present. Then the wizard to configure the Samba server is launched.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare0.png" xml:id="draksambashare0-im1" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In the next window the Standalone server configuration option is already +selected.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare1.png" align="center" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare1-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Then specify the name of the workgroup. This name should be the same for the +access to the shared resources.</para> + + <para>The netbios name is the name which will be used to designate the server on +the network.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare2.png" align="center" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare2-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose the security mode:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>user</guilabel>: the client must be authorized to access the +resource</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>share</guilabel>: the client authenticates itself separately for +each share</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>You can specify which hosts are allowed to access the resources, with IP +address or host name.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare3.png" format="PNG" align="center" revision="1" xml:id="draksambashare3-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Specify the server banner. The banner is the way this server will be +described in the Windows workstations.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="draksambashare-im4" align="center" fileref="draksambashare4.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The place where Samba can log information can be specified at the next step.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="draksambashare-im5" align="center" fileref="draksambashare5.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The wizard displays a list of the chosen parameters before you accept the +configuration. When accepted, the configuration will be written in +<code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare6.png" xml:id="draksambashare-im6" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Wizard - Primary domain controller</title> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare13.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>If the "Primary domain controller" +option is selected, the wizard asks for indication if Wins is to support or +not and to provide admin users names. The following steps are then the same +as for standalone server, except you can choose also the security mode:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guilabel>domain</guilabel>: provides a mechanism for storing all user and +group accounts in a central, shared, account repository. The centralized +account repository is shared between (security) controllers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Declare a directory to share</title> + + <para>With the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, we get:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" align="center" xml:id="draksambashare-im7" fileref="draksambashare15.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>A new entry is thus added. It can be modified with the +<guibutton>Modify</guibutton> button. Options can be edited, such as whether +the directory is visible to the public, writable or browseable. The share +name can not be modified.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" fileref="draksambashare16.png" xml:id="draksambashare-im8" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Menu entries</title> + + <para>When the list has at least one entry, menu entries can be used.</para> + + <formalpara> + <title>File|Write conf</title> + + <para>Save the current configuration in <code>/etc/samba/smb.conf</code>.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba server|Configure</title> + + <para>The wizard can be run again with this command.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba server|Restart</title> + + <para>The server is stopped and restarted with the current configuration files.</para> + </formalpara> + + <formalpara> + <title>Samba Server|Reload</title> + + <para>The configuration displayed is reloaded from the current configuration +files.</para> + </formalpara> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Printers share</title> + + <para>Samba also allows you to share printers.</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare17.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Samba users</title> + + <para>In this tab, you can add users who are allowed to access the shared +resources when authentication is required. You can add users from <xref +linkend="userdrake"/><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksambashare18.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksec.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksec.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a474a732 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksec.xml @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="draksec"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksec-ti1">Configure authentication for Mageia tools</title> + + <subtitle>draksec</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="draksec-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="draksec0.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draksec</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote>is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Security</emphasis></para> + + <para>It allows to give the regular users the needed rights to accomplish tasks +usually done by the administrator.</para> + + <para>Click on the little arrow before the item you want to drop down: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksec.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Most of the tools available in the Mageia Control Center are displayed in +the left side of the window (see the screenshot above) and for each tool, a +drop down list on the right side gives the choice between:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Default: The launch mode depends on the chosen security level. See in the +same MCC tab, the tool "Configure system security, permissions and audit".</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>User password: The user password is asked before the tool launching.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Administrator password: The root password is asked before the tool launching</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>No password: The tool is launched without asking any password.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksnapshot-config.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksnapshot-config.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..40b3d4a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksnapshot-config.xml @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xml:id="draksnapshot-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksnapshot-config-ti1">Snapshots</title> + <subtitle>draksnapshot-config</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="draksnapshot-config-im1" revision="1" align="center" + format="PNG" fileref="draksnapshot-config.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draksnapshot-config </emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is available in MCC's +<guilabel>System</guilabel> tab, in the <guilabel>Administration +tools</guilabel> section.</para> + <para>When you start this tool in MCC for the first time, you will see a message +about installing draksnapshot. Click on <guibutton>Install</guibutton> to +proceed. Draksnapshot and some other packages it needs will be installed.</para> + + <para>Click again on <guilabel>Snapshots</guilabel>, you will see the +<guilabel>Settings</guilabel> screen. Tick <guilabel>Enable +Backups</guilabel> and, if you want to backup the whole system, +<guilabel>Backup the whole system</guilabel>.</para> + <para>If you only want to backup part of your directories, then choose +<guilabel>Advanced</guilabel>. You will see a little pop-up screen. Use the +<guibutton>Add</guibutton> and <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> buttons next to +the <guilabel>Backup list</guilabel> to include or exclude directories and +files from the backup. Use the same buttons next to the +<guilabel>Exclude</guilabel> list to remove subdirectories and/or files from +the chosen directories, that should <emphasis role="bold">not</emphasis> be +included in the backup. Click on <guibutton>Close</guibutton> when you are +done.</para> + <para>Now give the path to <guilabel>Where to backup</guilabel>, or choose the +<guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select the correct path. Any mounted +USB-key or external HD can be found in <emphasis +role="bold">/run/media/your_user_name/</emphasis>. + </para> + <para>Click on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> to make the snapshot.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksound.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksound.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff4c5608 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/draksound.xml @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xml:id="draksound" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="draksound-ti1">Sound Configuration</title> + <subtitle>draksound</subtitle> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="draksound-im1" fileref="draksound.png" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">draksound</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.</para> + <para>Draksound deals with the sound configuration, PulseAudio options and +troubleshooting. It will help you if you experience sound problems or if you +change the sound card.</para> + <para><guilabel>PulseAudio</guilabel> is a sound server. It receives all the sound +inputs, mixes them according to the user preferences and sends the resulting +sound to the output. See <guimenu>Menu ->Sound and video -> PulseAudio +volume control</guimenu> to set these preferences.</para> + <para>PulseAudio is the default sound server and it is recommended to leave it +enabled.</para> + <para><guilabel>Glitch-Free</guilabel> improves PulseAudio with some programs. It +is also recommended to leave it enabled.</para> + <para>The <guibutton>Troubleshooting</guibutton> button gives assistance with +fixing any problems you may have. You will find it helpful to try this +before asking the community for help.</para> + <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button displays a new window with an +obvious button.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="draksound1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakups.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakups.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6030f5a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakups.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakups" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakups-ti1">Set up a UPS for power monitoring</title><subtitle>drakups</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakups-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakups.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakups</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakvpn.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakvpn.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..09f22bc2 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakvpn.xml @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakvpn"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakvpn-ti1">Configure VPN Connection to secure network access</title> + + <subtitle>drakvpn</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" xml:id="drakvpn-im1" align="center" fileref="drakvpn1.png" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>Introduction</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakvpn</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows to configure secure +access to a remote network establishing a tunnel between the local +workstation and the remote network. We discuss here only of the +configuration on the workstation side. We assume that the remote network is +already in operation, and that you have the connection information from the +network administrator, like a .pcf configuration file .</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Configuración</title> + + <para>First, select either Cisco VPN Concentrator or OpenVPN, depending on which +protocol is used for your virtual private network.</para> + + <para>Then give your connection a name.</para> + + <para>At the next screen, provide the details for your VPN connection.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>For Cisco VPN</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakvpn3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>For openvpn. The openvpn package and its dependencies will be installed the +first time the tool is used.</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakvpn7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>Select the files that you received +from the network administrator.</para> + + <para>Advanced parameters:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakvpn8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The next screen asks for IP-address of the gateway.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>When the parameters are set, you have the option of starting the VPN +connection.</para> + + <para>This VPN connection can be set to start automatically with a network +connection. To do this, reconfigure the network connection to always connect +to this VPN.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_apache2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_apache2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..200e4ed3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_apache2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_apache2" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-ti1">Configure webserver</title><subtitle>drakwizard apache2</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_apache2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard apache2</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up a web +server. + </para> + <section> + <title>What is a web server?</title> + <para> + Web server is the software that helps to deliver web content that can be +accessed through the Internet. (From Wikipedia) + </para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Setting up a web server with drakwizard apache2</title> + <para> + Welcome to the web server wizard. + </para> + <procedure> + <step> + <title>Introduction</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Exposing the web server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad +things. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server User Module</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Allows users to create their own sites. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>User web directory name</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + The user needs to create and populate this directory, then the server will +display it. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server Document Root</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Allows you to configure the path to the web servers default documents. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Summary</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Finish</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_apache2-im8" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-web-step7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_bind.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_bind.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5def6a07 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_bind.xml @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_bind" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_bind-ti1">Configure DNS</title><subtitle>drakwizard bind</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_bind-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_bind.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + + + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard bind</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_dhcp.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_dhcp.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5569f30e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_dhcp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-ti1">Configure DHCP</title> + + <subtitle>drakwizard dhcp</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im1" fileref="drakwizard_dhcp.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><note> + <para>This tool is broken in Mageia 4 because of new naming scheme for the Net +interfaces</para> + </note></para> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard dhcp</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> can help you to set up a +<acronym>DHCP</acronym> server. It is a component of drakwizard which should +be installed before you can access to it.</para> + + <section> + <title>What is DHCP?</title> + + <para>The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (<acronym>DHCP</acronym>) is a +standardized networking protocol used on IP networks that dynamically +configures IP addresses and other information that is needed for Internet +communication. (From Wikipedia)</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Setting up a DHCP server with drakwizard dhcp</title> + + <para>Welcome to the DHCP server wizard.</para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <title>Introduction</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Selecting Adaptor</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose the network interface, which is connected to the subnet, and for +which DHCP will assign IP addresses, and then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Select IP range</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step3.png" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Select the beginning and ending IP addresses of the range of IPs you want +the server to offer, along with the IP of the gateway machine connecting to +some place outside the local network, hopefully close to the Internet, then +click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Summary</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step4.png" revision="1" align="center" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im5" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Hold on...</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step5.png" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im6"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This can be fixed. Click <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> a few times and +change things around.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Hours later...</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" fileref="drakwizard-dhcp-step6.png" align="center" format="PNG" xml:id="drakwizard_dhcp-im7"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section> + <title>What is done</title> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Installing the package dhcp-server if needed;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Saving <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf</code> in <code>/etc/dhcpd.conf.orig;</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Creating a new <code>dhcpd.conf</code> starting from +<code>/usr/share/wizards/dhcp_wizard/scripts/dhcpd.conf.default</code> and +adding the new parameters:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><code>hname</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>dns</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>net</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>ip</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>mask</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>rng1</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>rng2</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>dname</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>gateway</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>tftpserverip</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>dhcpd_interface</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Also modifying Webmin configuration file +<code>/etc/webmin/dhcpd/config</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Restarting <code>dhcpd.</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_ntp.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_ntp.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..463d8c94 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_ntp.xml @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-ti1">Configure time</title> + + <subtitle>drakwizard ntp</subtitle> + </info> + + + + <mediaobject> + <!-- 2013-10-25 Lebarhon - 3 screenshots ready to be added when it is possible --> +<imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard_ntp.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_ntp-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard ntp</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> purpose is to set the time of +your server synchronised with an external server. It isn't installed by +default and you have to also install the drakwizard and drakwizard-base +packages.</para> + + <section> + <title>Setup a NTP server with drakwizard ntp</title> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para>After a welcome screen (see above), the second one ask you to choose three +time servers in the drop down lists and suggests to use pool.ntp.org twice +because this server always points to available time servers.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp2.png"> + <info> +<author> <personname/> </author> <pubdate/></info> + </imagedata> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para>The following screens allows to choose the region and the city and then, you +arrive on a summary. If something is wrong, you can obviously change it +using the <guibutton>Previous</guibutton>button. If everything is right, +click on the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button to proceed to the test. It +may take a while and you finally get this screen below:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="drakwizard-ntp3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para>Click on the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button to close the tool</para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>What is done</title> + + <para>This tool executes the following steps:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Installing the package <code>ntp</code> if needed</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Saving the files <code>/etc/sysconfig/clock</code> to +<code>/etc/sysconfig/clock.orig</code> and +<code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> to +<code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers.orig</code>;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Writing a new file <code>/etc/ntp/step-tickers</code> with the list of +servers;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Modifying the file <code>/etc/ntp.conf</code> by inserting the first server +name;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Stopping and starting <code>crond</code>, <code>atd</code> and +<code>ntpd</code> services;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Setting the hardware clock to the current system time with UTC reference.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_proftpd.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_proftpd.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9650206e --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_proftpd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-ti1">Configure FTP</title><subtitle>drakwizard proftpd</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_proftpd.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard proftpd</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up an +<acronym>FTP</acronym> server. + </para> + <section> + <title>What is <acronym>FTP</acronym>?</title> + <para> + File Transfer Protocol (<acronym>FTP</acronym>) is a standard network +protocol used to transfer files from one host to another host over a +<acronym>TCP</acronym>-based network, such as the Internet. (From Wikipedia) + </para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Setting up an FTP server with drakwizard proftpd</title> + <para> + Welcome to the FTP wizard. Buckle up. + </para> + <procedure> + <step> + <title>Introduction</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Selecting Server Exposer: Local Net and/or World</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Exposing the FTP server to the Internet has it's risks. Be ready for bad +things. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server Information</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Enter name the sever will use to introduce itself, someone to email +complaints too and whether to allow root login access. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Server Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Set listening port, jailed user, allow resumes and/or <acronym>FXP</acronym> +(File eXchange Protocol) + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Summary</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Finish</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_proftpd-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-ftp-step6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_squid.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_squid.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..19fc91c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_squid.xml @@ -0,0 +1,238 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakwizard_squid" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_squid-ti1">Configure proxy</title> + + <subtitle>drakwizard squid</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard_squid.png" format="PNG" + revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard squid</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> can help you to set up a +proxy server. It is a component of drakwizard which should be installed +before you can access to it.</para> + + <section> + <title>What is a proxy server?</title> + + <para>A proxy server is a server (a computer system or an application) that acts +as an intermediary for requests from clients seeking resources from other +servers. A client connects to the proxy server, requesting some service, +such as a file, connection, web page, or other resource available from a +different server and the proxy server evaluates the request as a way to +simplify and control its complexity. (From Wikipedia)</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Setting up a proxy server with drakwizard squid</title> + + <para>Welcome to the proxy server wizard.</para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <title>Introduction</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step1.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im2"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The first page is just an introduction, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Selecting the proxy port</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step2.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im3"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Select the proxy port browsers will connect through, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Set Memory and Disk Usage</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step3.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Set memory and disk cache limits, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Select Network Access Control</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step4.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im5"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Set visibility to local network or world, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Grant Network Access</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step5.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im6"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Grant access to local networks, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Use Upper Level Proxy Server?</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step6.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im7"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Cascade through another proxy server? If no, skip next step.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Upper Level Proxy URL and Port</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step7.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im8"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Provide upper level proxy hostname and port, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Summary</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step8.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im9"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Start during boot?</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step9.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im10"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose if the proxy server should be started during the boot time, then +click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Finish</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="drakwizard-proxy-step10.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="drakwizard_squid-im11"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>.</para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section> + <title>What is done</title> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Installing the package squid if needed;</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Saving <code>/etc/squid/squid.conf</code> in +<code>/etc/squid/squid.conf.orig;</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Creating a new <code>squid.conf</code> starting from +<code>squid.conf.default</code> and adding the new parameters:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><code>cache_dir</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>localnet</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>cache_mem</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>http_port</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>level</code> 1, 2 or 3 and <code>http_access</code> according to level</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>cache_peer</code></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><code>visible_hostname</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Restarting <code>squid.</code></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist></para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_sshd.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_sshd.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eb098951 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakwizard_sshd.xml @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="drakwizard_sshd" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-ti1">OpenSSH daemon configuration</title><subtitle>drakwizard sshd</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard_sshd.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakwizard sshd</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> can help you to set up an +<acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon. + </para> + <section> + <title>What is <acronym>SSH</acronym>?</title> + <para> + Secure Shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol for secure data +communication, remote command-line login, remote command execution, and +other secure network services between two networked computers that connects, +via a secure channel over an insecure network, a server and a client +(running SSH server and <acronym>SSH</acronym> client programs, +respectively). (From Wikipedia) + </para> + </section> + <section> + <title>Setting up an <acronym>SSH</acronym> daemon with drakwizard sshd</title> + <para> + Welcome to the Open SSH wizard. + </para> + <procedure> + <step> + <title>Select Type of Configure Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im2" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Choose <guilabel>Expert</guilabel> for all options or +<guilabel>Newbie</guilabel> to skip steps 3-7, click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>General Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im3" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Sets visibility and root access options. Port 22 is the standard +<acronym>SSH</acronym> port. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Authentication Methods</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im4" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Allow a variety of authentication methods users can use while connecting, +then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Logging</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im5" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Choose logging facility and level of output, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Login Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im6" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Configure per-login settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>User Login Options</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im7" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Configure the user access settings, then click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Compression and Forwarding</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im8" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Configure X11 forwarding and compression during transfer, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Summary</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im9" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + Take a second to check these options, then click +<guibutton>Next</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + <step> + <title>Finish</title> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="drakwizard_sshd-im10" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="drakwizard-sshd-step9.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> + You're done! Click <guibutton>Finish</guibutton>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakxservices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakxservices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9eb36d1d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/drakxservices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="drakxservices"> + <info> + <title xml:id="drakxservices-ti1">Manage system services by enabling or disabling them</title> + <subtitle>drakxservices</subtitle> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="drakxservices-im1" fileref="drakxservices.png" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Doc +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">drakxservices</emphasis> as root.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/harddrake2.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/harddrake2.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..20b3d725 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/harddrake2.xml @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="harddrake2" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="harddrake2-ti1">Hardware configuration</title> + + <subtitle>harddrake2</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="harddrake2.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="harddrake2-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">harddrake2</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> gives a general view of the +hardware of your computer. When the tool is launched, it executes a job to +look for every element of the hardware. For that, it uses the command +<code>ldetect </code>which refers to a list of hardware in +<code>ldetect-lst</code> package.</para> + + <section> + <title>The window</title> + + <para>The window is divided in two columns.</para> + + <para>The left column contains a list of the detected hardware. The devices are +grouped by categories. Click on the > to expand the content of a +category. Each device can be selected in this column.</para> + + <para>The right column displays information about the selected device. The +<guimenu>Help -> Fields description</guimenu> gives some information +about the content of the fields.</para> + + <para>According to which type of device is selected, either one or two buttons are +available at the bottom of the right column:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><guibutton>Set current driver options</guibutton>: this can be used to +parameterize the module which is used in relation to the device. This must +used by experts only.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><guibutton>Run config tool</guibutton>: access to the tool which can +configure the device. The tool can often be accessed directly from the MCC.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para/> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The menu</title> + + <para><bridgehead>Opciones</bridgehead></para> + + <para>The <guimenu>options</guimenu> menu gives the opportunity to check boxes to +enable automatic detection:</para> + + <para><itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>modem</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Jaz devices</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Zip parallel devices</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist>By default these detections are not enabled, because they are slow. Check +the appropriate box(es) if you have this hardware connected. Detection will +be operational the next time this tool is started.</para> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/keyboarddrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/keyboarddrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a21b2248 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/keyboarddrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="keyboarddrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="keyboarddrake-ti1">Set up the Keyboard Layout</title> + + + + <!-- 2012-09-02 marja changed the title to "Set up the Keyboard Layout", so it is the same as the title in MCC --> +<subtitle>keyboarddrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" fileref="keyboarddrake.png" xml:id="keyboarddrake-im1" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section> + <title>Introduction</title> + + <para>The keyboarddrake tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">keyboarddrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> helps you +configure the basic layout for the keyboard that you wish to use on +Mageia. It affects the keyboard layout for all users on the system. It can +be found in the Hardware section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled +"Configure mouse and keyboard".</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Keyboard Layout</title> + + <para>Here you can select which keyboard layout you wish to use. The names (listed +in alphabetical order) describe the language, country, and/or ethnicity each +layout should be used for.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Keyboard Type</title> + + <para>This menu lets you select the type of keyboard you are using. If you are +unsure of which to choose, it is best to leave it as the default type.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/localedrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/localedrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ca9a19c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/localedrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="localedrake" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="localedrake-ti1">Manage localization for your system</title> + + <subtitle>localedrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="localedrake.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="localedrake-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can also start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">localedrake</emphasis> as root. + </para></footnote> can be found in the System +section of the Mageia Control Center (MCC) labelled "Manage localization for +your system". It opens with a window in which you can choose your +language. The choice is adapted to languages selected during installation.</para> + + <para>The <guibutton>Advanced</guibutton> button give access to activate +compatibility with old encoding (non UTF8).</para> + + <para>The second window shows a list of countries according to the selected +language. The button <guibutton>Other Countries</guibutton> gives access to +countries not listed.</para> + + <para>You have to restart your session after any modifications.</para> + +<section xml:id="input_method"> + <info> + <title xml:id="input_method-ti1">Input method</title> + </info> + <para>In the <guilabel>Other Countries</guilabel> screen you can also select an +input method (from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the list). Input +methods allow users to input multilingual characters (Chinese, Japanese, +Korean, etc).</para> + <para> For Asian and African locales, IBus will be set as default input method so +users should not need to configure it manually.</para> + <para>Other input methods (SCIM, GCIN, HIME, etc.) also provide similar functions +and can, if not available from the drop-down menu, be installed in another +part of the Mageia Control Center. See <xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref>.</para> +</section> + +</section> + diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/logdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/logdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cde05a98 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/logdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="logdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="logdrake-ti1">View and search system logs</title> + + <subtitle>logdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="logdrake-im1" format="PNG" fileref="logdrake.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">logdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found in the Mageia +Control Center System tab, labelled "<guilabel>View and search system +logs</guilabel>".</para> + + <para/> + + <section> + <title>To do a search in the logs</title> + + <para>First, enter the key string you want to look for in the <emphasis +role="bold">Matching</emphasis> field and/or the key string you want to +<emphasis>do not</emphasis> wish to see amongst the answers in the field +<emphasis role="bold">but not matching</emphasis>. Then select the file(s) +to search in the <guilabel>Choose file</guilabel> field. Optionally, it is +possible to limit the search to only one day. Select it in the <emphasis +role="bold">Calendar</emphasis>, using the little arrows on each side of the +month and year, and check "<guibutton>Show only for the selected +day</guibutton>". At last, click on the <guibutton>search</guibutton> button +to see the results in the window called <guilabel>Content of the +file</guilabel>. It is possible to save the results in the .txt format by +clicking on the <emphasis role="bold">Save</emphasis> button.</para> + + <note> + <para>The <guibutton>Mageia Tools Logs</guibutton> houses the logs from the Mageia +configuration tools such as the Mageia Control Center tools. These logs are +updated each time a configuration is modified.</para> + </note> + </section> + + <section> + <title>To configure a mail alert</title> + + <para><guibutton>Mail alert</guibutton> automatically checks the system load and +the services every hour and if necessary sends an e-mail to the configured +address.</para> + + <para>To configure this tool, click on the <emphasis role="bold">Mail +Alert</emphasis> button and then, in the next screen, on the<guibutton> +Configure the mail alert system</guibutton> drop down button. Here, all the +running services are displayed and you can choose which ones you want to +look watch. (See screenshot above).</para> + + <para>The following services can be watched :</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Webmin Service</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Postfix Mail Server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>FTP Server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Apache World Wide Web Server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>SSH Server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Samba Server</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Xinetd Service</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>BIND Domain Name Resolve</para> + + <para><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="logdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>In the next screen, select the <guilabel>Load</guilabel> value you consider +unacceptable. The load represents the demand to a process, a high load slows +the system down and a very high load may indicate that a process has gone +out of control. The default value is 3. We recommend setting the load value +to 3 times the number of processors.</para> + + <para>In the last screen, enter the <guilabel>Email address</guilabel> of the +person to be warned and the <guilabel>Email server</guilabel> to use (local +or on the Internet).</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/lsnetdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/lsnetdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..64f369a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/lsnetdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section +xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" +xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" +xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" +xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" +xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" +xml:id="lsnetdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="lsnetdrake-ti1">Display Available NFS And SMB Shares</title> + <subtitle>lsnetdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">lsnetdrake</emphasis>. + </para> + </footnote> can only be started and used +on the command line.</para> + + <para>This page hasn't been written yet for lack of resources. If you think you +can write this help, please contact <link +ns2:href="https://wiki.mageia.org/en/Documentation_team"> the Documentation +team.</link> Thanking you in advance.</para> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/lspcidrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/lspcidrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8b67ca4d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/lspcidrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="lspcidrake"> + <info> + <title xml:id="lspcidrake-ti1">Display Your PCI, USB and PCMCIA Information</title> + + <subtitle>lspcidrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">lspcidrake</emphasis>.</para> + </footnote> can only be started and used +on the command line. It will give some more information if used under root.</para> + + <para>lspcidrake gives the list of all the connected devices to the computer (USB, +PCI and PCMCIA) and the used drivers. It needs the ldetect and ldetect-lst +packages to work.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="lspcidrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>With the -v option, lspcidrake adds the vendor and device identifications.</para> + + <para>lspcidrake often generates very long lists, so, to find an information, it +is often used in a pipeline with the grep command, like in these examples:</para> + + <para>Information about the graphic card;</para> + + <para><command>lspcidrake | grep VGA</command></para> + + <para>Information about the network</para> + + <para><command>lspcidrake | grep -i network</command></para> + + <para>-i to ignore case distinctions.</para> + + <para>In this screenshot below, you can see the action of the -v option for +lspcidrake and the -i option for grep.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="lspcidrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>There is another tool that gives information about the hardware, it is +called <emphasis role="bold">dmidecode</emphasis> (under root)</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-boot.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-boot.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..033f61d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-boot.xml @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="mcc-boot"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-boot-ti1">Boot</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-boot.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" xml:id="mcc-boot-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your boot +steps. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + + <orderedlist><title>Configure boot steps</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakautologin"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakboot"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakedm"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakautologin.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakboot.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakedm.xml"></xi:include> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-hardware.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-hardware.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b2cf411d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-hardware.xml @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="mcc-hardware"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-hardware-ti1">Hardware</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-hardware.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-hardware-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to configure your +hardware. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>Manage your hardware</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="harddrake2"/><emphasis> = Browse and configure +hardware</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draksound"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>Configure graphics</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drak3d"/><emphasis> = Configure 3D Desktop effects</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="XFdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>Configure mouse and keyboard</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="keyboarddrake"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="mousedrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>Configure printing and scanning</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="system-config-printer"/><emphasis> = Set up the printer(s), +the print job queues, ...</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="scannerdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + + <orderedlist><title>Others</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakups"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="harddrake2.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draksound.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drak3d.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="XFdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="keyboarddrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="mousedrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="system-config-printer.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="scannerdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakups.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-intro.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-intro.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1edb5ff0 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-intro.xml @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xml:id="mcc-intro"><info><title xml:id="mcc-intro-ti1">About the Manual for the Mageia Control Center</title></info> + + + <para>The Mageia Control Center (MCC) has eight different options or tabs to +choose from in the left column, and even ten if the drakwizard package was +installed. Each of these tabs gives a different set of tools that can be +selected in the big right panel.</para> + + <para>The ten following chapters are about those ten options and the related +tools.</para> + +<para>The last chapter is about some other Mageia tools, that cannot be chosen in +any of the MCC tabs.</para> + + <para>The titles of the pages will often be the same as the titles of the tool +screens.</para> + + <para>There is also a search bar available, which you can access by clicking on +the "Search" tab in the left column.</para> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-localdisks.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-localdisks.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..af07e78c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-localdisks.xml @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-localdisks" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-localdisks-ti1">Local disks</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="mcc-localdisks-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-localdisks.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools to manage or share your +local disks. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>Local disks</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="drakdisk"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--removable"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--fileshare"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakdisk.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--removable.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--fileshare.xml"></xi:include> + + + </section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-network.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-network.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8ed5fe49 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-network.xml @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-network" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:lang="en"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-network-ti1">Network and Internet</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-network.png" xml:id="mcc-network-im1" /> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several network tools. Click on a link +below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>Manage your network devices</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draknetcenter"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconnect"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconnect--del"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>Personalize and Secure your network</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakproxy"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakgw"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draknetprofile"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakvpn"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>Others</title> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakhosts"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="draknetcenter.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakconnect.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakconnect--del.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakproxy.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakgw.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="draknetprofile.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakvpn.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakhosts.xml"/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-networkservices.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-networkservices.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63d5b448 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-networkservices.xml @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="mcc-networkservices"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-networkservices-ti1">Network Services</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-networkservices.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-networkservices-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Sharing</emphasis> are only visible if +the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can choose +between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link below or +on <xref linkend="mcc-sharing"/>to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>Network Services</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_dhcp"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_bind"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_squid"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_ntp"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_sshd"/></para> + </listitem> + + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_dhcp.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_bind.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_squid.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_ntp.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_sshd.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-networksharing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-networksharing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9a3f8d26 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-networksharing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mcc-networksharing" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-networksharing-ti1">Network Sharing</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="mcc-networksharing-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="mcc-networksharing.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for sharing drives and +directories. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>Configure Windows(R) shares</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--smb"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="draksambashare"></xref><emphasis> = Share drives and +directories with Windows (SMB) systems</emphasis></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>Configure NFS shares</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--nfs"></xref></para></listitem> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="draknfs"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist><title>Configure WebDAV shares</title> + <listitem><para><xref linkend="diskdrake--dav"></xref></para></listitem> + </orderedlist></listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--smb.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draksambashare.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--nfs.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="draknfs.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="diskdrake--dav.xml"></xi:include> + + </section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-security.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-security.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f1f5ccbd --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-security.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> + +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="mcc-security"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-security-ti1">Seguranza</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-security.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-security-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several security tools. Click on a +link below to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>Seguranza</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="msecgui"/><emphasis> = Configure system security, permissions +and audit</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakfirewall"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="draksec"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakinvictus"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakguard"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="msecgui.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakfirewall.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="draksec.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakinvictus.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="drakguard.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-sharing.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-sharing.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3b7d154d --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-sharing.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="mcc-sharing"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-sharing-ti1">Sharing</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="mcc-sharing.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="mcc-sharing-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This screen and the one for <emphasis>Network Services</emphasis> are only +visible if the <emphasis>drakwizard</emphasis> package is installed. You can +choose between several tools to set up different servers. Click on a link +below or on <xref linkend="mcc-networkservices"/>to learn more.</para> + + <orderedlist><title>Sharing</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_proftpd"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakwizard_apache2"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_proftpd.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakwizard_apache2.xml"></xi:include> + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-system.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-system.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b083a6fb --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mcc-system.xml @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xml:id="mcc-system" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mcc-system-ti1">Sistema</title> + </info> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="mcc-system-im1" fileref="mcc-system.png" align="center" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>In this screen you can choose between several system and administration +tools. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>Manage system services</title> + <listitem> + <para> <xref linkend="drakauth"/> </para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakxservices"/></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakfont"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>Localization</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakclock"/></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="localedrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <orderedlist> + <title>Administration tools</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="logdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakconsole"/></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="userdrake"/><emphasis> = Manage users on system</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="transfugdrake"/></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakauth.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakxservices.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakfont.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakclock.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="localedrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="logdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="drakconsole.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="userdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="transfugdrake.xml"/> + + <xi:include href="draksnapshot-config.xml"/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mgaapplet-config.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mgaapplet-config.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cbdf2101 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mgaapplet-config.xml @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mgaapplet-config" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mgaapplet-config-ti1">Configure updates frequency</title> + + <subtitle>mgaapplet-config</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="mgaapplet-config-im1" format="PNG" fileref="mgaapplet-config.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">mgaapplet-config</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Software +management</emphasis>. It is also available by a <guimenu>right click / +Updates configuration</guimenu> on the red icon <inlinemediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="MageiaUpdate1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </inlinemediaobject> in the system tray.</para> + + <para/> + + <para>The first slider allows you to change how frequently Mageia will check for +updates and the second the delay after booting before the first check. The +check box gives you the option to be warned when a new Mageia release is +out.</para> + + <para/> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mousedrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mousedrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1b48c5a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/mousedrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="mousedrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <info> + <title xml:id="mousedrake-ti1">Set up the pointer device (mouse, touchpad)</title> + + <subtitle>mousedrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="mousedrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="mousedrake.png" align="center" format="PNG" /> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">mousedrake</emphasis> as root.</para></footnote> is present in the Mageia +Control Center under the tab <emphasis role="bold">Hardware</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>As you must have a mouse to install Mageia, that one is already installed by +Drakinstall. This tool allows installation of another mouse.</para> + + <para>The mice are sorted by connection type and then by model. Select your mouse +and click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>. Most of the time "Universal / Any +PS/2 & USB mice" is suitable for a recent mouse. The new mouse is +immediately taken into account.</para> + + </section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/msecgui.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/msecgui.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4d06a382 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/msecgui.xml @@ -0,0 +1,358 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="msecgui"> + <info> + <title xml:id="msecgui-ti1">MSEC: System Security and Audit</title> + + <subtitle>msecgui</subtitle> + </info> + + + + + <mediaobject> + <!-- written by Lebarhon 2014/01/03 To be checked--> +<imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="msecgui-im1" revision="1" fileref="msecgui.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <section> + <title>Presentation</title> + + <para>msecgui<footnote><para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">msecgui</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is a graphic user interface for +msec that allows to configure your system security according to two +approaches:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>It sets the system behaviour, msec imposes modifications to the system to +make it more secure.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>It carries on periodic checks automatically on the system in order to warn +you if something seems dangerous.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>msec uses the concept of "security levels" which are intended to configure a +set of system permissions, which can be audited for changes or +enforcement. Several of them are proposed by Mageia, but you can define your +own customised security levels.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Overview tab</title> + + <para>See the screenshot above</para> + + <para>The first tab takes up the list of the different security tools with a +button on the right side to configure them:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Firewall, also found in the MCC / Security / Set up your personal firewall</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Updates, also found in MCC / Software Management / Update your system</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>msec itself with some information:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>enabled or not</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the configured Base security level</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the date of the last Periodic checks and a button to see a detailed report +and another button to execute the checks just now.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Security settings tab</title> + + <para>A click on the second tab or on the Security +<guibutton>Configure</guibutton> button leads to the same screen shown +below.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + <section> + <title>Basic security tab</title> + + <para role="underline"> + <emphasis role="underline">Security levels:</emphasis> + </para> + + <para>After having checked the box <guilabel>Enable MSEC tool</guilabel>, this tab +allows you by a double click to choose the security level that appears then +in bold. If the box is not checked, the level « none » is applied. The +following levels are available:</para> + + <orderedlist numeration="arabic"> + <listitem> + <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">none</emphasis>. This level is intended if you +do not want to use msec to control system security, and prefer tuning it on +your own. It disables all security checks and puts no restrictions or +constraints on system configuration and settings. Please use this level only +if you are knowing what you are doing, as it would leave your system +vulnerable to attack.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">standard</emphasis>. This is the default +configuration when installed and is intended for casual users. It +constrains several system settings and executes daily security checks which +detect changes in system files, system accounts, and vulnerable directory +permissions. (This level is similar to levels 2 and 3 from past msec +versions).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Level <emphasis role="bold">secure</emphasis>. This level is intended when +you want to ensure your system is secure, yet usable. It further restricts +system permissions and executes more periodic checks. Moreover, access to +the system is more restricted. (This level is similar to levels 4 (High) and +5 (Paranoid) from old msec versions).</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Besides those levels, different task-oriented security are also provided, +such as the <emphasis role="bold">fileserver </emphasis>, <emphasis +role="bold">webserver</emphasis> and <emphasis +role="bold">netbook</emphasis> levels. Such levels attempt to pre-configure +system security according to the most common use cases.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>The last two levels called <emphasis role="bold">audit_daily </emphasis> and +<emphasis role="bold">audit_weekly</emphasis> are not really security levels +but rather tools for periodic checks only.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <para>These levels are saved in +<filename>/etc/security/msec/level.<levelname></filename>. You can define +your own customised security levels, saving them into specific files called +<filename>level.<levelname></filename>, placed into the folder +<filename>/etc/security/msec/.</filename> This function is intended for +power users which require a customised or more secure system configuration.</para> + + <caution> + <para>Keep in mind that user-modified parameters take precedence over default +level settings.</para> + </caution> + + <para> + <emphasis role="underline">Security alerts:</emphasis> + </para> + + <para>If you check the box <guibutton>Send security alerts by email +to:</guibutton>, the security alerts generated by msec are going to be sent +by local e-mail to the security administrator named in the nearby field. You +can fill either a local user or a complete e-mail address (the local e-mail +and the e-mail manager must be set accordingly). At last, you can receive +the security alerts directly on your desktop. Check the relevant box to +enable it.</para> + + <important> + <para>It is strongly advisable to enable the security alerts option in order to +immediately inform the security administrator of possible security +problems. If not, the administrator will have to regularly check the logs +files available in <filename>/var/log/security.</filename></para></important> + + <para><emphasis role="underline">Security options:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Creating a customised level is not the only way to customise the computer +security, it is also possible to use the tabs presented here after to change +any option you want. Current configuration for msec is stored in +<filename>/etc/security/msec/security.conf</filename>. This file contains +the current security level name and the list of all the modifications done +to the options.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>System security tab</title> + + <para>This tab displays all the security options on the left side column, a +description in the centre column, and their current values on the right side +column.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>To modify an option, double click on it and a new window appears (see +screenshot below). It displays the option name, a short description, the +actual and default values, and a drop down list where the new value can be +selected. Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the +choice.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui11.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <caution> + <para>Do not forget when leaving msecgui to save definitively your configuration +using the menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you +have changed the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before +saving them.</para> + </caution> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui10.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Network security</title> + + <para>This tab displays all the network options and works like the previous tab</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Periodic checks tab</title> + + <para>Periodic checks aim to inform the security administrator by means of +security alerts of all situations msec thinks potentially dangerous.</para> + + <para>This tab displays all the periodic checks done by msec and their frequency +if the box <guibutton>Enable periodic security checks</guibutton> is +checked. Changes are done like in the previous tabs.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Exceptions tab</title> + + <para>Sometimes alert messages are due to well known and wanted situations. In +these cases they are useless and wasted time for the administrator. This tab +allows you to create as many exceptions as you want to avoid unwanted alert +messages. It is obviously empty at the first msec start. The screenshot +below shows four exceptions.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>To create an exception, click on the <guibutton>Add a rule</guibutton> +button</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Select the wanted periodic check in the drop down list called +<guilabel>Check</guilabel> and then, enter the +<guilabel>Exception</guilabel> in the text area. Adding an exception is +obviously not definitive, you can either delete it using the +<guibutton>Delete</guibutton> button of the <guilabel>Exceptions</guilabel> +tab or modify it with a double clicK.</para> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Permisos</title> + <para>This tab is intended for file and directory permissions checking and +enforcement.</para> + <para>Like for the security, msec owns different permissions levels (standard, +secure, ..), they are enabled accordingly with the chosen security +level. You can create your own customised permissions levels, saving them +into specific files called <filename>perm.<levelname> </filename> placed +into the folder <filename>/etc/security/msec/</filename> . This function is +intended for power users which require a customised configuration. It is +also possible to use the tab presented here after to change any permission +you want. Current configuration is stored in +<filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf.</filename> This file contains the +list of all the modifications done to the permissions.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>Default permissions are visible as a list of rules (a rule per line). You +can see on the left side, the file or folder concerned by the rule, then the +owner, then the group and then the permissions given by the rule. If, for a +given rule:</para> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is not checked, msec only checks if the +defined permissions for this rule are respected and sends an alert message +if not, but does not change anything.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>the box <guilabel>Enforce</guilabel> is checked, then msec will rule the +permissions respect at the first periodic check and overwrite the +permissions.</para></listitem> + </itemizedlist> + <important><para>For this to work, the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis +role="bold">Periodic check tab</emphasis> must be configured accordingly.</para></important><para>To create a new rule, click on the <guibutton> Add a rule</guibutton> button +and fill the fields as shown in the example below. The joker * is allowed in +the <guilabel>File</guilabel> field. “current” means no modification.</para> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="msecgui9.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para>Click on the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to validate the choice and do +not forget when leaving to save definitively your configuration using the +menu <guimenu>File -> Save the configuration</guimenu>. If you have changed +the settings, msecgui allows you to preview the changes before saving them. </para> + <note><para>It is also possible to create or modify the rules by editing the +configuration file <filename>/etc/security/msec/perms.conf</filename>. + </para></note> + <caution><para>Changes in the <emphasis role="bold">Permission tab</emphasis> (or directly +in the configuration file) are taken into account at the first periodic +check (see the option CHECK_PERMS in the <emphasis role="bold">Periodic +checks tab</emphasis>). If you want them to be taken immediately into +account, use the msecperms command in a console with root rights. You can +use before, the msecperms -p command to know the permissions that will be +changed by msecperms.</para></caution> + <caution><para>Do not forget that if you modify the permissions in a console or in a file +manager, for a file where the box <guilabel>Enforce </guilabel> is checked +in the <emphasis role="bold">Permissions tab </emphasis>, msecgui will write +the old permissions back after a while, accordingly to the configuration of +the options CHECK_PERMS and CHECK_PERMS_ENFORCE in the <emphasis +role="bold">Periodic Checks tab </emphasis>.</para></caution> + </section> + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/otherMageiaTools.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/otherMageiaTools.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ffd03517 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/otherMageiaTools.xml @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="otherMageiaTools"> + <info> + <title xml:id="otherMageiaTools-ti1">Other Mageia Tools</title> + </info> + + <para>There are more Mageia tools than those that can be started in the Mageia +Control Center. Click on a link below to learn more, or continue reading the +next pages.</para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakbug"/><emphasis>drakbug</emphasis> + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakbug_report"/><emphasis>drakbug_report </emphasis></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="lsnetdrake"/><emphasis>TO BE WRITTEN </emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="lspcidrake"/></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>And more tools?</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="drakbug.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="drakbug_report.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="lsnetdrake.xml"></xi:include> + + <xi:include href="lspcidrake.xml"></xi:include> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/rpmdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/rpmdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6ab33fa9 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/rpmdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,251 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="rpmdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast"> + <!--2012-09-03 marja expanded xml:id's of section and title below, because they conflicted with identical xml:id's in another page of MCC help, also replaced first para in some sections with title tags, removed figure tags--> +<info annotations="simonnzg 6jan2013"> + <title xml:id="rpmdrake-ti1">Software Management (Install and Remove Software)</title> + + <subtitle>rpmdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata format="PNG" xml:id="rpmdrake-im1" align="center" fileref="rpmdrake.png" revision="1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + + + <section xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction"> + <title xml:id="rpmdrake-introduction-ti1">Introduction to rpmdrake</title> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">rpmdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote>, also known as drakrpm, is a +program for installing, uninstalling and updating packages. It is the +graphical user interface of URPMI. At each start up, it will check online +package lists (called 'media') downloaded straight from Mageia's official +servers, and will show you each time the latest applications and packages +available for your computer. A filter system allows you to display only +certain types of packages: you may display only installed applications (by +default), or only available updates. You can also view only not installed +packages. You can also search by the name of a package, or in the summaries +of descriptions or in the full descriptions of packages or in the file names +included in the packages.</para> + + <para>To work, rpmdrake needs the repositories to be configured with <xref +linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/> .</para> + + <important> + <para>During the installation, the configured repository is the medium used for +the installation, generally the DVD or CD. If you keep this medium, rpmdrake +will ask it each time you want to install a package, with this pop-up window +: <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake8.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject>If the above message annoys you +and you have a good internet connection without too strict download limit, +it is wise to remove that medium and replace it by online repositories +thanks to <xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"/> .</para> + + <para>Moreover, the online repositories are always up to date, contains much more +packages, and allow to update your installed packages.</para> + </important> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The main parts of the screen</title> + + <screenshot> +<mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></screenshot> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Package type filter:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This filter allows you to display only certain types of packages. The first +time you start the manager, it only displays applications with a graphical +interface. You can display either all the packages and all their +dependencies and libraries or only package groups such as applications only, +updates only or backported packages from newer versions of Mageia.</para> + + <warning> + <para>The default filter setting is for new entrants to Linux or Mageia, who +probably do not want command line or specialist tools. Since you're reading +this documentation, you're obviously interested in improving your knowledge +of Mageia, so it is best to set this filter to "All".</para> + </warning> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><firstterm> <emphasis role="bold">Package state filter:</emphasis> +</firstterm></para> + + <para>This filter allows you to view only the installed packages, only the +packages that are not installed or all of the packages, both installed and +not installed.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Search mode:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Click on this icon to search through the package names, through their +summaries, through their complete description or through the files included +in the packages.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">"Find" box:</emphasis></para> + + <para>Enter here one or more key words. If you want to use more than one keyword +for searching use '|' between keywords, e.g. To search for "mplayer" and +"xine" at the same time type 'mplayer | xine'.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Erase all:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This icon can erase in one click all the key words entered in the "Find" box +.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Categories list:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This side bar groups all applications and packages into clear categories and +sub categories.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para><emphasis role="bold">Description panel:</emphasis></para> + + <para>This panel displays the package's name, its summary and complete +description. It displays many useful elements about the selected package. It +can also show precise details about the package, the files included in the +package as well as a list of the last changes made by the maintainer.</para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The status column</title> + + <para>Once you correctly set the filters, you can find your software either by +category (in area 6 above) or by name/summary/description using area 4. A +list of packages fulfilling your query and, don't forget, the chosen medium +is shown with different status markers according to whether each package is +installed/not installed/an update... To change this status, just check or +uncheck the box before the package name and click on +<guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><table> + <title/> + + <tgroup align="left" cols="2"> + <colspec align="center"/> + + <thead> + <row> + <entry align="center">Icon</entry> + + <entry valign="middle" align="center">Legend</entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package is already installed</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package will be installed</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package cannot be modified</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package is an update</entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry><mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="../rpmdrake6.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></entry> + + <entry valign="middle">This package will be uninstalled</entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table></para> + + <para>Examples in the screenshot above:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If I uncheck digikam (the green arrow tell us it is installed), the status +icon will go red with an up arrow and it will be uninstalled when clicking +on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>If I check qdigidoc (which is not installed, see the status), the orange +with a down arrow status icon will appear and it will be installed when +clicking on <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section> + <title>The dependencies</title> + + <screenshot> +<mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="rpmdrake7.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></screenshot> + + <para>Some packages need other packages called dependencies in order to work. They +are for example libraries or tools. In this case, Rpmdrake displays an +information window allowing you to choose whether to accept the selected +dependencies, cancel the operation or get more information (see above). It +may also happen that various packages are able to provide the needed +library, in which case rpmdrake displays the list of alternatives with a +button to get more information and another button to choose which package to +install.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/scannerdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/scannerdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5f7e27bf --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/scannerdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,259 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<section version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="scannerdrake" + xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" + xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" + xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" + xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" + xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" + xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerdrake-ti1">Set up scanner</title> + <subtitle>scannerdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + + + <section xml:id="scannerinstallation"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerinstallation-ti1">Installation</title> + </info> + + <para>This tool <footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +<emphasis>scannerdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> allows you to configure a +single scanner device or a multifunction device which includes scanning. It +also allows you to share local devices connected to this computer with a +remote computer or to access remote scanners.</para> + + <para>When you start this tool for the first time, you may get the following +message:</para> + + <para><emphasis>"SANE packages need to be installed to use scanners</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>Do you want to install the SANE packages?"</emphasis></para> + + <para>Choose <emphasis>Yes</emphasis> to continue. It will install +<code>scanner-gui</code> and <code>task-scanning</code> if they are not yet +installed.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im1"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If your scanner is identified correctly, so if in the above screen you see +the name of your scanner, the scanner is ready for use with, for instance, +<emphasis>XSane</emphasis> or <emphasis>Simple Scan</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>In that case, you might now want to want to configure the <emphasis>Scanner +sharing</emphasis> option. You can read about it in the <xref +linkend="scannersharing"/>.</para> + + + <para>However, if your scanner hasn't been correctly identified, and checking its +cable(s) and power switch and then pressing <emphasis>Search for new +scanners</emphasis> doesn't help, you'll need to press <emphasis>Add a +scanner manually</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>Choose the brand of your scanner in the list you see, then its type from the +list for that brand and click <emphasis>Ok</emphasis></para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake2.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im2"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>If you can't find your scanner in the list, then click +<emphasis>Cancel</emphasis></para> + + <para>Please check whether your scanner is supported on the <link +xlink:href="http://www.sane-project.org/lists/sane-mfgs-cvs.html">SANE: +Supported Devices</link> page and ask for help in the <link +xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para> + </note> + +<figure xml:id="choosescannerport"> +<info> + <title xml:id="choosescannerport-ti1">Choose port</title> + </info> <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake3.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im3"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject></figure> + + <para>You can leave this setting to <emphasis>Auto-detect available +ports</emphasis> unless your scanner's interface is a parallel port. In that +case, select <emphasis>/dev/parport0</emphasis> if you have only one.</para> + + <para>After clicking <emphasis>Ok</emphasis>, in most cases you will see a screen +similar to the one below.</para> +<para>If you don't get that screen, then please read the <xref +linkend="scannerextrasteps"/>.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake4.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im4"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section xml:id="scannersharing"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannersharing-ti2">Scannersharing</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake5.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im5"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Here you can choose whether the scanners connected to this machine should be +accessible by remote machines and by which remote machines. You can also +decide here whether scanners on remote machines should be made available on +this machine.</para> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts : name or IP address of hosts can be added or +deleted from the list of hosts allowed to access the local device(s), on +this computer.</para> + + <para>Usage of remote scanners : name or IP address of hosts can added or deleted +from the list of hosts which give access to a remote scanner.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake6.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im6"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: you can add host.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake7.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im7"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Scanner sharing to hosts: specify which host(s) to add, or allow all remote +machines.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake8.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im8"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>"All remote machines" are allowed to access the local scanner.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata align="center" fileref="scannerdrake9.png" + format="PNG" revision="1" + xml:id="scannerdrake-im9"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>If the package <emphasis>saned</emphasis> is not yet installed, the tool +offers to do it.</para> + + <para>At the end, the tool will alter these files:</para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/saned.conf</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/net.conf</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis>/etc/sane.d/dll.conf </emphasis>to add or comment the directive +"net"</para> + + <para>It will also configure <emphasis>saned</emphasis> and +<emphasis>xinetd</emphasis> to be started on boot.</para> + </section> + +<section xml:id="scannerspecifics"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerspecifics-ti2">Specifics</title> + </info> + + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Hewlett-Packard</para> + + <para>Most HP scanners are managed from <emphasis>HP Device Manager</emphasis> +(hplip) which also manages printers. In this case, this tool does not allow +you to configure it and invites you to use <emphasis>HP Device +Manager</emphasis>.</para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Epson</para> + + <para>Drivers are available from <link +xlink:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this +page</link>. When indicated, you must install the +<emphasis>iscan-data</emphasis> package first, then +<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> (in this order). It is possible that the +<emphasis>iscan</emphasis> package will generate a warning about a conflict +with <emphasis>sane</emphasis>. Users have reported that this warning can be +ignored.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + +</section> + +<section xml:id="scannerextrasteps"> + <info> + <title xml:id="scannerextrasteps-ti1">Extra installation steps</title> + </info> + + <para>It is possible that after selecting a port for your scanner in the <xref +linkend="choosescannerport"/> screen, you need to take one or more extra +steps to correctly configure your scanner.</para> + +<itemizedlist> + + <listitem> +<para>In some cases, you're told the scanner needs its firmware to be uploaded +each time it is started. This tool allows you to load it into the device, +after you installed it on your system. In this screen you can install the +firmware from a CD or a Windows installation, or install the one you +downloaded from an Internet site of the vendor.</para><para> + When your device's firmware needs to be loaded, it can take a long time at +each first usage, possibly more than one minute. So be patient.</para> +</listitem> + + <listitem> +<para>Also, you may get a screen telling you to adjust the +<emphasis>/etc/sane.d/"name_of_your_SANE_backend".conf file.</emphasis> </para> + </listitem> + +<listitem> +<para>Read those or other instructions you get carefully and if you don't know +what to do, feel free to ask for help in the <link +xlink:href="http://forums.mageia.org/en/">forums</link>.</para> +</listitem> + +</itemizedlist> + + </section> +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/software-management.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/software-management.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4d12c017 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/software-management.xml @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" xmlns:ns6="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:lang="en" +xml:id="software-management"> + <info> + <title xml:id="software-management-ti1">Software Management</title> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="software-management-im1" revision="1" align="center" format="PNG" fileref="software-management.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>In this screen you can choose between several tools for software +management. Click on a link below to learn more.</para> + <orderedlist><title>Software Management</title> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="rpmdrake"></xref></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="MageiaUpdate"></xref><emphasis> = Update your +system</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="mgaapplet-config"></xref></para> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <para><xref linkend="drakrpm-edit-media"></xref><emphasis> = Configure media +sources for install and update</emphasis></para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <xi:include href="rpmdrake.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="MageiaUpdate.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="mgaapplet-config.xml"></xi:include> + <xi:include href="drakrpm-edit-media.xml"></xi:include> + + +</section> diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/system-config-printer.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/system-config-printer.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..715031aa --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/system-config-printer.xml @@ -0,0 +1,341 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="system-config-printer"> + + + + + <info> + <!-- Language proof JohnR 2012/08/28 --> +<!-- 2012-09-03 marja: made the link to Complete the installation process work (I hope) + Lebarhon : added All in one devices in the chapter "Hewlett-Packard printers" 12/13--> +<title xml:id="system-config-printer-ti1">Install and configure a printer</title> + + <subtitle>system-config-printer</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata revision="1" align="center" xml:id="system-config-printer-im1" format="PNG" fileref="system-config-printer.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section xml:id="introduction"> + <title xml:id="introduction-ti1">Introduction</title> + + <para>Printing is managed on Mageia by a server named CUPS. It has its own <link +ns2:title="CUPS" ns2:href="http://localhost:631">configuration +interface</link> which is accessible via an Internet browser, but Mageia +offers its own tool for installing printers called system-config-printer +which is shared with other distributions such as Fedora, Mandriva, Ubuntu +and openSUSE.</para> + + <para>You should enable the non-free repository before proceeding with the +installation, because some drivers may only be available in this way.</para> + + <para>Printer installation is carried out in the <guilabel>Hardware</guilabel> +section of the Mageia Control Centre. Select the <guilabel>Configure +printing and scanning</guilabel> tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing +<emphasis>system-config-printer</emphasis>. The root password will be asked +for.</para> + </footnote>.</para> + + <para>MCC will ask for the installation two packages:</para> + + <blockquote> + <para>task-printing-server</para> + + <para>task-printing-hp</para> + </blockquote> + + <para>It is necessary to accept this installation to continue. Up to 230MB of +dependencies are needed.</para> + + <para>To add a printer, choose the "Add" printer button. The system will try to +detect any printers and the ports available. The screenshot displays a +printer connected to a parallel port. If a printer is detected, such as a +printer on a USB port, it will be displayed on the first line. The window +will also attempt to configure a network printer.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="automatic"> + <title>Automatically detected printer</title> + + <para>This usually refers to USB printers. The utility automatically finds the +name of the printer and displays it. Select the printer and then click +"Next". If there is a known driver associated for the printer, it will be +automatically installed. If there is more than one driver or no known +drivers, a window will ask you to select or furnish one, as explained in the +next paragraph. Continue with <xref linkend="terminate"/></para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="non_automatic"> + <title>No automatically detected printer</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="printer3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>When you select a port, the system loads a driver list and displays a window +to select a driver. The choice can be made through one of the following +options.</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Select printer from database</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>provide PPD file</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>search for a driver to download</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>By selecting from the database, the window suggests a printer manufacturer +first, and then a device and a driver associated with it. If more than one +driver is suggested, select one which is recommended, unless you have +encountered some problems with that one before, in this case select the one +which know to work.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="terminate"> + <title>Complete the installation process</title> + + <para>After the driver selection, a window requests some information which will +allow the system to designate and discover the printer. The first line is +the name under which the device will appear in applications in the list of +available printers. The installer then suggests printing a test page. After +this step, the printer is added and appears in the list of available +printers.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="network_printer"> + <title>Network printer</title> + + <para>Network printers are printers that are attached directly to a wired or +wireless network, that are attached to a printserver or that are attached to +another workstation that serves as printserver.</para> + + <note> + <para>Often, it is better to configure the DHCP server to always associate a fixed +IP address with the printer's MAC-address. Of course that should be the same +as the IP address the printer of printserver is set to, if it has a fixed +one.</para> + </note> + + <para>The printer's Mac-address is a serial number given to the printer or +printserver or computer it is attached to, that can be obtained from a +configuration page printed by the printer or which may be written on a label +on the printer or printserver. If your shared printer is attached to a +Mageia system, you can run <emphasis><code>ifconfig</code></emphasis> on it +as root to find the MAC-address. It is the sequence of numbers and letters +after "HWaddr".</para> + + <para>You can add your network printer by choosing the protocol it uses to talk to +your computer over the network. If you don't know which protocol to choose, +you can try the <guilabel>Network Printer</guilabel> - <guilabel>Find +Network Printer</guilabel> option in the <guilabel>Devices</guilabel> menu +and give the IP address of the printer in the box on the right, where it +says "host".</para> + + <para>If the tool recognises your printer or printserver, it will propose a +protocol and a queue, but you can choose a more appropriate one from the +list below it or give the correct queue name if it isn't in the list.</para> + + <para>Look in the documentation that came with your printer or printserver to find +which protocol(s) it supports and for possible specific queue names.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="network_printing_protocols"> + <title>Network printing protocols</title> + + <para>One current technique is one developed by Hewlett-Packard and known as +JetDirect. It allows access to a printer directly connected to the network +via an Ethernet port. You must know the IP-address at which the printer is +known on the network. This technique is also used inside some ADSL-routers +which contain an USB port to connect the printer. In this case, the +IP-address is that of the router. Note that the tool "Hp Device manager" can +manage dynamically configured IP-adress, setting an URI like +<emphasis>hp:/net/<name-of-the-printer></emphasis> . In this case, fixed +IP-adress is not required.</para> + + <para>Choose the option <guilabel>AppSocket/HP JetDirect</guilabel> as the +protocol and set the address in <guilabel>Host:</guilabel>, do not change +the <guilabel>Port Number</guilabel>, unless you know that it needs to be +changed. After the selection of the protocol, the selection of the driver is +the same as above.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="printer5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The other protocols are:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipp)</emphasis>: a printer which can +be accessed on a TCP/IP network via the IPP protocol, for example a printer +connected to a station using CUPS. This protocol may also be used also by +some ADSL-routers.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (https): </emphasis>the same as ipp, +but using http transport and with TLS secured protocol. The port has to be +defined. By default, the port 631 is used.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Internet Printing Protocol (ipps): </emphasis>the same as ipp, but +with TLS secured protocol.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>LPD/LPR host or Printer</emphasis>: a printer which can be +accessed on a TCP/IP network via the LPD protocol, for example a printer +connected to a station using LPD.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para><emphasis>Windows printer via SAMBA</emphasis>: a printer connected to a +station running Windows or a SMB server and shared.</para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>The URI can also be added directly. Here are some examples on how to form +the URI:</para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para>Appsocket</para> + + <para><uri>socket://ip-address-or-hostname:port </uri></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)</para> + + <para><uri>ipp://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri></para> + + <para><uri>http://ip-address-or-hostname:port-number/resource</uri></para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para>Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol</para> + + <para><uri>lpd://username@ip-address-or-hostname/queue</uri></para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para>Additional information can be found in the <link +ns2:href="http://www.cups.org/documentation.php/doc-1.5/network.html">CUPS +documentation.</link></para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="properties"> + <title>Device Properties</title> + + <para>You can access the properties of the device. The menu allows access to +parameters for the CUPS server. By default a CUPS server is launched on your +system, but you can specify a different one with the +<guimenu>Server</guimenu> | <guimenuitem>Connect...</guimenuitem> menu, +another window which gives access to the tuning of other specific parameters +of the server, following <guimenu>Server</guimenu> | +<guimenuitem>Settings.</guimenuitem></para> + </section> + + <section> + <title xml:id="troubleshoot">Troubleshoot</title> + + <para>You can find some information on occurring errors during printing by +inspecting <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename></para> + + <para>You can also access to a tool to diagnose problems using the +<guimenu>Help</guimenu> | <guilabel>Troubleshoot</guilabel> menu.</para> + </section> + + <section xml:id="specificities"> + <title>Specifics</title> + + <para>It is possible that some drivers for specific printers are not available in +Mageia or are not functional. In this case, have a look at the <link +ns2:href="http://openprinting.org/printers/">openprinting</link> site to +check if a driver for your device is available. If yes, check if the package +is already present in Mageia and in this case install it manually. Then, +redo the installation process to configure the printer. In all cases, report +the problem in bugzilla or on the forum if you are comfortable with this +tool and furnish the model and driver information and whether the printer +works or not after installation. Here are some sources to find other +up-to-date drivers or for more recent devices.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Brother printers</emphasis></para> + + <para><link +ns2:href="http://welcome.solutions.brother.com/bsc/public_s/id/linux/en/download_prn.html">This +page</link> give a list of drivers provided by Brother. Search the driver +for your device, download the rpm(s) and install.</para> + + <para>You should install Brother drivers before running the configuration utility.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Hewlett-Packard printers and All in one +devices</emphasis></para> + + <para>These devices use the hplip tool. It is installed automatically after the +detection or the selection of the printer. You can find other information +<link +ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/index.html">here</link>. The +tool "HP Device Manager" is available in the <guilabel>System</guilabel> +menu. Also view <link +ns2:href="http://hplipopensource.com/hplip-web/install/manual/hp_setup.html">configuration</link> +for the management of the printer.</para> + + <para>A HP All in one device must be installed as a printer and the scanner +features will be added. Note that sometimes, the Xsane interface doesn't +allow to scan films or slides (the lighting slid can't operate). In this +case, it is possible to scan, using the standalone mode, and save the +picture on a memory card or USB stick inserted in the device. Afterwards, +open your favourite imaging software and load your picture from the memory +card which is appeared in the /media folder.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Samsung colour printer</emphasis></para> + + <para>For specific Samsung and Xerox colour printers, <link +ns2:href="http://foo2qpdl.rkkda.com/">this site provides drivers</link> for +the QPDL protocol.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Epson printers and scanners</emphasis></para> + + <para>Drivers for Epson printers are available from <link +ns2:href="http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LX">this +search page</link>. For the scanner part, you must install the "iscan-data" +package first, then "iscan" (in this order). A iscan-plugin package can also +be available and is to install. Choose the <emphasis>rpm</emphasis> packages +according to your architecture. </para> + + <para> It is possible that the iscan package will generate a warning about a +conflict with sane. Users have reported that this warning can be ignored.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Canon printers</emphasis></para> + + <para>For Canon printers, it may be advisable to install a tool named turboprint +<link ns2:href="http://www.turboprint.info/">available here </link>.</para> + </section> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/transfugdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/transfugdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..57fd4717 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/transfugdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xml:id="transfugdrake" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:lang="en"> + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Written by yurchor 2013-07-03 --> +<!-- Tproof --> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="transfugdrake-ti1">Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</title> + + <subtitle>transfugdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="transfugdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="transfugdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">transfugdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the <emphasis +role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labeled +<guilabel>Import Windows(TM) documents and settings</guilabel></para> + + <para>The tool allows an administrator to import the user documents and settings +from a <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> 2000, <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> XP or <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> <trademark>Vista</trademark> +installation on the same computer as the Mageia installation.</para> + + <warning> + <para>Please note that all the changes will be applied by transfugdrake +immediately after pressing <guibutton>Next</guibutton>.</para> + </warning> + + <para>After starting transfugdrake you will see the first wizard page with some +explanation about the tool and import options.</para> + + <para>As soon as you read and understand the instructions, press the +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. This should run a detection of +<trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> installation.</para> + + <para>When the detection step is complete you will see a page which allows you to +choose accounts in <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> and +Mageia for the import procedure. It is possible to choose other user account +than yours own.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para>Please take into account that due to migrate-assistant (the backend of +transfugdrake) limitations <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> +user account names with special symbols can be displayed incorrectly.</para> + </note> + + <note> + <para>Migration may take some time depending on the size of the document folders.</para> + </note> + + <warning> + <para>Some <trademark class="registered">Windows</trademark> applications +(especially drivers) may create user accounts for different purposes. For +example, NVidia drivers in <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark>are updated using +<emphasis>UpdatusUser</emphasis>. Please do not use such accounts for the +import purposes.</para> + </warning> + + <para>When you finished with the accounts selection press +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method +to import documents:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Transfugdrake is designed to import <trademark +class="registered">Windows</trademark> data from <emphasis>My +Documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>My Music</emphasis> and <emphasis>My +Pictures</emphasis> folders. It is possible to skip import by selecting the +appropriate item in this window.</para> + + <para>When you finished with the document import method choosing press +<guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method +to import bookmarks:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Transfugdrake can import <emphasis>Internet Explorer</emphasis> and +<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> bookmarks into the bookmarks of Mageia +<emphasis>Mozilla Firefox</emphasis> instance.</para> + + <para>Choose the preferred import option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> +button.</para> + + + + <!-- Does not work as expected, might be due to incompatible version of OE + <para> +With transfugdrake, it is possible to import <emphasis>Outlook Express</emphasis> settings and mail archives into <emphasis>Evolution</emphasis>.</para> + + <para>When you finished with the mail import method choosing press <guibutton>Next</guibutton> button. The next page is used to select a method to import mail:</para> +--> +<para>The next page allows you to import desktop background:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake4.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>Choose the preferred option and press the <guibutton>Next</guibutton> +button.</para> + + <para>The last page of wizard shows some congratulation message. Just press the +<guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="transfugdrake5.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/userdrake.xml b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/userdrake.xml new file mode 100644 index 00000000..453926a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/docs/stable/mcc-help/ast/userdrake.xml @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?><section xmlns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" xmlns:ns5="http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML" xmlns:ns4="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:ns3="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xmlns:ns2="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" xmlns:ns="http://docbook.org/ns/docbook" version="5.0" xml:lang="ast" xml:id="userdrake"> + + + + + + + + + <info> + <!-- Written AM desmottes (lebarhon) 2012-08-27 --> +<!-- Tproof --> +<!-- Preliminary lproof JohnR 2012-08-30 --> +<!-- --> +<title xml:id="userdrake-ti1">Users and Groups</title> + + <subtitle>userdrake</subtitle> + </info> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata xml:id="userdrake-im1" revision="1" fileref="userdrake.png" align="center" format="PNG"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>This tool<footnote> + <para>You can start this tool from the command line, by typing <emphasis +role="bold">userdrake</emphasis> as root.</para> + </footnote> is found under the <emphasis +role="bold">System</emphasis> tab in the Mageia Control Center labelled +"Manage users on system"</para> + + <para>The tool allows an administrator to manage the users and the groups, this +means to add or delete a user or group and to modify user and group settings +(ID, shell, ...)</para> + + <para>When userdrake is opened, all the users existing on the system are listed in +the <guibutton>Users</guibutton> tab, and all the groups in the +<guibutton>Groups</guibutton> tab. Both tabs operate the same way.</para> + + <para><guibutton>1 Add User</guibutton></para> + + <para>This button opens a new window with all fields shown empty:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="userdrake1.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The field <emphasis role="bold">Full Name</emphasis> is intended for the +entry of a family name and first name, but it is possible to write anything +or nothing as well!</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Login</emphasis> is the only required field.</para> + + <para>Setting a <emphasis role="bold">Password</emphasis> is highly +recommended. There is a little shield on the right, if it is red, the +password is weak, too short or is too similar to the login name. You should +use figures, lower and upper case characters, punctuation marks, etc. The +shield will turn orange and then green as the password strength improves.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Confirm Password</emphasis> field is there to ensure +you entered what you intended to.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Login Shell </emphasis>is a drop down list that allows +you to change the shell used by the user you are adding, the options are +Bash, Dash and Sh.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Create a private group for the user</emphasis>, if +checked will automatically create a group with the same name and the new +user as the only member (this may be edited).</para> + + <para>The other options should be obvious. The new user is created immediately +after you click on <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">2 Add Group</emphasis></para> + + <para>You only need to enter the new group name, and if required, the specific +group ID.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">3 Edit</emphasis> (a selected user)</para> + + <para><guibutton>User Data</guibutton>: Allows you to modify all the data given +for the user at creation (the ID can't be changed).</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Account Info</emphasis>:</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="userdrake2.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para>The first option is for setting an expiration date for the account. +Connection is impossible after this date. This is useful for temporary +accounts.</para> + + <para>The second option is to lock the account, connection is impossible as long +as the account is locked.</para> + + <para>It is also possible to change the icon.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Password Info</emphasis>: Allows you to set an +expiration date for the password, this forces the user to change his +password periodically.</para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> + <imagedata fileref="userdrake3.png"/> + </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group</emphasis>: Here you can select the groups that +the user is a member of.</para> + + <note> + <para>If you are modifying a connected user account, modifications will not be +effective until his/her next login.</para> + </note> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">4 Edit</emphasis> (with a group selected)</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Data</emphasis>: Allows you to modify the group +name.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">Group Users</emphasis>: Here you can select the users +who are members of the group</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">5 Delete</emphasis></para> + + <para>Select a user or a group and click on <emphasis +role="bold">Delete</emphasis> to remove it. For a user, a window appears to +ask if home directory and mailbox must also be deleted. If a private group +has been created for the user, it will be deleted as well.</para> + + <warning> + <para>It is possible to delete a group which is not empty.</para> + </warning> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">6 Refresh</emphasis></para> + + <para>The User database can be changed outside of Userdrake. Click on this icon to +refresh the display.</para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">7 Guest Account</emphasis></para> + + <para><emphasis role="bold">guest</emphasis> is a special account. It is intended +to give somebody temporary access to the system with total security. Login +is xguest, there is no password, and it is impossible to make modifications +to the system from this account. The personal directories are deleted at the +end of the session. This account is enabled by default, to disable it, click +in the menu on<guimenu> Actions -> Uninstall guest account</guimenu>.</para> +</section>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/docs/stylesheets/WebHelp-DrakX.xsl b/docs/stylesheets/WebHelp-DrakX.xsl index 1dc7e580..fb598c18 100644 --- a/docs/stylesheets/WebHelp-DrakX.xsl +++ b/docs/stylesheets/WebHelp-DrakX.xsl @@ -42,17 +42,17 @@ are in the xml:id's --> <xsl:param name="local.l10n.xml" select="document('')"/> <l:i18n xmlns:l="http://docbook.sourceforge.net/xmlns/l10n/1.0"> <l:l10n language="ast"> - <l:gentext key="Search" text="Guetar"/> - <l:gentext key="Enter_a_term_and_click" text="Introduz un términu y fai clic"/> - <l:gentext key="Go" text="Dir"/> - <l:gentext key="to_perform_a_search" text="pa facer una gueta."/> - <l:gentext key="txt_filesfound" text="Resultaos"/> - <l:gentext key="txt_enter_at_least_1_char" text="Has introducir polo menos un caráuter."/> - <l:gentext key="txt_browser_not_supported" text="JavaScript ta desactiváu nel restolador. Actívalu pa esfrutar de toles carauterístiques d'esti sitiu."/> - <l:gentext key="txt_please_wait" text="Espera, por favor. Gueta en cursu..."/> - <l:gentext key="txt_results_for" text="Resultaos pa:"/> - <l:gentext key="TableofContents" text="Conteníos"/> - <l:gentext key="HighlightButton" text="Alternar resaltáu de resultaos de gueta"/> + <l:gentext key="Search" text="Search"/> + <l:gentext key="Enter_a_term_and_click" text="Enter a term and click "/> + <l:gentext key="Go" text="Go"/> + <l:gentext key="to_perform_a_search" text=" to perform a search."/> + <l:gentext key="txt_filesfound" text="Results"/> + <l:gentext key="txt_enter_at_least_1_char" text="You must enter at least one character."/> + <l:gentext key="txt_browser_not_supported" text="JavaScript is disabled on your browser. Please enable JavaScript to enjoy all the features of this site."/> + <l:gentext key="txt_please_wait" text="Please wait. Search in progress..."/> + <l:gentext key="txt_results_for" text="Results for: "/> + <l:gentext key="TableofContents" text="Contents"/> + <l:gentext key="HighlightButton" text="Toggle search result highlighting"/> <l:gentext key="Your_search_returned_no_results" text="La gueta nun devolvió resultaos."/> </l:l10n> <l:l10n language="bg"> diff --git a/docs/stylesheets/WebHelp-MCC.xsl b/docs/stylesheets/WebHelp-MCC.xsl index 7d4ab099..bf4da595 100644 --- a/docs/stylesheets/WebHelp-MCC.xsl +++ b/docs/stylesheets/WebHelp-MCC.xsl @@ -39,17 +39,17 @@ are in the xml:id's --> <xsl:param name="local.l10n.xml" select="document('')"/> <l:i18n xmlns:l="http://docbook.sourceforge.net/xmlns/l10n/1.0"> <l:l10n language="ast"> - <l:gentext key="Search" text="Guetar"/> - <l:gentext key="Enter_a_term_and_click" text="Introduz un términu y fai clic"/> - <l:gentext key="Go" text="Dir"/> - <l:gentext key="to_perform_a_search" text="pa facer una gueta."/> - <l:gentext key="txt_filesfound" text="Resultaos"/> - <l:gentext key="txt_enter_at_least_1_char" text="Has introducir polo menos un caráuter."/> - <l:gentext key="txt_browser_not_supported" text="JavaScript ta desactiváu nel restolador. Actívalu pa esfrutar de toles carauterístiques d'esti sitiu."/> - <l:gentext key="txt_please_wait" text="Espera, por favor. Gueta en cursu..."/> - <l:gentext key="txt_results_for" text="Resultaos pa:"/> - <l:gentext key="TableofContents" text="Conteníos"/> - <l:gentext key="HighlightButton" text="Alternar resaltáu de resultaos de gueta"/> + <l:gentext key="Search" text="Search"/> + <l:gentext key="Enter_a_term_and_click" text="Enter a term and click "/> + <l:gentext key="Go" text="Go"/> + <l:gentext key="to_perform_a_search" text=" to perform a search."/> + <l:gentext key="txt_filesfound" text="Results"/> + <l:gentext key="txt_enter_at_least_1_char" text="You must enter at least one character."/> + <l:gentext key="txt_browser_not_supported" text="JavaScript is disabled on your browser. Please enable JavaScript to enjoy all the features of this site."/> + <l:gentext key="txt_please_wait" text="Please wait. Search in progress..."/> + <l:gentext key="txt_results_for" text="Results for: "/> + <l:gentext key="TableofContents" text="Contents"/> + <l:gentext key="HighlightButton" text="Toggle search result highlighting"/> <l:gentext key="Your_search_returned_no_results" text="La gueta nun devolvió resultaos."/> </l:l10n> <l:l10n language="bg"> diff --git a/docs/stylesheets/po/ast.po b/docs/stylesheets/po/ast.po index 276d6983..0478bba3 100644 --- a/docs/stylesheets/po/ast.po +++ b/docs/stylesheets/po/ast.po @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ # Translators: -# enolp <enolp@softastur.org>, 2016,2018 +# enolp <enolp@softastur.org>, 2016,2018,2020 msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Mageia\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: i18n-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-01-07 18:51+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-02-19 02:20+0000\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-07-09 17:15+0300\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2020-04-02 01:45+0000\n" "Last-Translator: enolp <enolp@softastur.org>\n" "Language-Team: Asturian (http://www.transifex.com/MageiaLinux/mageia/language/ast/)\n" "Language: ast\n" @@ -17,32 +17,32 @@ msgstr "" #: ./WebHelp-DrakX.xsl msgctxt "Search" msgid "Search" -msgstr "Guetar" +msgstr "" #: ./WebHelp-DrakX.xsl msgctxt "Enter_a_term_and_click" msgid "Enter a term and click " -msgstr "Introduz un términu y fai clic" +msgstr "" #: ./WebHelp-DrakX.xsl msgctxt "Go" msgid "Go" -msgstr "Dir" +msgstr "" #: ./WebHelp-DrakX.xsl msgctxt "to_perform_a_search" msgid " to perform a search." -msgstr "pa facer una gueta." +msgstr "" #: ./WebHelp-DrakX.xsl msgctxt "txt_filesfound" msgid "Results" -msgstr "Resultaos" +msgstr "" #: ./WebHelp-DrakX.xsl msgctxt "txt_enter_at_least_1_char" msgid "You must enter at least one character." -msgstr "Has introducir polo menos un caráuter." +msgstr "" #: ./WebHelp-DrakX.xsl msgctxt "txt_browser_not_supported" @@ -50,28 +50,26 @@ msgid "" "JavaScript is disabled on your browser. Please enable JavaScript to enjoy " "all the features of this site." msgstr "" -"JavaScript ta desactiváu nel restolador. Actívalu pa esfrutar de toles " -"carauterístiques d'esti sitiu." #: ./WebHelp-DrakX.xsl msgctxt "txt_please_wait" msgid "Please wait. Search in progress..." -msgstr "Espera, por favor. Gueta en cursu..." +msgstr "" #: ./WebHelp-DrakX.xsl msgctxt "txt_results_for" msgid "Results for: " -msgstr "Resultaos pa:" +msgstr "" #: ./WebHelp-DrakX.xsl msgctxt "TableofContents" msgid "Contents" -msgstr "Conteníos" +msgstr "" #: ./WebHelp-DrakX.xsl msgctxt "HighlightButton" msgid "Toggle search result highlighting" -msgstr "Alternar resaltáu de resultaos de gueta" +msgstr "" #: ./WebHelp-DrakX.xsl msgctxt "Your_search_returned_no_results" diff --git a/docs/stylesheets/po/doc_xsl.pot b/docs/stylesheets/po/doc_xsl.pot index 6da2ef17..9c0cbf33 100644 --- a/docs/stylesheets/po/doc_xsl.pot +++ b/docs/stylesheets/po/doc_xsl.pot @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Mageia XSL files translation\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: i18n-discuss@ml.mageia.org\n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-07-09 17:15+0300\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2020-04-02 08:42+0300\n" "PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" "Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n" "Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n" |